Home

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series WS02-LCTC1-EV5 CX

1. Note The user defined names for a user defined block can be changed by selecting the block on the Project Workspace tree right clicking and selecting Change Comment 3 6 5 Exporting User defined Blocks to Files Select the user defined block to be exported to a file ucb and select Settings User defined Block Export The following dialog box will be displayed Input the file name and save the file Save in c Equipment 4 File name Feed forward uch Save as uct file L ancel 2 178 Creating User defined Blocks Section 3 6 The file type is ucb file name extension ucb 3 6 6 Importing User defined Blocks from Files Open the project into which the user defined block is to be imported select the LCB element and select Settings User defined Block Import Specify a file ucb input a function block name for the user defined block and click the Set Button The block will be imported as shown below a Ox P rocess Tool Er L in v m Fie Wee eme p User defined function block has been imported als osla e Ayd aelel x NodeO LCBO5 User Defined Block Feed forward O x 53 Equipment m 22 088 NodeO1 001 01 Sycle System common operation cycle 9 00 LOBOS 225 01 System a 02 Fiel
2. Service Settings 8 LINIT FgwSocket NameSpac 8 SerialUnit UNITO ETN UNIT Startup Path SerialUnit Manual M G Program Files OMR Status Running Start SCM at log in 310A The FinsGateway Settings Window can be used to check whether or not on line communications were properly established by the serial initialization operations 4 2 3 Using CX Server When CX Server is selected as the communications driver and the initial set tings described below have been made the online connection is established au tomatically when online operations such as downloading are executed There is no need for operations like the FinsGateway serial initialization operations Serial Connections Initial Settings Initial Settings in CX Process Tool 1 2 3 248 The unit number setting procedure is the same as the procedure for the Fins Gateway After setting the unit number take the following steps in the CX Process Tool 1 Select Change PLC from the Settings Menu 2 The Change PLC Dialog Box will be displayed Change PLC Device Device Type CS1G 0 1G Settings Network SYSMAC WAY Settings Cancel Select SYSMAC WAY Host Link as the network type Initial Settings
3. 7 To change the position of a function block select the block the cursor will change to a hand and drag it to the desired position 4 The cursor will automatically be changed to a pencil icon when the cursor is moved to the connection s start point 5 Click the start point of the connection and double click the end point The software connection will appear To bypass the route click the apex of the corner so that the direction can be changed by 90 GxX Process Tool Equipment 01 File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help psal Si male zz NodeOl 5 Block Diagram 1 1 Equipment Gq NodeD1 001 01 Cycle System common operation cycle 2 88 00 LOBOS 225 01 System 901 001 02 Field Terminal Al 4 point 041 Basic PID 1 03 Sequence Control gt py EO4 Block Diagram 1 i z3 05 Block Diagram 2 z3 06 Block Diagram 3 902 Square Root AD 4 point 0041 7 116 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Note a The ITEM name will be displayed if you point at the ITEM at the 901 Al 4 point ADOH end point Confirm ITEM names when making connection
4. 180 345 Creatine Sequence Tables uses tana a am ASQ DE E mda 195 3 9 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Units 207 3 10 Displaying Loop Controller Memory 212 d oS mg BONS Vana 216 FI ed fiery Sewer eg Burg awe ene drops 224 SECTION 4 Online vx WOES a COE uv RW 235 AA Overview ot Online Functions coo 54 05 esd ew Seca RU UG Rowe eee RP Sexe s 236 4 2 Initial Settings for Online Connections 238 4 3 Downloading Uploading and Comparing 251 4 4 Run Stop Command da com eppure rm ER ERIS EE C REPRE S 264 Aa Momor pe Ub wee harlow dE Bah wine ast os duco ius 266 Check a ot ox Ned e oe hon law ius 270 CEN O sacar Gate due 6 den heb oe I oN Av S aU MALAE 294 4 9 and JRecOVeby o s ats pc a ap at i o me dede n d 306 4 9 Transferring Tag and Comment 309 AO ar IE 59 08 ts ache dise Y aco Reon SUI ac
5. UR DG das pal m d LAE UE IET Eum ERR zi np agri IER a 338 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W372 E1 11 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised content 2000 Original production December 2000 CX Process Tool version changed from 1 50 to 2 00 The manual has been up dated for this version change as summarized in section 1 2 3 September 2001 CX Process Tool version changed from 2 00 to 2 50 The manual
6. 003 Stopped 002 Stopped 902 CPU memory Square Root Basic PID 4 point 0041 ext SP XI 000 0 00 PM DV 0 MIE_AD 0 When the Loop Controller is not operating Stopped will appear the upper left Nothing will be displayed when the Loop Controller is in operation Operation Check Section 4 6 The present values of the analog I O ITEMS for all function block diagrams will be displayed If there is an execution error in a function block while the Loop Controller is in operation the execution error code with the prefix ER will appear on the upper right of the function block Input value 0 00 in this example Analog output Example SP Output value Example 0 00 Connection Check Check items 1 and 2 below to determine if the function blocks are connected cor rectly 1 2 3 1 Outputting the Source Function Blocks In the above example check on the output side right side of the function block that output Y of the source Square Root Block is 89 44 Output value Note By double clicking the source function block the output value can be checked as well The following Send Dialog Box will appear when the Square Root Block is double clicked Output value 273 Operation Check Section 4 6 2 Input Value Double click the de
7. 4 Tune parameters such as PID constants and make SP settings with the CX Process Tool 43 Operations Section 1 8 Step 7 Actual Operation 1 2 3 1 Make any necessary settings and adjustments such as PID tuning with the CX Process Tool SCADA software the CX Process Monitor or the CX Process Monitor Plus 2 Monitor the PV and all alarms from SCADA software the CX Process Moni tor or the CX Process Monitor Plus Note The CX Process Monitor can be used for the Loop Control Units only It cannot be used for the LCBI 15 1 8 Operations 1 8 1 Creating Function Blocks Creating a new Project Workspace New from the File Menu Registering function blocks Select the function block group folder 3 1 6 Select Insert Insert Function Block from the Settings Menu or right click on the block diagram and select Register Field Terminal Sequence Control Control Block Creating software connection between function 1 Select the folder for block diagram 1 blocks Select Edit Block Diagram from the Settings Menu Select the function block to be pasted Click the right mouse button at the pasting position Select Paste Function Block from the pop up menu Select the block and change the position Click the start point of the connection and double click the end point Settings ITEMs Double click the function block registered on the Project Workspace Screen 2 Double click
8. E0 00050 ee FREI FE eee E0 00060 i i E E0 00070 BESTE EET 0 00080 E0 00090 E0 00100 E0 00110 00000 to EO 00079 are displayed in blue ae indicating that they are allocated as the HMI I F 0 00140 0 00150 0 00160 E0 00170 0 00180 0 00190 0 00200 0 00210 0 00220 0 00230 0 00240 UserLink Tabe HMI I F Send Area 7 HMI I F Recv Area Field Terminal Overlap Overap Recv Area Memory Map Detail Select the I O memory word cell in the Memory Map Window and click the a icon to display the Detail View Window Detail View x Address Tag Name ITEM Name UL X ClOo0000 Bit data included 214 Displaying Loop Controller Memory Maps Section 3 10 Display Items Displayed items Green User Link Table Address Tag Name ITEM Name except field terminals Link Number HS HMI I F Send Area Address Tag Name ITEM Name a HMI I F Receive Area Address Tag Name ITEM Name FT Orange Field terminal Address Tag Name ITEM Name R W OT Dark Other memory links Address R W green Checking the Result Window Overlap Displays a list of any CPU Unit I O memory addresses that are overlapping in cluding overlap in data written to CPU Unit in the HMI I F User Link Table or Field Terminals to enable checking for overlapping addresses This
9. Equipment a NodeO1 001 01 00 LCBOS 225 H 01 System 02 Field Terminal 901 Al 4 point amp DO41 902 AO 4 point DAO41 59 03 Sequence Control 701 Sequence T able zg 04 Block Diagram 1 001 Basic PID 002 Basic PID 003 Square Root 59 05 Block Diagram 2 59 06 Block Diagram 3 Connection Map Input source LCB Output destination 001 Basic PID Anakg input Specify source ITEM GOT PY PY Input Specity source G2a RSP Rem oce Set Polne Input E Anske output ITEM Current See Point ouput ITEM 044 DV Devladon coupar P SP ITEM G27 MV C YY W Digital input 06 701 Seauence Table Symbol OuT une Ho Operadon signaltet C1T AOF Alam swop swich C19X PY_ABH PY execudon emor Inalcadon ITEM GZE 54 Remon Local swicch ITEM AT 00 701 Sequence Table Symbol HL AT commana AT Execudng une Conaldon signalces ITEM Ge1 MIE AD Cucotrange processing ITEM SW Auto Manual swich C21 UV ABH WY emor alsplay Digits output Function Block TEU 01 unt This connection map will allow checking the I O relationship for individual ITEMs The connection map can also be printed by right clicking on the map and selecting Print Note Connection maps can also be displ
10. YYYY MM DD ITEM data in the same order as ITEM names above tab delimited HH MM SS If the refresh cycle is set to 200 ms the multiple data for 1 second will be stored as one entry because the CSV file format is for data every second 295 Tuning Section 4 7 CSV File Format Data is saved in the following format logged data Batch Flowrate Capture Block Model 014 E Batch Flowrate Capture Block Model 014 Block 014 YAMV MV Fuzzy Logic Block Model 016 c X2 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 Y1 Y2 Number of Records When the maximum of 65 500 records is reached the message will be displayed and the Tuning Screen will be ended automatically Data Logging Cycle The data logging cycle is 1 s or 200 ms Set 200 msec or 1 sec in the Tuning Screen Setting Dialog Box Note Setting the data logging cycle to 200 ms does not necessarily mean that the re fresh cycle will be 200 ms because the load on the computer and other factors will affect it Use this setting as a guideline only If the refresh cycle is set to 200 ms the multiple data for 1 second will be stored as one entry because the CSV file format is for data every second 296 Tuning Section 4 7 4 7 3 Screen Configuration Monitoring Cycle Status Click the text to display the dialog boxes used to change the settings Make Blue Cycle is within specified value 1 s or 200 ms changes using the ten key dialog box using the
11. 099 MPU FROM version indication 42 50 gt m i Version V2 50 and onwards must be indicated 1 5 5 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 3 2 Function Blocks The following function blocks can be used only with LCBO1 LCBOS version 1 5 or with Earlier later or LCBO3 together with the CX Process Tool version 3 20 or higher ersions Ai4 Terminal PTS51 Ai8 Terminal PTS55 Ai4 Terminal PTS52 Ai8 Terminal PTS56 Ai8 Terminal PDC55 Ao2 Terminal DAO21 Ai4 Ao2 Terminal MAD42 29 Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions Section 1 5 e f an earlier version of the Loop Control Board is used with CX Process Tool version 3 20 or higher these function blocks can be registered but the data for the function blocks won t be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit when LCU element data is downloaded The supported function blocks will be down loaded normally e f Loop Control Board version 1 20 or later is used with a lower version of the CX Process Tool these function blocks cannot be registered in the CX Pro cess Tool so they cannot be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit If these function blocks have been downloaded to the Loop Control Unit al ready the data for these function blocks won t be uploaded from the Loop Con trol Unit The supported function blocks will be uploaded normally If Upload New is selected the unsupported function blocks will be empty
12. qe pr ES rs sp E 00 EAR puru RE RENE nnn DH se I Eg sgg la ues dde des Sr sau ope prep des ERE ORE PRU 8 022 Lg Esq ap i uude 0 oes nsus ope pps desir eed FEN D DERI TE RI C E S I I OT IG ORITUR 028 Ene de LLL 027 eae aa
13. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l I lI ll ll ll ll ll Il ll ll ll ll ll 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I lI ll ll ll ll ll Il ll ll ll ll cl 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l I lI lI ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ol cl 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l I Il ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I lI ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l I l ll ll cl 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LI lI ILL lI ILL lI IL ol ol ll Oeste 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I lI ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll cl 1 LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LL I1 lI lI Il oll lx la lI oll olx If the block address has a RAM checksum error in the function block data base one of the following values will be displayed in the block address with the vertical row specifying the 10 s digit in the block address and the horizon tal row specifying the 1 s digit in the block address 1 Block address not used 0 Normal no function block database error 90 Database error in the function block See note Note For a database error in all the function blocks the value will be indefi nite Example No database error while registering block addresses 000 001 002 and 100 0 Normal with no database error in function block Block address not used 1 Detailed Display pee DT DE Coy ait TEC ND 268 Monitor Run Status Section 4 5
14. COM1 Line name COM1 Network number 1 Network type 1 serial unit Userdehned SYSWAY C SYSWAY CS1 CPUB3 43 42 C200H n Add Delete Property Explore Erpa Apply After serial initialization the node number will be set to 1 actually 01 and the protocol will be set to SYSWAY CV To modify the settings click the Properties Button 2 FinsGateway Settings The FinsGateway Settings start and stop communications service If the Controller Link or Ethernet is being used start the FinsGateway com munications service from the FinsGateway Settings Select FinsGateway Settings from the FinsGateway Menu and select Ser ialUnit from the Services directory tree on the left side of the window 247 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 Click the Start Button on the right side of the window to perform the same operations that are performed in serial initialization The Serial Unit will start CPU UNIT is always started as shown in the following diagram OMRON FinsGateway Settings Pile Es File Network EventMemory View Tool Help Tool Bar FY Ner Basic DocoMemo Info Networks M Networks and Units Drivers Memories ER EventMemories Event Conditions FINS Data Areas 465 Services CPU UNIT ws FgwSocketProxy ws MapAgent 4 NameSpaceServer 463 SerialUnit wee CLK_UNITO wee ETN UNIT
15. Initial settings S Initial settings in the function blocks in the data for an LCU LCB element in the function block file ist and mnemonic data in step ladder programs Note The above includes registered function blocks data on block ad dress allocations and data on software connections for analog and accumulator signals Operation data O Operation data on the function blocks in the data for an LCU LCB element in the function block file ist Initial settings and operation The data for an LCU LCB element in the function block file ist and data S and O the mnemonic data in step ladder programs Note The classification of initial settings S and operation data O items are shown in the Type column in the list of ITEMs for each function block E NodeO1 1 001 1 11 001 Basic PID Comment Block number Basic PID Operation cycle PV source designation High high alarm setting High alarm setting Low alarm setting Low low alarm setting Hysteresis setting Alarm stop switch PY error source designation Remote Set Point source designat Local Set Point setting Set Point setting mode default PV tracking at local setting MA Remote Local switch Bumpless processing between prim AT command AT Executing Limit cycle MY amplitude Limit cycle hysteresis AT calculation gain Judgement deviation for provision AT type Deviation alarm setting Deviation alarm standby sequence Processing cycle of PID
16. Coniecine oe PLC a a ee a Vae ke RA 31 1 6 1 Features of FinsGateway and CX Server 31 1 6 2 Selecting the Communications 32 O Usine PinsGrdteway oso GE PE oe AME E eA Ue eet EE 32 120 5 a esee EA nhs hans AG he RRA ees MEE TE 35 1 7 Basie Opetatine Procedunes oen idt rers d aree que edo eda etas 36 1 5 aera etos Eres ted atus diia s Uam aerea E 44 1 8 1 Creating Function Blocks 44 1 5 2 Onine Operations scout tor e Paws ctiain ei etos 46 CX Process Tool Section 1 1 1 1 CX Process Tool 1 1 1 Overview Note The CX Process Tool supports the following functions for Loop Controllers In this manual the WS02 LCTC1 EV5 CX Process Tool software package is generally referred to as simply the CX Process Tool e Creating function blocks including the following functions e Setting the Step Ladder Program Block block 000 including the follow ing System common operation cycle Loop Control Unit number Loop Control Unit only start mode first address of data memory of node termi nal Loop Control Unit only e Registering function blocks allocating block addresses e Connecting function blocks with analog and accumulator signals e
17. Note The unit Ver of the Loop Controller can be monitored using ITEM 099 as shown below Daaname Dat 099 MPU FROM version V1 20V1 20 Indicates that a Loop Controller with Unit Ver 1 20 is being used 4 5 4 Checking Versions Check whether the version of the Loop Controller connected online and the ver sion of the CX Process Tool are compatible Check that the Loop Controller ver sion and the version of the created project are compatible 1 2 3 1 Enable communications with the Loop Controller 2 Select Check Version from the Execute Menu The following Check Ver sion Dialog Box will be displayed The following Version Check Dialog Box will be displayed Compatible The following dialog box will be displayed if the project data currently being created and the version match Yersion Check E x Loop Controller Ver 3 00 Project consistency Project version accorded with Loop controller Version Incompatible The following dialog box will be displayed if the project data currently being created and the version do not match If they do not match the project data for mat must be converted Select Change LC Type from the Execution Menu ersion Check E x Loop Controller Model wer 1 51 Project consistency Project data now in progress Y 3 00 Model af loop controller or unit version does not
18. 1 5 6 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 4 0 Function Blocks The following function blocks can be used only with LCBO1 LCBOS5 version 2 0 or et with Earlier later or LCBO3 together with the CX Process Tool version 4 0 or higher ersions Ai4 Terminal PTS51 52 Block Model 590 Ao2 Terminal DAO21 Block Model 591 Ai4 Ao2 Terminal MAD42 Block Model 592 e f an earlier version of LCBL is used with a lower version of the CX Process Tool these function blocks cannot be registered in the CX Process Tool so they cannot be downloaded to the 1 5 7 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 5 0 Function Blocks The following function blocks be used only with LCBOS and only if LCBOS is with Earlier used together with CX Process Tool version 5 1 or higher If used with a lower ersions version of the CX Process Tool the following function blocks cannot be regis tered and therefore cannot be downloaded to the Loop Control Board Gradient PV Mode Converter Block Model 021 Gradient SP Mode Converter Block Model 022 Gradient PID Block Model 024 Gradient Precompensator Block Model 023 The following function blocks can be used only with LCBO1 LCBOS5 version 3 0 or later LCBOS version 3 0 or later together with the CX Process Tool version 5 0 or higher e The following function blocks cannot be registered if LCBO1 LCBOS version 3 0 or later LCBOS vers
19. 5w Remote Lacal switch 035 0 AT command AT Executing 036 CWYCL OUT 20 00 Limit cycle My amplitude 037 CVYCL 0 20 Limit cycle hysteresis 058 GIM 1 00 AT calculation gain 039 DEV 13 20 Judgment DEY For provisional 040 _ 0 AT type 041 OQ SP 151 80 C Deviation alarm setting 3 DIR Direckian cmnd 054 F 100 0 Proportional band 055 I Integral action 056 o D 0 Differential time Q Ma action 065 ALFA 0 65 2 parameter alpha 066 BETA 1 00 2 parameter ITEM List Display Basic PID with Engineering Unit Mode Enabled 3 9 6 Editing Function Block ITEMs Use the following procedure to input analog data using engineering data 1 2 3 1 Enter the Engineering Unit Mode as described in 3 9 4 Setting Projects in Engineering Unit Mode Open the ITEM Setting Window and click on the General Data input area The Engineering Input Dialog Box will be displayed Input the value General data If a conversion error occurs a warning will be displayed After confirmation the rounded value will be set 209 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Units Section 3 9 3 9 7 Displaying Engineering Units When Confirming Operation Displaying Monitor ITEM Lists Engineering unit display and settings are enabled in the monitor ITEM list The notation is the same as for the ITEM list shown
20. Bumpless processing Deviation alarm standby sequence Processing cycle of PID control Control action 00 000 Out of range processing 0 Output retrace time for PV error Inversion of host indicated MV 000 000 MV error source designation 115 00 High high alarm setting High alarm setting Low alarm setting Low low alarm setting Alarm stop switch Local Set Point setting Remote Local switch OOOOOOO C C C C C C C The initial setting data S and operation data O appears in the Type col umn Each ITEM for which the letter S appears in the Type column i e ini tial setting data must be set with the CX Process Tool Any ITEM for which the letter O appears in the Type column i e operation data can be set with the CX Process Monitor BB 01 LCBO1 04 001 Basic PID OF XI ITEM Type ITEM tac DataName 4 lt Initial setting data gt COMMENT Basic PID Comment MODEL 011 Model Basic PID CNT TMEX System common Operation cycle D0 common SCAN NO 2000 Operation order PV AD 000 000 PY source designation HS_SP 1 00 Hysteresis setting PVE AD 000 000 PY error source designation ALM_LIM 0 Alarm limit RSP 000 000 RSP source CAS_SET Set Point setting mode default 52 PY tracking at local 58 Bumpless processing Dv S Deviation alarm standby sequence RATE Processing cycle of PID control DIR REV C
21. Note The above automatic registration of CSV tag settings is executed at the following times Function block insertion function block pasting small item pasting when middle block is selected or block diagram pasting 147 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 2 When the node function blocks are saved a CSV setting file with the follow ing contents project_name csv is automatically created in a folder with the project name under CX Process Tool data Settings Data set for automatic CSV tag registration Tag name representative TagO 0 Function block No tag PANY upper limit 10 000 Note for internal switches Decimal point position number of digits below Um This will be O for Operation Blocks and internal decimal point for scaling switches other than upper and lower limit alarms and deviation alarms Network address 0 to 127 The contents of registered Node address 0 to 32 function blocks pa automatically reflected Unit address 16 to 31 225 Block model to 1 000 Block address O to 1 000 Block model name 3 Open and edit the CSV setting file project name csv using a spreadsheet program such as Excel Project csv Made Machine No Block Type Block Mo Block Type Mame 1 2 position ON OFF Edit the tag names representative tags scaling upper and lower limits decimal point positions and units as shown in the following illustration ED Praject cgv x
22. 2 The following scaling is available on the CX Process Monitor Set the range high limit RH and range low limit RL within the specified range Number of digits 5 digits max including sign and decimal digits Numeric range 5000 to 99999 Example One decimal 550 0 to 9999 9 Compiling Monitor Tags Note When CX Server has been selected as the communications driver set the node address to a non zero value in the Change PLC Dialog Box before compiling the CSV tag file Select Change PLC from the Settings Menu to display the dialog box If the computer is connected online return the node address setting to O Provided that the CX Process Monitor has been installed monitor tags can be compiled for the CX Process Monitor by taking the following steps 1 2 3 1 Select Create Tag File Monitor Tag from the Execution Menu The follow ing dialog box will be displayed Confirm Use the following DB path you sure DB path C Program FilessomransCR Pracess Manitersdb Cancel 135 Using the CX Process Monitor Section 3 2 2 Click the OK Button The following Compile Monitor Tags Dialog Box will ap pear Compile Monitor Tags Compile eset mode Check Overlapping n 3 Click the Compile Button The result will be displayed in the Output Window as shown below Z Check Tag Error result Ma Result 1 Compile Finished d gt 4 If the multi node function block fi
23. 281 294 4 Switching to the Tuning Screen 294 4 7 2 Data Logging on Tuning Screens 295 45 23 Screen Configuration Wines dates tae ee ET EMEN SA Sd 297 pace Controls 424 5 xeu Raabe ad he US eis 298 4 Ja Operdtton Procedures s oes dE ETE Te MEET MUS DR ES 302 4 9 Backup and RCCOVELY uas dont SU Re P Me DOO Du AO ad cms Ib ate rale eror ung 306 JL BackupjPPtOCCdUie esca pu aute we Ue e out ete penas 306 AS PIOCGOUEIC Saco P Fark e TUE qua ous edis T eed teo a wea a 307 4 9 Transferring Tag and Comment Data 309 4 9 1 Backing Up Data to the Memory Card 309 4 9 2 Recovering Data from the Memory Card 311 CIE Om ors aep aar gA 313 Contsolline the Cc PED BIG 2 2 24 ery ar en oca nera am eere un 314 ALi Creatine the DO Tables ie tre a bx og toe a e oit edes 314 4 L1 2 Sern the PLC Setup oos socer orbc eae ee a 314 4 11 3 Changing the Operating Mode of the CPU Unit 314 2 12 Password ProtecuOn os us cmi bi op ob Pd ea ui a d
24. 901 001 Al 4 point ADOH Basic PID 1 ABN bi 002 902 Square Root Basic PID AD 4 point DA041 zxi il LCBOS 3 0 Net 0 Node 0 e The ITEM names will be displayed when the cursor is moved to the end point ITEM as shown below 901 001 Al point ADOH Basic PID e Deleting Lines Right click on a line to delete it The line will be highlighted in red Delete the line from the right click menu e Confirming Connection Line Destinations on Block Diagrams All information can be displayed for lines connected to ITEMs in block dia grams If an ITEM is left clicked all lines connected to the ITEM will be highlighted in pink Note In the Free Location Mode 64 function blocks can be pasted in one block dia gram Software connections can be made between block diagrams by pasting a function block with the same block address in each block diagram 8 The data resulting from the connections will automatically be registered to the ITEMs for each block In the above example the block address and 114 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 ITEM number for the connection line destination will be stored in Square Root Block Item 007 as shown in the following figure E Modell LOBOS 04 003 Square Root B x
25. Comment Scaling RH Scaling AL DP i Node Machine Block Type Block Block Type 10000 1001 1 225 1 1 2 position ON OFF Set scaling lower limit to 100 148 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Se ng _ Setting range Tag name representative tag 16 characters max All characters can be used Tag comment 16 characters max All characters can be used Scaling upper limit 5 000 to 99 999 e g if decimal point is set to 1 550 0 to 9 999 9 Scaling lower limit 5 000 to 99 999 e g if decimal point is set to 1 550 0 to 9 999 9 Decimal Point number of digits below decimal point for scaling Note a When the CX Server is selected the node address must be set to a number other than before compiling the SCADA software CSV tag file b Always set tag names SCADA software uses these to identify data 4 Save the filename extension and folder position just as they are 5 Open the Project again The editing results will be automatically reflected in the CSV tag list The CSV tag list is displayed by selecting Show Tag List CSV Tag from the Execution Menu 6 As required use the setting method provided under Setting Tags Individual ly Using the CSV Settings Dialog Box on page 145 to individually edit the function block CSV tags Step 3 Checking CSV Tags Check the CSV tag settings by selecting Show Tag List CSV Tag from the Execution Menu The foll
26. Example A 1 Block Send Terminal to Computer is registered and block ad dress 001 is designated as a source amp Initial setting data gt 5 1 Black PeTx S 405 Block number 1 Block Send Termi 5 i COperatien evele UN Connection Control block address gt eration data gt Designated as source 132 Using the CX Process Monitor Section 3 2 Note Note Note Setting Monitor Tags Set a monitor tag for the function blocks to exchange data with the CX Process Monitor 1 Block Send Terminal to Computer or 4 Block Send Terminal to Computer Block Models 403 404 Select the 1 Block Send Terminal to Computer or 4 Block Send Terminal to Computer and then select Tag Setting Monitor Tag from the Settings Menu The following Monitor Tags Dialog Box will appear Input the tag name tag com ment scale range high limit and range low limit decimal position and unit data items and then click the OK Button The scale range high limit and range low limit decimal position and unit data items are common SP and PV settings for the function block Monitor Tags Ma 1 Comment 1 Block address 501 Function Block model 405 Function Block name 1 Bleck Send Terminal ta Compute See 1 For a 4 Block Send Terminal to Computer four function blocks are selected for areas 1 through 4 2 The AO or DO to Computer or AO or DO Terminal to All Nodes Functio
27. Function Hock List Conte nts LOBOS i address Sytem Common auc Intern al 3 witch 02 Terminal address Block 904 5 GE AI 4 poin AD041 A d point 0 80041 05 address m ed Block TU uz Sequence able 04 Block Dia gam 1 address mod Block 011 Baac 011 Baac 13 Square cet 3 11 3 Printing Block Diagrams Printing an Active i e Currently Open Block Diagram 1 2 3 1 Select the block diagram folder and select Edit Block Diagram from the oettings Menu to set the Edit Block Diagram Mode 2 Right click the block diagram window and select Print Block Diagram from the pop menu The following Print Dialog Box will be displayed Printer Name Canon LASER SHOT LBFP 31 Properties Status Default printer Ready Type Canon LASER SHOT LBP 31U Where Sus Iso lbp3U ple1 Comment Print te file Print range Copies All 0 Pages from tof Number of copies 1 Cancel C selestium 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing 218 Printing Section 3 11 Printing Example ADOH Printing for an LCU LCB Element 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element in the Project Workspace and then Select Print and Block Diagram from the File Menu The follo
28. N Caution other area used by the CPU Unit or other Units If areas overlap the system may operate in an unexpected manner which may result in injury When using a user link table to write bit data to I O memory in the CPU Unit Never allow ladder programming or communications processes in the CPU Unit to write to any bits in the words in which bits are written from a user link table Depending on the timing any attempts to write to these words from ladder programming or communications processes may be ignored Example If tag A in a user link table writes to bit 00 of WOOO and an OUT instruction in the ladder program in the CPU Unit write to bit 01 of WOOO the write from the ladder program may be ignored Confirm the status of connected devices before transferring the setting for the MV tight shut function and MV analog output reverse function to the Loop Con troller Devices and equipment may perform unexpected operations if the data destination is mistaken 3 5 2 Creating User Link Tables 160 1 2 3 Use one of the following methods to create a user link table e Method 1 Registration on the User Link Table Edit Screen e Method 2 Registration from the Block Diagram e Method 3 Batch registration on the User Link Table Edit Screen e Method 4 Automatic Registration when Pasting Field Terminal Block and Creating Software Connections 1 Method 1 Registration on the User Link Table Edit Screen 1 Select Edit User Link Table
29. NN A gt E Es Blocks to manipulate or display contacts from the CX Process Monitor Plus Set CSV Tags and Tags ee monitor Loop Control Units 1 2 3 1 Register the Send All Blocks block Block Model 642 and Receive All Blocks block Block Model 641 2 Set tags as follows e Function block data Set CSV tags e Individual contact signals Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the con tacts in the Internal Switch block Block Model 209 e Individual analog signals from LCB element to computer Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Input Selection block Block Model 162 e Individual analog signals from computer to LCB element Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Constant Generator block Block Model 166 5 1 2 3 1 Make the settings for the HMI in the System Common block Block Model 000 2 Set tags as follows e Function block data Set CSV tags e Individual contact signals Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the con tacts in the Internal Switch block Block Model 209 e Individual analog signals from LCB element to computer Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Input Selection block Block Model 162 e Individual analog signals from computer to LCB element Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Constant Generator block Block Model 166 Note For any Loop Controller the foll
30. SYSMAC OPC Server SYSMAC OPC Server ees version 2 4 or file sdb binary Automatically generated Manually exported RS View tag file csv RS View tag file csv Imported using rt i import utility ug import utility CS Process CS Process Monitor Ba VIEN Monitor Plus CX Process Tool Section 1 1 1 1 5 Operating Conditions of CX Process Tool Using FinsGateway Using CX Server Note Note As shown below the CX Process Tool uses a FinsGateway Embedded Ver sion 2003 or CX Server communications driver to communicate with the PLC Programmable Controller to which a Loop Controller is mounted It is thus nec essary to install the FinsGateway Embedded Version 2003 or CX Server software in the personal computer that will be used When the CX Process Tool starts up a dialog box is displayed to select whether FinsGateway or CX Server will be used as the communications driver The following FinsGateway Embedded communications drivers are available e Serial Unit Driver e CLK PCI Driver e Controller Link Driver e ETN UNIT Driver The software configuration is shown below CX Process Tool CX Process Monitor Software FinsGateway Embedded Hardware RS 232C port Support Board Ethemet Board 1 If FinsGateway Embedded has not been installed it will not be possi
31. Serial Number Eu Unit Yer E 0 There is no Memory Card installed IC51H H CPUB7 Program Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit connected online Functional Element Versions and Programming Devices The Programming Device that supports the functional element version code must be used to enable all the functions in the corresponding functional element Note Upgrading versions is not necessary if only the basic functions of the CPU Unit element are required CPU Unit Element Loop Controller Programming Device Functional Functional CX Process Tool CX Programmer element name element version CONNU note 5 0 or higher 5 0 or p Ver 7 0 or Ver 7 0 or higher CS1G H CPULILIH Pre Ver 2 0 Ver 2 0 5 0 or higher 5 0 or 5 0 or higher Ver 4 0 or higher _ xi Loop Controller Element element name element version See note 1 xii TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS 444 49 ERRARE E XXII 2 AMCICNC acca eee eels XXIV 2 General E FCCAUMONG Se Bald io ele A XXIV 3Sooaleby Precaution osc deem s lar Betas hes aep XXIV A Application Precautions weise m DE dich ao Sree o ie dici te ea de ee ed 1 SECTION 1 Introduc0mn eee eer ne eres 1 Ish CX Process Tools w
32. Stopping Operation of Click the Stop Block Operation Button to stop the operation of the function Function Blocks with block displayed in the block address the basic PID in block address 001 in the Contact ITEMs following case 11 Block Diagram 1 kd 001 Basic PID mE HH High high alarm output H High alarm output L Low alarm output LL Low law alarm output 51 Alarm stop switch PE error indication Remoter Local switch AT command Executing DA Deviation alarm output Auto Manual switch MVE M error display 280 Operation Check Section 4 6 Restarting Function Blocks Click the Start Block Operation Button in the Execute Dialog Box to make the operation of the function block displayed in the block address the basic PID in block address 001 in the following case resume Function Block Group Block Diagram 1 Block Address Basic PID Refresh ion Execute Show All value of Contact I O Data Mame HH High high alarm output H High alarm output L Low alarm output LL Low low alarm output 51 Alarm stop switch PY error indication R L Remote Local switch AT command Executing DA Deviation alarm output ASM Manual switch error display 4 6 7 Validating Sequence Table Operation LCB05 05D Only The operation of a sequence table in a Loop Controller can be validated Sequence Table Validate Act
33. For details on NSFP refer to the Face Plate Auto Builder for NS Operation Manual W418 157 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Procedure for Starting Face Plate Auto Builder for NS NSFP 1 2 3 1 Install NSFP version 2 0 or higher in the personal computer beforehand 2 Set the CSV tags for each function block using the CX Process Tool 3 Select Create Tag File Start NSFP from the Execute Menu or click the Ex icon in the toolbar 4 CSV tags will be compiled 5 When the tag compilation has been completed normally the NSFP will start automatically 6 The path to the CSV tag file created in step 4 will be automatically specified in the CSV Tag File field in the NSFP parameter settings screen Note This function requires NSFP version 2 0 or higher 158 User Link Tables Section 3 5 3 5 User Link Tables 3 5 1 Overview User link tables are used to exchange data between a Loop Controller and the CPU Unit User link tables cannot be used with Loop Control Units A user de fined tag name and conditions for data exchange with the CPU Unit are set for each row of the table For each tag name the specified I O memory locations in the CPU Unit are read and written according to the specified conditions Up to 2 400 tags can be created Tags are registered in the user link table using the CX Process Tool Once tags have been registered in a user link table they can be used in line connections sequence tables
34. Grid Mode When selected displays the grid Off Tag Display Mode When selected displays CSV tag Off names for function block names Table automatically processing period for the function Section 3 12 When selected outputs OPC Off Server scaling tags Use this option to perform scaling using an OPC Server When selected makes outputting OPC Server scaling tags the default setting Off When selected outputs scaling Off tags for CSV tags in the user link table OPC Server scaling tag output is also enabled for CSV tag entries in the user link table When selected the limits for the Off data range of the three ITEMs MV MH LMT and ML LMT on the OPC Server are set to lower limit 0 00 and upper limit 100 0096 When selected replaces the hash symbol at the beginning of tag names in the CSV tag file with an underscore Off 100 When selected displays function Off blocks pasted in the function block diagram in colors according to the type of function block Scale Sets the display zoom for the 100 ladder diagram When selected displays Off information for the selected ITEM When selected edit mode is Off automatically entered when a sequence table is displayed Show Point When selected displays On Navigation intersections Show Vertical Line When selected displays vertical Off lines On When selected automatically registers tags in the
35. Peut d edt 315 4 2 1 Online Operations for Loop Controller 315 4 12 2 Inputting the Password before Uploading Data 316 235 Overview of Online Functions 1 Section 4 1 4 1 Overview of Online Functions The CX Process Tool has the following online functions Function Description Menu commands Download Upload Downloads uploads or compares function block files ist to Execute Download Upload RAM in the Loop Controller New Upload Previous and Note The comparison of two function block files including C9 Pare mnemonics is possible Download Individual ITEM data can be downloaded from the ITEM s Click the Download Button after Individual ITEM Settings Dialog Box setting a value in the function block ITEM s Settings Dialog Box Alternatively display the ITEM s Settings Dialog Box from the ITEM List set the desired value and click the Download Button Run Stop command Runs or stops the Loop Controller Execute Operation and Run Stop Monitor run status Sets and monitors the System Common Block block model Execute Operation and Monitor 000 of a Loop Controller Run Status Validate action Debugs the function block data in RAM of a Loop Controller 1 Monitors all ITEM Reading and displaying all f the Select Monitor ITEM List from data in specified ITEM data in function blocks the pop up menu or Execution function blocks except Ste
36. Select the ITEM to be printed using the Project Workspace and then select Print and the type of data to be printed from the File Menu or right click the data that is currently open and select Print OO from the pop up menu Note Data can be printed vertically portrait on A4 only Do not use any other paper size Block diagrams however can be printed horizontally landscape on 4 3 11 1 Printable Data Printable item Condition for Pop up menu selection Function blocks Block addresses block models Print Function block names and all ITEM settings Block Select the desired LCU LCB element function block group or function block Block diagrams Block diagram Edit Block Print Block Print Block Diagram Mode Diagram Diagram in Block Diagram Edit Mode Note Annotations comments can be inserted Ladder diagrams Ladder symbols and operands Edit Step Ladder Print Ladder Print Ladder address Program Mode Diagram Diagram in Ladder Diagram Edit Note Annotati ote otations comments can Mode be inserted Cross references Cross references i e contact When Print Print of Step Ladder addresses block addresses cross references Cross References Cross Reference Programs mnemonic row numbers are displayed when cross instructions and output comments references are displayed Monitor tag list Monitor tag list i e open monitor When monitor tag Print Monitor Tag Print when the Loop Control tag lists LCB elemen
37. The following functions are supported for downloading e Function block data i e LCU LCB elements function blocks or ITEMs can be transferred to the RAM in the Loop Controller Selection can be made when transferring between initial data operation data or initial data and operation data e The data stored in RAM is copied to the internal compact flash memory See note e Tag data comment data and block diagram data is transferred to a Memory Card or to the internal flash memory refer to 4 9 Transferring Tag and Com ment Data on page 309 for details See note Note This function is supported for the LCBI J only Any of the functions can be selected by setting the required option when down loading 252 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 Note 1 The default values for each function block are transferred as operation data when downloading function blocks Default values are also transferred to output ITEMs e g MV if function groups are downloaded while the Loop Controller is in operation Confirm the status of connected devices before downloading 2 To check the compatibility of the Loop Controller version for the online con nection and the CX Process version before downloading select Check Version from the Run Menu Restrictions for Loop Controller Model and Version 1 Loop Controller Boards e Ver 2 0 or Lower If LCBL Ver 2 0 or lower is used and a Memory Card i
38. 10 If the CX Server is already installed on the computer the Installer will auto matically check the CX Server version and driver and update them as re quired Depending on the version of CX Server that was already installed and confirmation dialog box may be displayed 55 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 11 The following dialog box will be displayed when the Installer completes the installation Click the Finish Button CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing C Process Tool on your computer Online registration Note It might be necessary to restart Windows after completing the installation If nec essary restart Windows according to the message from the Installer 12 The Readme txt file will be displayed after the computer is restarted 13 The Online Registration Dialog Box will be displayed when the Readme txt file is closed Online Registration Do you want to register online Do not display this dialog again A wizard will be started and will connect to the OMRON CX One Web if the Register Button is clicked See notes Note a Ifthe Exit Button is clicked to cancel registration the Online Reg istration Dialog Box will be displayed every time the CX One Con figuration Tool is started b Online installation will not be possible if the computer is not con nected to the Internet Enter
39. 2 Extension can be used with LCB projects of Ver 3 0 or later 3 When using LCB projects with unit Ver 1 5 or earlier if specified entries or all entries are downloaded always download the LCU or LCB elements 172 Creating User defined Blocks Section 3 6 3 6 Creating User defined Blocks 3 6 1 Overview Groups of function blocks with analog I O connections can be registered as a signal user defined block The user defined blocks can be saved and reused as required CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher This group of function blocks can be registered as one user defined block Function block defined by the user can be saved as a file User defined blocks can be Same Project or a Different Project inserted or imported For example a commonly used control method consisting of a group of function blocks for cascade control feedforward control etc and including any analog compensation and switching blocks required before and after the main blocks can be registered as one group With a user defined block like this one you can eliminate the need to register and connect function blocks for each con trol method or process Just read in a user defined block created in advance and combine it with the analog terminals required by the system to easily create function block data User defined blocks can be saved in files with a file name extension of ucb These files can be read into other projects to e
40. Data title display E Cancel Scale This option sets the zoom factor for ladder diagrams This option performs the same function as the Scale Menu in Ladder Diagram Mode 100 default The normal display size 50 Half of the default size 200 Twice the default size Data title display When this option is selected information is displayed on selected ITEMs This option is not selected by default This option performs the same function as Data title display on the Change Mode Menu in Ladder Diagram Mode 3 12 7 Sequence Table Tab Page xj Function Black Diagram Step Ladder Sequence T able User Link Table 4 Scale 1 00 EditMode enabled when window is opened MW Show Point Navigation Show Vertical Line E Cancel 231 Setting Options Section 3 12 Scale This option sets the zoom factor for sequence tables This option performs the same function as the Scale Menu in Sequence Table Mode 100 default The normal display size 50 Half of the default size 200 Twice the default size Edit Mode enabled when window is opened When this option is selected the default edit mode is automatically entered when a sequence table is displayed When this option is not selected edit mode is not entered when a sequence table is displayed To enter edit mode Edit Mode Enable must be selected from the pop up menu that appears after right clicking on the sequence
41. File name and extension Name of function block file OO mtbd Function block group number 04 for LCBLIL 2 The block diagram information file mtbd is not used for downloading uploading or comparing data but the block diagram information between function blocks i e ITEM data is uploaded and downloaded if the Loop Control Unit is version 2 00 or later or an LCBL 1 is used Thus newly uploaded data will have connection diagrams displayed between function blocks This is not actually the same as the connection diagram information file and even though connections themselves will be restored complex connections will be normalized for display A mnemonics ladder diagram information file consists of mnemonic data and ladder diagram data for sequence instructions in step ladder programs The system will automatically store this file with the function block file ist in the same folder whenever a Step Ladder Program Block is registered The user does not normally need to access the mnemonics ladder diagram information file directly 1 When backing up or changing the storage location of this file the file must be backed up or moved together with the node function block files because CX Process Tool Section 1 1 CX Process Monitor Tag Files with Fixed File Name without Extension Note CX Process Monitor Plus Tag Files monitor csv CX Process Tool Ver 3 2
42. FinsGateway Version3 Update 3 12 Welcome to the FinsGateway Version3 Update Setup program This program will install FinsG ateway VMersion3 Update on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law j Cancel 3 Click the Next Button The following Information Dialog Box will appear Information x This program will update for the products listed below ateway Serialllnit Embedded Edition 3 0 nu Cancel 61 Installing and Uninstalling the Software 62 Section 2 1 4 Check the installation folder and click the Next Button The Start Copying Files Dialog Box will appear Start Copying Files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files IF You want to review ar change any settings click Back If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying Files Current Settings Setup will copy files of FinsGateway Update to FinsGateway folder and system folder Fine ateway
43. Password x Existing password Password Cancel 2 Enter the current password under Existing password and leave New Pass word empty 3 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed x 2 Clear LEB Password OK 4 Click the OK Button The password that was previously set in the Loop Con troller will be deleted 4 12 2 Inputting the Password before Uploading Data The password input using Setting Program Protection Edit LCB Password must be input before uploading data from a Loop Controller for which password protection has been set Use the following procedure to input the password 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element e g 00 LCBO5 and then select Setting Program Protection Input Password The following dialog box will be displayed Password entry x Password 2 Enter the password 3 Click the OK Button Note To clear the password that has been input select the LCU LCB element e g 00 LCBO5 and then select Setting Program Protection Clear Password 316 SECTION 5 Troubleshooting This section describes errors that can occur while using the CX Process Tool SL 2 sos tsk weds Bars o ur Parana d dn are Sog ath der eise uada Mui 318 22 gt te debut tastes b Db ea TU en reb atm au uM ES 319 317 Troubleshooting Section 5 1 5 1 Troubleshooting This section provides i
44. Send All Blocks block Block Model 462 and Receive All Blocks block Block Model 461 HMI settings in the System Common block Block Mode 000 Contact signals to exchange Contact Distributor Block Model 201 or Internal Switch Block Model 209 Analog signals to exchange Input Selector block Block Model 162 and Constant Generator block Block Model 166 10 Relationship with CX Process Monitor Section 1 2 Diae 7 ja R j 3 Project Block to input analog signals from Main function blocks Block to output analog signals to Eile the CX Process Monitor Plus Beton Window the CX Process Monitor Plus a NodeO1 001 01 01 10001 1 16 H 01 System 28 02 Field Terminal 28 03 Send Terminal to all nodes 28 04 Receive Terminal from all n 05 Send Terminal to Computer 106 GPU Unit Terminal 07 Sequence Control 21 8 08 SCADA 25 897 Receive All Blocks Bug All block 10 Temporary Memory 11 Block Diagram 1 pz UNI D 100 First order Lag 101 Constant Generator Blocks to monitor function block ITEM tags from the CX Process Monitor Plus m x used es e ojalas jajaja jrn MN NS D Iz dT E gie lt if 5 NS HN Ne T ja Rer m Bele
45. Zoom Out Alt Decreases the size of the connection diagram Left display Errors Checks for errors in the sequence table that Oe been entered Connection Map Displays a connection map that visually When a signal is selected represents the input source and output destination of the selected signal Show Memory Map The status showing how the Loop Controller is When an LCU or using CPU Unit memory can be displayed asa element is selected list Print Prints the sequence table normally PE Separated Prints the sequence table in sections fee 91 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Menus in Edit Step Ladder Program Mode Select a step ladder program block model block 301 first and then select Edit Step Ladder Program from the Settings Menu so that the CX Process Tool will enter Edit Step Ladder Program Mode where the following menus will appear to the right of the Execution Menu Mem son _ Scale Displays the ladder diagram at 100 Displays the ladder diagram at 20096 Displays the ladder diagram at 50 Increases the size of the ladder diagram display Decreases the size of the ladder diagram display Change Mode Ladder Convert Ladder to Converts a step ladder program into mnemonics Mnemonics Convert Mnemonics to Converts a step ladder program written with mnemonics or converts Ladder uploaded mnemonics into a ladder diagram Inserts a row before the row where the cursor
46. ing in progress click the Stop AT Button 334 Setting Segment Programs Appendix C Edit Window Functions The following functions can be executed in the Edit Windows used for Segment Program settings Edit Editing is possible by either selecting cells on the Edit Window and inputting parameters directly or right clicking and selecting Edit from the pop up menu e Press the Enter Key to move to a lower cell When the cursor is in the bottom cell it will next move to the to the cell in the top row e Pressing the Esc Key during an input will cancel the input and restore the original value Undo Used to undo an operation and restore edited data A buffer is provided for up to 10 undo operations Note Transfer to LC operations cannot be undone Redo Used to redo an action that was undone using the undo function Note Transfer to LC operations cannot be redone Copy and Paste By right clicking and selecting Copy from the pop up menu cell contents can be copied to the clipboard The co pied data can then be pasted by clicking on a cell right clicking to display the pop up menu and selecting Paste e t is possible to select and copy multiple cells e Text data edited using an external editor can be pasted Fill Used to copy data from a selected cell to all steps and set the same data for an entire line Select a cell and then right click and select Fill from the pop up menu Insert Columns Used to insert st
47. row signal value is selected in Edit Mode Insert Column Inserts one rule column When a column rule is selected in Edit Mode Delete Column Deletes one rule column When a column rule is selected in Edit Mode Edit Block Item Displays and edits a list of ITEMs for the When a signal is function blocks that are the source and selected destination for the selected signal Edit User Link Table Displays and edits user link table for the When a signal is function blocks that are the source and selected destination for the selected signal Show Connection Map Displays a connection map that visually represents the input source and output destination of the selected signal Find Sequence Table Block Moves the cursor to the function block that corresponds to the currently open sequence table in the Project Workspace Edit Mode Enables editing a sequence table Disables editing a sequence table Displays an element to enable editing it All Elements Displays all elements for each page Expand Vertical Expands the number of conditional operations Edit Mode in a sequence table Expands the number of entries in a sequence table Point Enable Displays intersection points Navigation Displays a sequence table Reference Main Table Sets the selected sequence table as the main Setting table Reference Sets the selected sequence table as the Table reference table Execute Every Cycle Sets the sequence table to be executed e
48. 006 LOAD 998011 Internal Switch 007 OUT 002026 Remote Local switch Insert Row Delete Row Refresh OK Up to eight internal switches can be created An error will result if the user attempts to convert a step ladder program with nine or more internal switches 3 7 2 Mnemonics Take the following steps to create the step ladder programs in mnemonics If the program may be converted to a ladder diagram later observe the same restrictions on the number of lines and columns for ladder diagrams when creat ing the program in mnemonic code The following table shows the required set tings for ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag for various situations Ladder program Max program block size ITEM200 Mnemonic Flag conversion setting 22 lines x 10 columns or fewer Set to Not possible More than 22 lines x 10 columns Set to 1 It will not be possible to convert to ladder diagram format Note 1 Each program block in a ladder diagram can have 22 lines and 10 columns but there is no limit on the number of lines and rows when mnemonic code is used If a program is created in mnemonic code and contains a program block with more than 22 lines or 10 columns an error will occur if the pro gram is converted to a ladder diagram disassembled 187 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 188 When creating a program that is incompatible with ladder diagram format set the Mnemonic Flag IT
49. 03 Sequence Control 701 Step Ladder 59 04 Block Diagram 1 8 05 Block Diagram 2 59 06 Block Diagram 3 Condom 5 a 8 x B sR a Function Block 4 Click an icon on the right toolbar The ladder diagram of the instruction will appear under the cursor Move the cursor to the desired position on the lad der diagram and click the position To input an input instruction such as LOAD for example click an instruction position other than one on the right edge i e a condition position To cancel the symbol allocated to the cursor click the Ts icon or move the cursor to the position to be overwritten and select the instruction from the Select Mode Menu Example For the LOAD instruction click the aH icon and the icon of the cursor will change to A Move the cursor to the position to be overwritten and click the position The LOAD instruction with a NO contact will appear Press the Delete Key to delete the instruction 181 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 5 To input the operand click the gt icon to return the cursor to normal Double click the ladder diagram symbol The following dialog box will ap pear Data setting Data CPU Fatal error Data range Logical value 0 1 Data description Comment dete Symbol data setting Blocker Humber Function Block Functio
50. 20 Version Improvements 1 4 Monitor software CX Process Monitor CX Process Monitor or CX Process Monitor CX Process Monitor Plus Plus cannot be used 1 4 8 Version 4 0 The improvements made from version 3 2 to version 4 0 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Support for CJ1G CPUL IL JP The following new functions are supported Loop control CPU Units and LCBO1 05 version 2 0 Simple backup of the Loop Controller s function block data to the Memory Card Selecting the step to restart Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 to match the first or second reference input Synchronization of Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 Setting hot start time Heset wind up protection of secondary loop of cascade control Setting range 0 00 to 100 00 for input signals in Split Converter Block Model 169 Addition of Field Terminal Blocks Ai4 terminal PTS51 52 Ai8 terminal PTS55 56 Ao2 terminal DAO21 and Ai4 Ao2 terminal MAD42 Displaying Loop Controller memory The status showing how the Loop map Controller is using CPU Unit memory can be displayed as a list Backing up to and recovering from Comments annotations tags and Memory Card project comments connection data which previously could annotations tags and connection data not be saved in the Loop Controller can now be saved in the Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit This enables comments annotations tags an
51. 206 328 12 Printing the Sequence Table 2c ERE RUE E GRE RES ee 206 97 98 3 9 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Ss OVNEN amu tue uta Pet ad aU E denter ile d a aa NE x Fed dos cd 3 9 2 Functions for Which Engineering Unit Displays and Settings Are Enabled 3 9 3 Setting CSV Tags for Function Blocks 3 9 4 Setting Projects in Engineering Unit Mode 3 9 5 Displaying Function Block ITEM Lists 3 9 6 Editing Function Block ITEMs 3 9 7 Displaying Engineering Units When Confirming Operation 5 9 8 JRelated PUNCHONS x ax t pto ee weil Aor ed wench des 3 10 Displaying Loop Controller Memory Maps 0 e eee eens SLOT cO Mer pc tay eee yee eset Saree I 321022 Operauon Procedur scuta reb Nec eee et SPUD SUMMING son wee cok eee Bt i aciei s Da ceo E EUR SN c hr Re nde CO to brad 3 11 2 Printing Function Blocks 0 0 cece rre Pinuna Block Diagrams diete P esM M VPE Shree Se ee 3 11 4 Printing Ladder Diagrams Seite Printing Cross ref
52. Block Address 001 CSY Tag Auto Registration Insert Cancel Select the function block type the function block name and the block ad dress to be registered If CSV tags are to be registered automatically se lect the checkbox For details refer to 3 4 Using SCADA Software 108 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 2 Field Terminal Block Insert field terminal Block Block Address ani Inzert Cancel Select the Field Terminal Block name and the block address to be regis tered 3 Sequence Control Block Black Address Inzert Cancel Select the Sequence Control Block name and the block address to be registered 4 Link Input or Link Output No dialog box is displayed 5 User defined Block Insert User Defined Block X User Defined Block oma Select the User defined Block 4 Click the Set Button The block address will be automatically incremented e To allocate another function block of the same type or a different type re peat the above registration procedure from step 3 e When the maximum number of registrations has been reached click the Cancel Button Note The following restrictions apply for the number of function blocks that can be reg istered to each function block group Version Maximum number of function blocks registered per function block group Ver 3 0 or later 64 blocks Ver 2 0 or earl
53. For details refer to 3 5 User Link Tables User defined Blocks A combination of function blocks grouped by the user is called a User defined Block User defined Blocks can be registered only in block diagrams For de tails refer to 3 6 Creating User defined Blocks Note The folder items function block groups are as shown below for Loop Control Boards and Loop Control Units The Project Workspace Screen has the following function block group items for a Loop Control Unit Function block groups on Block type Block Project Workspace Screen models LCBL 1L 01 System System Common Common 02 Field Terminal Field Terminals 501 to 587 03 Sequence Sequence Table Control Step Ladder Program 04 Block Control and Operation Blocks 001 to 230 Diagrams 1 to 3 External Controller Blocks System Common w Field Terminals 501 to 587 03 Send Terminal Send Terminals to All Nodes 407 to 410 to All Nodes 04 Receive Receive Terminals from All 414 to 415 Terminal from All Nodes Nodes 05 Send Terminal Send Terminals to Computer 401 to 404 to Computer 06 CPU Unit CPU Unit Terminals 451 to 454 Step Ladder Program Terminal 07 Sequence Control Expanded CPU Unit Terminals 455 to 462 and Send Receive All Blocks 10 Temporary Internal switches registered with 209 Memory default with block address 349 11 Block Diagram Control Blocks 001 to 040 08 SCADA I F External Controller Block 045 Alarm Signal Restrict
54. H 4 DM or 5 EMO Memory address Word address or higher Link mode 1 Constant 2 On change or 3 External sync RIW See note a ITEM RAW 0 OFF BBBIII BBB block address III ITEM number Read from ITEM External contact sync 0 OFF BBBIII BBB block address II ITEM number External contact sync Field terminal 0 Not generated from field terminal See note a BBBIII BBB block address 11 ITEM number Link table generated from field terminal Note a These items cannot be changed b Do not open a project while the TnkTable csv file is open in Excel or other software It may not be possible to read the data and the user link table may not be initialized 3 5 4 Editing User Link Tables Entry Number Assignments in User Link Tables CX Process Tool Version 4 0 or Higher Note A number is assigned to each entry in the user link table referred to hereafter as entry numbers In CX Process Tool version 4 0 or higher the method used to assign entry numbers when registering or deleting entries version 3 2 is differ ent from that used in the lower version version 3 2 The method used to assign entry numbers when registering or deleting links depends on the CX Process Tool version The different methods are outlined below Any number can be selected as an entry number Entries can be registered to any entry number is possible and the entry number is not changed when the entry is deleted
55. Information from the menus 2 In either case the following PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed PLC Information NewPLCI Project PLC type L51H H EPUB Actual Characteristics Functional element name for CPU Unit element Type US1H H CPUB Unit Wer 30 Functional element version code for CPU Unit element Program memor 26024 Steps Useable 256406 Step Protected Memory type File menmory card No Data memory 32r ste Words Extensions 0 EMw ards EM banks 13 Bank size Words IL memory eS KM ords Timer counters H EM ards Unit Manufacturing Information I2 3 4 1 Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit that is con nected online In the I O Table Window right click and select Unit Manufacturing In formation CPU Unit PLC IO Table NewPLC1 File Options Help Unit Manufacturing inFormation CPU Unit Inner Board Software Switches Inner Board 9 1 0002 Rack 0003 Rack 02 ICMM CPU23 7 2 The following Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog Box will be displayed Unit Manufacturing Information EES File Help Manufacturing Details Revision E Revision ABD Software Revision e Lat Number ps0701 ManufactuingIp Functional element version code for CPU Unit element
56. Tel 31 2356 81 300 Fax 31 2356 81 388 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC One Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 5302 U S A Tel 1 847 843 7900 Fax 1 847 843 7787 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD No 438A Alexandra Road 05 05 08 Lobby 2 Alexandra Technopark Singapore 119967 Tel 65 6835 3011 Fax 65 6835 2711 OMRON CHINA CO LTD 2211 Bank of China Tower 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road Pu Dong New Area Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5037 2222 Fax 86 21 5037 2200 Authorized Distributor Cat No W372 E1 11 Note Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan This manual is printed on 100 recycled paper
57. The following dialog box will appear if CSV tag file was compiled correct ly Confirm 5 Finished compiling CSV Tag 4 Click the OK Button Creating RS View Tag Files 1 2 3 1 Select Compile CSV Tags from the Execution Menu The following dialog box will be displayed Cov Tag Compile X Compile Gs Tags Check errors Add User Link Table information Cancel If Check Errors is selected and the OK Button is clicked the results of the error check will be displayed when the file is compiled Note a When adding user link table tags to the RS View tag file select the option to output CSV tag information in either the Edit User Link Table Dialog Box or the User Link Table Batch Registration Dialog Box when registering the user link table and then enable adding user link table information when compiling If a user link table is created without enabling outputting CSV tag information the user link table tags will not be output even if ad ding user link table information is selected 2 Click the OK Button The results will be displayed in the Output Window 151 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Error Display 7 Check Tag Error result Ma Result Max 1000 tems to show 1 000 06 16 Tag which exceeds the number of blacks of the registration by the send and the receive block is registered 2 0000 06 16 Same memory area ig used by sending and receiving Block 3 000
58. The following example shows designating the source i e the connection data for a function block BLKOO2 ITEMO21 Data RSP source Data Ranae Multiple Data 000000 999255 Data Description BBB Block address 111 ITEM No General data _ Tag field terminal sequence control will be selected The connection data can be selected from the tag name tag ITEM name pull down lists m Connection uaa C Block ITEM Numbet Data Tag Name Field Terminal Sequence Control Function Block Group f 900 All M Block ITEM 000 Not set System Common ITEM 031 YYYY Year X C User Link Table Entry Back When this option is not selected ITEMS are specified by inputting the block ad dress followed by the ITEM number as a continuous series of numbers BBBBIIII for the following e For the source designation connection data designation for a function block e When Edit Edit Connection is selected after right clicking an ITEM dis played in blue e When editing signals in sequence tables e When editing symbols in step ladder diagrams The following example shows designating the source i e the connection data for a function block BLK002 ITEMO21 Data RSP source Block address I TEM number will be selected The connection data is specified by inputting the block address followed by the __ ITEM num
59. Type ITEM tag Data Name amp Initial setting dat B COMMENT Rooter Comment 5 MODEL 131 Modeksquare Root 5 TMEX Svstem operation Operation cycle 2 SCAN 2000 Operation order S XAD 901 022 M1 source designation lt Operation data gt D k 1 000 Gain o 0 00 Input low end cutout setting For example for the Basic PID Block the PV destination block address and ITEM will be stored as shown in the following figure E Modell LOBOS 04001 Basic PID lt Initial setting dat B COMMENT Basic PID Comment 5 MODEL O11 Model Basic PID 5 System operation Operation cycle common 5 SGAM NO 2000 Operation order 5 PV 907 071 PY source designation S Hs SP T00 Hysteresis setting 5 PVE AD 000 000 PY error source designation 5 AL 0 Alarm limit 5 0 000 000 RSP source Using the Fixed Location Mode 1 2 3 1 To edit the block diagram i e to make software connections for analog and accumulator signals select the Block Diagram 1 folder and then select Edit Block Diagram from the Settings menu The following blocks will appear in the right pane e Three rows of six function blocks can be allocated to a single block dia gram e zoom out from the display click the Zoom Out from the menu or press the Alt Right Cursor Keys e To zoom in to the display click the Zoom In from the menu or press
60. Window and select Extension An error will occur if no lines are connected to the function block Edit Items O valu RNG L3 RMG H3 Find Black 100 v _ 4 Connection Map Y4 input REM L4 0 valu H4 Extention 100945 v Operation data Print Item List 4 The Extension Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Extention Setting 905 40 4 point 1 Channel Setting Channe CH1 Set to all channel Extention Setting OK X cancel MV tight shut Upper 10000 Lower 0 5 Make the setting by specifying the channel number be set 6 To make the same settings for all channels click the Set to all channel But ton For example if channels 1 2 and 4 already have connection lines com pleted the same settings will be reflected in channels 1 2 and 4 if the button is clicked The settings will not be reflected in channel 3 for which connec tion lines have not been completed Only the entry for the relevant user link table can be displayed in the User Link Table Window using the following procedure if extension settings are made from the field terminals 1 2 3 1 Select the field terminal to be displayed from the Workspace tree 2 Right click and select Find User Link Table 3 The relevant user link table for the selected field terminal will be displayed When the User Link Table Window is displayed right click
61. and other programming in the Loop Controller without having to specify specific I O memory addresses Loop Controller CPU Unit The following read write timing can be set for each tag 1 Always 2 When I O memory changes 3 When external device contact input turns ON Data can be read written with function block items Table memory Function block data lagA Tag B If an external device contact input is used CPU Unit I O Sequence memory can be table read written on ITEM timing User link tables can also be pasted as virtual blocks on block diagrams Also tags can be automatically registered in user link tables when a field terminal block is pasted and software connections are made Select Settings Option and then select the Register Tag Name automatically when connected to Field Terminal option on the User Link Table Tab Page Loop Controller CPU Unit Function block data Virtual link table block I O memory Note User link table tags can be saved in CSV format They can thus be used in SCA DA software to specify user link table tags to read and write I O memory in the CPU Unit If Add User Link Table Information is selected in the CSV Tag Compile Dialog Box the user link table tags will be appended after the normal HMI CSV tags 159 User Link Tables Section 3 5 N WARNING Do not allow the area to which user link table data is written to overlap with any
62. destination Flashing Output tab command classification OUT F destination 3 8 7 Editing Elements Sequence table execute form ITEM 006 specification Section 3 8 Y N Execution condition For Start in rule Only First Cycle 2 Y ON when the condition is met and remains ON Y ON or N even when the condition is no longer met Must be turned OFF from another rule For Every Cycle 0 and Start on 51 1 When condition changes from not N OFF when the condition is met and remains met to met OFF even when the condition is no longer met Must be turned ON from another rule Cannotbe Only Y used always ON Cannot be Only Y pulse used output Cannot be Y flashing used or N remains ON when flashing stops While condition is met Y Remains ON while condition is met and remain OFF while condition is not met N Cannot be specified When condition changes from not met to met Y ON only once when condition is met and turns OFF the next operating cycle The condition must be not met and then met again before the signal will turn ON again N Cannot be specified Y Changes between ON and OFF when the condition is met and continues flashing even when the condition is no longer met While condition is met N The flashing output is turned ON while the condition is met and remains ON even when the condition is no longer met Note To turn OFF and output t
63. diagrams ladder e You can print monitor tag lists diagrams and e You can print all data by LCU element or node cross references can be printed Monitor tag list display None Possible displays the monitor software tag information that has function been set Search function None Possible searches for block address or monitor software tag name Ad moves the cursor to the matching function block Version check function None Possible checks for version compatibility between the Loop Control Unit connected online and CX Process Tool in use 16 Version Improvements Section 1 4 1 4 3 Version 2 00 The improvements made from version 1 50 to version 2 00 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Ver 1 50 Ver 2 00 New function blocks Does not support Loop Control ES100X Controller Terminal Block Model 045 4 point Unit version 2 00 Warning Indicator Block Model 110 Arithmetic Operation Block Model 126 Time Sequence Data Statistics Block Model 153 Receive All Blocks Block Model 461 and Send All Blocks Block Model 462 ITEMs added for other function blocks Refer to the Loop Control Unit Operation Manual for details Editing block diagrams Lines disappear when pasted Lines do not disappear when pasted function blocks are function blocks are moved moved Lines must be deleted All the lines connected to specified function blocks or individually ITEMs can be deleted at the same time Block c
64. l o x File View Settings Execute Window Help R mm 9 E 01 LCBO 04 001 Basic PID Equipment a NodeO1 001 011 c gg 00 1 01 225 zi gg 01 System 000 System Common 998 Internal Switch zy 02 Field Terminal zz 901 AI 4 point 0041 902 AO 4 point DAO41 03 Sequence Control 158 04 Block Diagram 1 001 Basic PID 002 Basic PID 003 Square Root 28 05 Block Diagram 2 106 Block Diagram 3 Comment Model Basic PID Uperation le V co Operation order PV source designation Hysteresis setting PV error source designation Alarm limit RSP source Set Point setting mode default PV tracking at local MAN Bumpless processing Deviation alarm standby sequence Processing cycle of PID control Control action Out of range processing Output retrace time for PV error Inversion of host indicated MY MV error source designation High high alarm setting High alarm setting Low alarm setting Low low alarm setting Alarm stop switch Local Set Point setting Remote Local switch AT command AT Executing Limit cycle MV amplitude Limit cycle hysteresis AT calculation gain Judgment DEV for provisional AT AT type Deviation alarm setting 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 o Note 1 For details on editing block diag
65. ltem Previous Version 5 1 Updated Version 5 2 Support for LCB01 05 Support was provided only The following new blocks are supported up to version 3 0 e Segment Program 3 Block Model 158 Loop control CPU Unit e Isolated Ai4 Terminal PH41U Block Model 572 version 3 5 e Isolated Ai4 Terminal ADOAU Block Model 573 e Ai4 Terminal ADG41 Block Model 581 The following new functions are supported e Search area number specifications for Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 e Easy parameter setting for Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 and Segment Program 3 Block Model 158 Engineering unit display Analog values could be set An ITEM can be displayed and set in engineering units only as percentages based on scaling information CSV tag information for individual function blocks Output window display Data such as verification Data such as verification results is displayed in special results was displayed in windows The following functions are supported fixed dialog boxes e Jumping to the relevant location from the displayed results e Copying results to the clipboard Improved sequence for Only an empty project When a new project is created all operations from creating new function block workspace was created inserting the Loop Controller to displaying the block data diagram are executed automatically Improved method for adding Function blocks could be Function blocks can be added from a function block
66. or Higher CSV Setting File project name csv Note these files must always be in the same folder The mnemonics ladder dia gram information files are named as shown below File name and extension Name of function block file OO OOO mtld Block address LCU LCB number 04 for LCBL IE 2 The mnemonic data in the mnemonics ladder diagram information file mtld is used in downloading uploading or comparing data but the ladder diagram data is not A CX Process Monitor tag file consists of monitor tag data binary data for a single CPU Unit with a maximum of three Loop Control Units CX Process Monitor tag data consists of tag names tag comments corre sponding ITEM numbers or block addresses and analog signal scaling data By reading the tag file with the CX Process Monitor the block address or ITEM number in function block data corresponding to the CX Process Monitor tag on each screen can be specified The CX Process Monitor tag file is created by selecting Create Tag File Moni tor Tag from the Execution Menu 1 It is necessary to install the CX Process Monitor the same computer be fore creating monitor tag files 2 Monitor tag files are stored by default in the following folder with fixed file names Folder Omron CX Process Monitor db The underlined part is the folder of CX Process Monitor File names mtagmst and mtagsubmst You can change the folder in which monitor t
67. the CPU Unit element and Loop Controller ele ment have versions Model Numbers and Functional Elements The following table lists the Loop Controller product model numbers the func tional element names for the CPU Unit elements and Loop Controller elements and the versions of the functional elements vi model CPU Unit Functional Functional Functional See note model with element unit element element same version name functionality Unit Loop Control CS1W LCBO 1 Ver 2 0 or LCBO1 Ver 2 0 or later Board CS1W LCBO5 later Product Product model Unit version Configuration number of the CPU unit element Loop Controller element product LCBO5 Ver 2 0 or later Loop Control CS1W LCBO5 Ver 3 0 or LCBO5 GTC Ver 3 0 or later Board with GTC later Gradient Temperature Controller Process CS1D CPU65P CS1D CPU65H Ver 1 0 or later LCBO5D control CPU Unit CS1D CPU67P CS1D CPU67H Ver 1 0 or later LCBO5D Loop control CJ1G CPU42P CJ1G CPU42H Ver 3 0 or later LCBO1 Ver 2 0 or later CPU Unit CJ1G CPU43P CJ1G CPU43H Ver 3 0orlater LCBO3 Ver 2 0 or later CJ1G CPU44P CJ1G CPU44H Ver 3 0 or later LCBO3 Ver 2 0 or later CJ1G CPU45P CJ1G CPU45H Ver 3 0 or later LCBO3 Ver 2 0 or later Loop control CJ1G CPU45P Ver 3 0 or CJ1G CPU45H Ver 3 0 or later LCBO5 GTC Ver 3 0 or later CPU Unit with GTC later Gradient Temperature Controller Note Only Separate Loop Controllers have a un
68. to be deleted Register Control Block Directly registers a Control block in the block diagram Field Terminal Directly registers a Field Terminal block in the block diagram Sequence Control Directly registers a Sequence Control block in the block diagram User Link Link Input Directly registers a User Link Table block Table Read used to read data from the CPU Unit in from CPU the block diagram Memory Link Directly registers a User Link Table block Output used to write data to the CPU Unit in the Write to block diagram CPU Memory Register Registers a cell in the User Link Table When the cursor is at the position in Block Cell block that was pasted which the User Link Table block was pasted Remove Removes a cell from the User Link Table When the cursor is at a cell registered Block Cell block that was pasted in the User Link Table block was pasted Edit Used to edit the input interface or output When an input or output interface for a Analog interface of a user defined block user defined block is selected I O Cell Delete Deletes the input interface or output Analog interface of a user defined block I O Cell Inserts a user defined block into the When the cursor is positioned where a block diagram function block can be pasted Monitor ITEM List Same as selecting Monitor ITEM List When the cursor is positioned ona from the Execution Menu function block that has been pasted Tuning Screen Same as selecti
69. 017 S3 0 Move to next wait command oO 0 Move to next step command C 0 Edit Items RST OUT 0 00 Find Black ing output value O 0 Connection T Executing OQ PIDMo 0 ction bank number OQ 051 3 Extension n First addr kind OQ 52 32767 rn First address PTM LL 0 Print Item List n transfer order 031 DL 0 Program pattern transfer order 2 The Edit Segment Program 3 Parameters Window will be displayed Edit Segment Program 3 Parameters m x Max Bank Bank Setting Program Pattern Data Address Setting 1 2 E 4 5 b T B H m dq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 second second second second second second second second second second 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Step Number Time Output Value B Wall width walit time Default Ba C ol LInitt 36 OK Cancel The contents of the ITEMs for each step will be displayed in table format When the table is directly edited and the OK Button is pressed the values will be reflected in the function block ITEMs For details on the editing function refer to Edit Window Functions The items in the Edit Window are as follows Horizontal Axis 1 to 100 Step numbers Vertical Axis Time width A Used to set the time width a
70. 02001 1 Network address foo Mode address Unit address 16 31 Cancel 2 Input the unit address between 16 and 31 in decimal into the unit address field The unit address to be input is between 16 and 31 10 and 1F Hex In 240 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 Note 1 other words add 16 10 Hex to the unit number between 0 and 15 to F Hex set with the rotary switch on the front panel of the Loop Control Unit as a CPU Bus Unit If the value is incorrect the personal computer will not connect to the Loop Control Unit Note In the CX Process input the unit address in decimal between 16 and 31 Click the OK Button Note Itis necessary to set the unit address for the serial connection as well If the wrong unit address is set a dialog box will appear with a mes sage during data downloading with error code 0401 or 0202 When the network address node address and unit address are set these addresses will appear in order on the right of the LCU element in the Project Workspace Example On the right of node 01 Network address 001 and Equipment amp node address 01 with a separation dot between Bee ARTS RN 001 01 Bn EF 01 000171 HEI ef coor Unitaddrese 16 In addition to manually setting the addresses as described above they can also be set automatically by searching for Loop Controllers connected to networks of the PLC connected to the C
71. 03 702 Sequence Table 11 8 x File View Settings Execute Scale DataEdit Operation Validate Action Window Help 18 x D la ellla R 8 palala el e present value is displayed in parentheses after TIM CNT and the BMP element number In this example the present value of TIM 000 is 47 9 Node01 001 01 Z3 00 LCBOS V1 5 225 01 System 1 02 Field Terminal 1 03 Sequence Control 701 Sequence Table 702 Sequence Table 1 04 Block Diagram 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 1 06 Block Diagram 3 001 2 position ON OFF 002 2 position ON OFF Element Block Validating Action Set Value 200 e Ready Action Validation on the Sequence Table Screen CX Process Tool BMP Node01 Node01 LCBO5 V1 5 03 702 Sequence Table E File View Settings Execute Scale DataEdit Operation Validate Action Window Help 8 x qi Rel su el IS ALT 8 LEE E The present value is displayed in parentheses after TIM CNT and the element number In this example the present value of TIM 000 is 100 BMP i 5 hn i Rule No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 OS WB 00 LCB05 v1 5 225 Sequence Table Online editting Execution Form 01 03 04 05 06 07 08 0 01 System everyone y Sequence cong Tabie 002 IN CNTOO1 HI JO Y Y 1 04
72. 04 Block Diagram 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 2 06 Block Diagram 3 001 2 position ON OFF 002 2 position ON OFF Set Value Double click the element to be deleted Ready Mum Element Initial Data Setup Element type f Timer C Counter Set Value Pre Alarm value Unit 1 0 0 ec 2 1sec 3 sec 4 min Comment System element 0002 m Block Set and Send Delete Cancel di 293 Tuning Section 4 7 4 7 Tuning PID constants SPs and other settings listed below can be changed online e Parameters such as the PID Block s P I and D constants and the alarm set values can be set e The PV SP and MV trends can be adjusted while monitoring e f an alarm occurs the bar graph color changes With CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher specified ITEMs in function blocks being displayed on Tuning Screens can be logged and output to CSV files 4 7 1 Switching to the Tuning Screen Use the following procedure T4 dus 1 2 294 Select the function block to be tuned and select Monitor Tuning Screen from the Execution menu The Tuning Screen Configuration Dialog Box will be displayed Note This dialog box resembles the dialog used to set monitor tags Dis played by selecting Monitor Tags from the Settings menu Tuning Screen Configuration x Block Address 001 Function Block 011 Function
73. 06 225 At Black address000 CS Tag is not defined 4 000 ng 225 004 duplicated tag name duplicated pair 000 06 17 001 1 kx jest Normal Display Save As Ed Fi Save jin c sample Ini m LnkT able csv samplelllll cssv File name Save as type csv File Cancel 152 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 3 Set the folder and name for the tag file and click the OK Button The following HS View Tag Compile Dialog Box will appear H5 View Tag Complie Data for Creating AS View Impert T ag Cx Process Tool Tag information csv D Program FilessCMBUNSC Process ToaohdatasEquipmen Set Representative Tag ta OPC Server Group GxProgrammer Add Symbols tag file sdb D Program FilesSOMAONSCx Process TooldataSE quipmen File for View Import Ie CSW file for RS View cev Name Noden File Type v Group Hierarchy 5 Convert Convert Integer to Aes Force scaling data range to 2 002 Specify Remote ServerMachine Nan Select this option when compiling an RS View tag file that is saved on a remote OPC Server i e a OPC Server on the network Input the computer name and IP address of the remote server This option is used when there is no OPC Server installed on the local computer or when all information
74. 4 3 Downloading Uploading and Comparing 251 4 3 1 Downloading Transfer to LC 2 8 88 252 4 3 2 Uploading Transfer from DG 4252122 eor ee RR See ss 257 d459 9 acess 260 dzd qeUDnAStop Command eiue s eL amp pass Dare ci oa Oud ic eee m bacs dee hub diee 264 dar Monitor IUD SEDIS uo ctis sertis s etm d Mase ted d ee abo deb M E bte do 266 4 5 1 Monitoring the System Run Status 266 4 52 JWTIEMSMaiked RESO mite neh rer ara etu ur a eee eee 267 4 5 3 ITEMs Marked Detailed display 267 4 5 4 Checking Versions Drm RC ede So RU RD E SD UR RAE S Reo 269 Bao OPETI OE Geek i Reg we ee bre eere ar RR AEG cma S e s 270 4 6 1 Monitoring ITEM Data for Selected Function Blocks 271 4 6 2 Downloading Individual ITEM Data Settings 271 4 6 3 Block Diagram Check x12 uus veau eat Oa uw Ee UR ie 271 4 6 4 Wireless Debugging LCBL Ver 3 0 or Later Only 275 4 6 5 Forced Changes to Analog Output Signals 276 4 6 6 Ladder Diagram Operation Check 278 4 6 7 Validating Sequence Table Operation LCB05 05D Only
75. 51 of the specified block turns automatically 1 ON Operation of cur rently executing steps in already operating Step Ladder Program blocks is interrupted and execution of the program jumps to the specified step When the input conditions turn ON operation of the Step Ladder Program block is stopped at the specified block address 400 to 499 Run stop command 1 of the specified block automatically turns O OFF When the input conditions turn ON execution of the program jumps to the specified step number 01 to 99 of the Step Ladder Program block at the specified block address 400 to 499 e To specify a jump to the self step number set the block address to 000 e When a jump is made to another Step Ladder Program block run stop command 51 of the source block automatically turns 0 OFF and run stop command 51 of the destination block turns 1 ON 192 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 d TIM See note STEP TIMER ALARM TIMER END Block ad dress timer number tim er setting seconds Timer setting value TIM TIM STF STEP TIM TIMER ALARM TIMER Timer setting value Description When the input conditions turn ON the incre menting timer TO1 to T10 for the specified block address is started One step ladder pro gram can contain up to twenty timers ITEMs 010 to 020 for the step ladder block to which the timer is associated can be use
76. Action Window Help 8 x 3 e Alali Sh mmm BMP a 1 001 01 00 LCBOS V1 5 225 01 System 1 02 Field Terminal 1 03 Sequence Control 701 Sequence Table 702 Sequence Table 1 04 Block Diagram 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 1 06 Block Diagram 3 001 2 position ON OFF 002 2 position ON OFF Set value will change Element Block Validating Action plement Comment 001 TIM 000 100 Ready NUM 290 Operation Check Section 4 6 Note The following cannot be changed for elements e The time unit for a timer element e Changing a previously registered timer to a counter or a previously reg istered counter to a time Adding Elements Possible on Element Display Screen Only An element can be added while the Loop Controller and sequence table are op erating 1 2 3 1 Double click an unused element row CX Process Tool BMP Node01 Node01 LCB05 V1 5 03 702 Sequence Table 11 E E 8 x File View Settings Execute Scale DataEdit Operation Validate Action Window Help 8 x ALALA Rj S 1x BMP 2 08 001 01 Z3 00 LCBOS V1 5 225 01 System 1 02 Field Terminal 1 03 Sequence Control 701 Sequence Table 702 Sequence Table 2 04 Block Diagram 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 11 06 Block Diagr
77. All Blocks Function Blocks and if neces sary Expanded CPU Unit Terminal and CPU Unit Terminal Function Blocks Required only for Loop Control Unit not required for 9 Set the CSV tags using Tag Settings CSV Tag from the Settings Menu If using CX Process Tool version 3 1 or higher automatically register the CSV tags and then edit the CSV tag settings file in Excel 10 Output the CSV tag file using Create Tag File CSV Tags from the Execu tion Menu 11 Import the CSV tag file for SCADA software into the SYSMAC OPC Server 12 Manually export the RS View tag file from the SYSMAC OPC Server 13 Import the RS View tag file to the RS View 32 using the import utility in the RS View 32 Using the RS View 32 8 For a Loop Control Unit register Send All Blocks and Receive All Blocks blocks This is not necessary for LCBL 9 Set the CSV tags using Tag Settings CSV Tag from the Setting Menu 10 Output the CSV tag file using Create Tag File RS View Tags from the Execution Menu 11 Import the RS View tag file directly to the RS View 32 using the import utility in the RS View 32 Note For details on SCADA Software and RS View refer to 3 4 Preparations for Using SCADA Software Step 3 Save the Project Using Save from the File Menu Workspace Data Step 4 Unit Setup 1 2 3 1 Mount the Units and wire the Analog I O Units The Loop Controller does not need any wiring 2 Set each Unit t
78. BOOL E5_98 Basic PID tag Tag010_AOF_Bit02 BOOL E5_98 Basic PID tag If the option to use the CX Programmer symbol table format is selected the data will be saved in a CSV file in a format that can be pasted into a CX Programmer symbol table Contact Data in CX Programmer Symbol Table Format tag name ITEM tag name bit position INT allocated EM bank number address comment 10 RL SW BitOO INT E5 98 Basic PID tag Tag010 AM SW BitO1 INT E5 98 Basic PID tag Tag010_AOF_Bit02 INT E5_98 Basic PID tag e The ITEM name will be deleted if it contains a slash e All BOOL data will be converted to INT data 3 4 3 Other Interfaces with HMI Starting Face Plate Auto Builder for NS Outline Note From CX Process Tool version 4 0 the Face Plate Auto Builder for NS NSFP can be started in the sequence of operations when compiling CSV tags e CX Process Tool Version 3 2 or Lower The CSV tags were compiled in advance using CX Process Tool and then after starting the NSFP the folder path for the previously saved CSV tag file had to be specified in the parameter setting screen e CX Process Tool Version 4 0 NSFP can be automatically started after CSV tag files are compiled by selecting Create Tag File Start NSFP from the Execute Menu Using this method the folder path to the CSV tag file that has been created is automatically specified in the parameter settings screen that is displayed when the NSFP starts
79. Block name Basic PID Tag No Upper Limit f 0000 Lower Limit 0 Decimal Point p Unit Save Trend Data File Name Program Files omron CxX Process Tool data Equipment 4 Tae001 C 200m sec 1 sec Cancel Use this dialog box to input settings for the function block including the Tag name Scaling range Scaling Upper Limit and Scaling Lower Limit Deci mal Point and Unit See note a After inputting the desired values click the OK Button With version 3 0 or higher of the CX Process Tool the monitoring cycle for data such as PVs SPs and alarms on the Tuning Screens can be set to 1 s or 200 ms With unit Ver 2 5 the cycle was fixed at 1 s See notes b and c Select either 1 s or 200 ms before clicking the OK Button If the data cannot be refreshed for the specified cycle a warning will be dis played in red to indicate that the monitoring cycle is longer than the specified value as follows Blue The cycle is within the specified value 1 s or 200 ms Hed The cycle is not within the specified value 1 s or 200 ms Note a The Scaling range upper limit and lower limit Decimal point position and Units settings apply to all of the function block s SP and PV values b This setting is also used for the data logging cycle C Setting the data monitoring cycle to 200 ms does not necessarily mean that the refresh cycle will be 200 ms because the load on the com
80. CIFO1 or CQM 1 CIFO2 Cable to the peripheral port Connect to a male 9 pin D Sub serial port on an IBM PC AT or compatible computer Serial Communica Length tions Mode CPU Unit Built in peripheral port Host Link CS1W CN114 0 5 3 3 SYSMAC WAY CQM1 CIF02 35 Basic Operating Procedures Seclion 1 7 The following components are available for connecting the IBM PC AT or com patible over RS 232C Connect to a male 9 pin D Sub serial port Serial Communica Length tions Mode CPU Unit Built in RS 232C port Host Link XW2Z 200S V Female 9 pin D SUB XW22 5008 V Serial Communica RS 232C Port XW2Z 200S V tions Board or Unit Female 9 pin D SUB XW27 500S V 1 7 Basic Operating Procedures The following steps are needed to use a Loop Controller Step 1 Design 12 32 Prepare function drawings Determine the PLC configuration Select the function blocks Determine the configuration of the function blocks Determine the data to be monitored or operated in the CX Process Monitor O oa A W Install the CX Process Tool the CX Process Monitor and the communica tions driver Step 2 Creating Function Blocks Starting from the Start Menu or Selecting Start Only from the I O Tables 1 2 3 1 Start the CX Process Tool The following dialog box will be displayed by default when the CX Process Tool is started Select communication driver fram below Communication
81. E E Results List Display The execution results of operations shown in the Output Window are dis played 71 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Descriptions of Items Output Window Contents Exampls Project Information Executed operations and related project Result of model Display information are displayed number conversion LCBO5GTC V3 0 to LCBO5 V3 0 Results List Display Execution results are displayed for the Block Number following operations 021 cannot be converted Block e Comparisons Number 001 e CX Process Monitor CSV and CX Pro cess Monitor checks e Step ladder program assembly and re verse assembly e Sequence table error checks e User defined block exporting and im porting e Program transfers displayed only when an error occurs Jumping e Double clicking on an error message causes the display to jump to the relevant location e Pressing the F4 Key causes the display to jump to the relevant location for the next error message Note The display does not jump to the relevant display message location in the follow ing cases e When the node file LCB or LCU element function block group or function block at the specified jump destination does not exist e When the specified jump destination is not an active node Copying 1 2 3 1 Select Copy All from the pop up menu in the Output Window Right click to display the pop up menu 2 Select Paste to
82. File Menu See section 4 2 2 7 Download the function block data from the CX Process Tool using Trans fer to LC Selected from the Execution Menu See section 4 3 1 8 Start operation from the CX Process Tool using Operation Run Stop Command from the Execution Menu or turn the PLC OFF and ON See section 4 4 D Note Check the following items before operating the Loop Controller a Make sure the Analog I O Units used with the Loop Control Unit Board are properly mounted Make sure the unit numbers the front panel of the Analog I O Units coincide with the unit numbers set in the Field Terminal Function Blocks Data for another Special Unit will be read and written if an incorrect unit number is used Make sure the initial settings in the System Common Block in the Loop Controller are correct Check that the DM Area words for the Node Termi nal Function Block in the CPU Unit of the Loop Controller will not be used for any other purpose d When writing data to the I O memory in the CPU Unit with function blocks e g using Send All Blocks Expanded DO AO Terminal to CPU Unit or DO AO Terminal to CPU Unit be sure that the words written to in the I O memory are not being used for any other purpose If I O memory words are allocated to more than one purpose the PLC system may act unex pectedly and cause injury 9 Check the indicators on the front of the from panel of the Loop Controller On the Loop
83. ITEM and select the ITEM number from the detailed information Select the ITEM tag and select the ITEM from the detailed information Select the area type and select the user link table tag name from the detailed information Specify the timer counter number and select the status contact from the detailed information Set the relational expression NOT gt or gt parameter 1 and parameter 2 For elements specify the number and then select the present value of the PV the remaining time or the counter value Switches from Y to N to blank and then repeats when double clicked The following contact signals can be used for sequence table conditions For block address 001 and ITEM 086 001 086 For the A M switch for the Master01 CSV tag Master01 A_M For SWO1 user link table tag LNKOO7 SWO1 For a user link table tag type value equals 200 LNKOO5 type 200 199 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 Actions Notation on CX Process Tool screen OUT H destination Holding contact output operation OUT L destination Non holding contact output operation OUT P destination Pulse contact output operation OUT F destination Flashing contact output operation Output See note Function block contact output item CSV tag and tag ITEM Contact output ITEM for control and operation blocks User link table name I O mem
84. In the following example tag name host01 in the user link table has been set as the RSP for a Basic PID function block 0011 User link Table Basic Inserting Comments With CX Process Tool versions 2 50 and higher it is possible to insert annota Annotations tions user defined text into block diagrams in Edit Block Diagram Mode Up to 16 annotations can be inserted in one block diagram and up to 3 000 annota tions can be inserted in one function block file Each annotation can be up to 200 characters long This function allows user set labels such as Tank 1 Temp Control or Tank Temp to be inserted and displayed in function blocks or I O wiring The dia 120 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 L2 3 5 grams with annotations can also be printed out to create complete schematics showing the system configuration The annotation data cannot be downloaded to a Loop Controller For details on downloading annotation data refer to 4 9 Transferring Tag and Comment Data on page 309 Use the following procedure to insert annotations 1 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select Annota tions Insert The new annotation will contain the default text Comment Data as shown in the following diagram Comment Dat i i 2 To edit the text in the annotation double click the annotation or select the annotation right click the mouse button to displ
85. Item All information can be displayed for lines connected to ITEMs in block dia grams If an ITEM is left clicked all lines connected to the ITEM will be high lighted in pink Right click and select Release Selection from the pop up menu to unselect lines e Selecting All Lines Connected to a Function Block All information can be displayed for lines connected to function blocks in block diagrams If a function block is left clicked all lines connected to the function block will be highlighted in pink Right click and select Release Selection from the pop up menu to unselect lines Select a line and select Delete Line or Delete Selected Lines e Selecting One Line Right click and select Delete Line from the pop up menu e Selecting Multiple Lines Right click and select Delete Selected Lines from the pop up menu Block diagrams can be copied to register new block diagrams Using this func tion each function block registered in the block diagram is copied to a new func tion block group Use the following procedure 1 Right click the function block group i e copy source block diagram in the Workspace and select FBD Copy from the pop up menu 2 Select the LCB LCU element i e LCU or LCB and then select FBD Paste from the Settings Menu or right click and select FBD Paste from the pop up menu 3 The nsert Function Block for Diagram Dialog Box will be displayed Se lect the number and name for the function block gr
86. LCB elements sequence control folders in the function block group or function blocks Initial setting data or operation data or initial setting data and operation data can be selected for comparison Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 Note Comparison between data in active function block files and comments annota tions tags or connection data that have been backed up in the Memory Card is not supported CX Process Comparison between files Data in 3 LCU elements and 1 element or 1 LCU LCB element lt in function block Operation data file ist or step Comparison with data ladder program and mnemonics in Loop Controller Initial setting data Function block data file in hard disk Data in an LCU LCB element in function block file ist or step ladder program and mnemonics Initial setting data Operation data Comparison Loop Controller Comparison with Data in Take the following steps to compare the currently active function block file with Loop Controller the function block data in the Loop Controller connected online This method is used for either of the following purposes e To check before the Upload Previous Operation if the function block data in the Loop Controller matches the currently active function block file In this case the comparison is set for the initial setting data e To check if the data is downloaded or uploa
87. Lo S Cancel LCB LCU Name 5 Ready 11 TT MM 2 When the CX Process Tool is started by selecting Start with Settings In herited the procedure up until the inserting the node s Function Block File is performed automatically The project name is automatically created as follows Name CXPrc Year month day hour minute and second that CX Pro cess Tool was started Example CXPrc050207 142030 when started 2005 February 7 at 14 20 30 The folder in which the automatically created project is saved will be the same folder in which the CX Programmer project is saved If no CX Pro grammer project has been saved then Desktop will be selected Note When starting from the I O tables it is possible to select Start Only so that the communications settings are not inherited In that case the starting method is the same as when starting from the Windows Start Menu 102 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 3 1 3 Creating a New Project 1 2 3 1 Select New from the File Menu The following Browse for Folder Dialog Box will be displayed Select the location for saving the project folder Please select the Folder For making new project E Cx One CX Integrator 02 CX Motion 021 CX Motion NCF LI CX Position B C CX Process Tool amm Bl P tool bin E CxX Programmer Examples C CX Protocol a L CX Thermo B Auto Builder Cancel New Fo
88. Loop Control Units of version 1 5 or earlier data on the Edit Block Diagram Screen function block information will be lost and the block diagram showing the connections between function blocks will not be displayed When performing Upload Previous if the data in the source file currently opened using the CX Process Tool and the Loop Controller s function block data does not match the registered function blocks or the data on the Edit Block Dia gram Screen the data currently opened may change to illegal data The Loop Controller can read and write I O memory the CPU Unit using the Field Terminal Function Blocks or CPU Terminal Blocks independent of the user program Step Ladder Program in the CPU Unit Do not write to the same memory words from both the Loop Controller and the CPU Unit To hold an analog output or contact output at a specific value for example the maximum value or minimum value when the Loop Controller stops running create a Step Ladder Program in the CPU Unit so that the corresponding output bit allocated to Analog Output Unit or Contact Output Unit is set to the desired value using an NC condition of the Loop Controller Running Flag bit OO in allo cated CIO word n as an input condition If a fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit including fatal errors created by execution of a FALS instruction the Loop Controller will also stop running To hold analog outputs to the previous values before the stop occur
89. Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help Dice 7 501 Bae sin Sela se Node00 1 05 3 0 Block Diagram 1 1 Equipment E C51G H CPLI42 1 100 LCBOS v3 0 225 PE pol Mc paid DEP gate ga cael ain ese UE occu rear hose E E ea Daran tr eue Dr d op E EUR dau Au ta C3 02 Field Terminal jo A Bd Shae control gn Bark ates 3 04 Block Diagram 1 D D UNES S MAI ORE GUT EON EN C 05 Block Diagram 2 ip pee _ LESS 06 Block Diagram 3 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 s s Control ciu Link Input Read from CPU Memory 10 l LIEU s n Ready LCBOS V3 0 Net 0 Node 0 2 3 One of the following dialog boxes will be displayed depending on the type function block selected Perform the specified actions for the dialog box that is displayed 1 Control Block Insert Function Block for Block Diagram x Type of Function Black Block oo 2 pos ONAOFF
90. Monitor Plus settings CX Process Tool Ver 3 2 or higher Creating compiling the CSV tag file for SCADA software Creating compiling an RS View tag file csv Creating sequence tables LCB05 05D only In the Function Block Connection Diagram click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select Annotations Insert Click the Annotation icon in Ladder Diagram Edit Mode Select the Send Terminal to Computer folder block models between 401 and 404 or the Send Terminal to All Nodes block models between 407 and 410 Select Tag Settings Monitor Tags from the Settings Menu Select Create Tag File Monitor Tags from the Execution Menu 2 Click the Start Button 1 Select Show Tag List Monitor Tag from the 3 2 2 Execution Menu Select the function blocks and select Tag Settings 3 3 CSV Tags from the Setting Menu or select function blocks for data exchange with the CX Process Monitor Plus and select Tag Settings Monitor Plus Tags from the Setting Menu Or Select the option to automatically register CSV CSV tag file in Excel or other editor tags when registering function blocks and edit the Select Create Tag File Monitor Plus Tag from the Execution Menu Click the Start Button on the main window of the CX Process Monitor Plus Select Show Tag List Monitor Plus Tag from the Execution Menu Select the function block and select Tag Settings CSV Tags from t
91. New data input field 302 Section 4 7 Tuning Changing Other Settings Executing Fine Tuning 7 2 9 2 The Input Data Dialog ten key will be displayed as shown Input data Ee Ea HARF 3 After using the mouse or the keyboard to enter a numerical value click the OK Button or press the Enter Key The display will return to the Change Data Dialog Box shown in Step 1 4 Click the OK Button The settings for integral time and D differential time can be changed in the same way You can use the procedure explained above to change the settings for MV High Low Limit High High Alarm High Alarm Low Low Alarm Low Alarm and Devi ation Alarm in the same way Fine tuning FT can be executed for either Basic PID 011 or Advanced PID 012 Fine tuning lets the user use fuzzy logic to set PID constants as required for more accurate control 1 Click Execute FT at the upper left portion of the Tuning Screen as shown below Tuning screen stop block 0 stop alarm 0 FT AT 0 The following Execute FT Dialog Box will be displayed Unda 303 Section 4 7 Tuning Checking the Fuzzy Logic Block 016 Membership Function 304 2 Set the degree of Response improvement Overshooting control and Hunting control to any of the five levels and then click the OK Button Note Fine tuning will be executed with the settings in th
92. Run HOT START Run Stop Stopped C Hotstar Start SREM old Start Start back up Refresh Cancel 4 To stop operating the Loop Control Unit Board select Stopped and click the Execute Button Note The Run Status Field in the Run Stop Command Dialog Box shows the status of the dialog box opened or with the Execute Button clicked To refresh the status click the Refresh Button Note 1 If Hot Start or Cold Start is selected after downloading function block data that will change the operation cycle a communications time out error may occur In that case close the Run Stop Command Dialog Box for approxi mately 30 seconds and then open the dialog box again and select Hot Start or Cold Start 2 A hot start or cold start will not be executed if Hot Start or Cold Start is se lected and the Execute Button is clicked when backing up data during op eration for the LCBO1 LCBO5 unit Ver 1 5 or later the LCBOS or the LCBOBD If an attempt is made an error will occur error code 110C 265 Monitor Run Status Section 4 5 4 5 Monitor Run Status 4 5 1 Monitoring the System Run Status It is possible to monitor or control the status of System Common Block of the Loop Controller The following items can be monitored or controlled This func tion is mainly used for checking the load rate or execution errors Monitor items Present load rate maximum load rate operation cycle au tomatic c
93. Section 2 describes installing the CX Process Tool and provides an overview of the user interface Section 3 describes how to create and manipulate function blocks Section 4 describes online operations for uploading downloading and testing function block data Section 5 describes errors that can occur while using the CX Process Tool NWARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xvii Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WAR
94. TIM command can be used with LCBOCO projects of Ver 3 0 or later Refer to the Loop Control Board Operation Manual Cat No W406 for details on the TIM command 193 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 3 7 5 Other Icons Select Mode Menu Description In logic In step command sequence sequence Delete Line Deletes vertical or horizontal lines Convert Ladder to Converts step ladder programs created in ladder OK OK Mnemonics diagrams to mnemonics L Convert Mnemonics Converts step ladder programs created in mnemonics OK OK EM aj to Ladder or uploaded mnemonics into ladder diagrams Display Data Name Displays an explanation of the address ITEM Annotation Inserts an annotation user set comment 194 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 3 8 Creating Sequence Tables Use the following procedure to create a Sequence Table Block block model 302 This operation is supported for LCBO5 and LCBOBD only Note 1 Before creating a sequence table always select 00 LCBO5 or 00 LCBO5D in the dialog box displayed for Settings Insert Insert LCB LCO001 Inset LCB LCU x Type CB LCU Loop CPU Unit Process CPU Unit Information Number Model 00 1 05 Unit Ver v2 00 Title LCB LCU Name LCB 5 Cancel 2 To convert a 00 LCBO1 to a 00 LCBO5 once 00 LCBO1 has been selected use the appropriate Change LCB Typecommand from the Execution Menu and then click the OK
95. The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition Before you can use the program you must restart your computer Qi Nes want to restart my computer now Mo will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Back Finish Cancel Installation is now completed 2 1 7 Uninstalling the CX Process Tool Use the following procedure to delete the CX Process Tool from the computer 1 2 3 1 Select Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs or Settings Control Panel Add Remove Applications from the Windows Start Menu 2 Select CX Process Tool from the dialog box 3 Click the Change Remove Button ER Add Remove Programs m m 1 m Currently installed programs Sort by Name CX Process Tool ver 4 10 Remove Programs Click here for support information Last Used On ae To change this program or remove it from your Change Remove eee computer click Change Remove Change Remove Add New EX CX Server 9 28MB Programs CX Server Driver Management Tool 93 28MB 8 OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition 50 2MB Virtual Machine Additions 970KB Add Remove Windows Components n Set Program Access and Defaults 65 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 4 The CX Process Tool Installation
96. The number of step data blocks required depends on the number of steps to be used e Up to 25 steps of data can be stored per step data block When a maximum of 100 steps is used the number of step data blocks used is 4 For example when 70 steps are used the maximum number of steps is taken to be 70 and 3 step data blocks are automatically registered e he steps that can be used can be edited on the Edit Window Any steps beyond the maximum number of steps cannot be edited Changing the Maximum Number of Steps to Be Used The maximum number of steps to be used can normally be changed The following dialog box will be displayed if the maximum number of steps to be used is changed and there is a change in the registration status of the step data blocks Lz Process Tool X Number of Step Data Blocks are increased or decreased by changing Max Step Segment Program 3 have to be transferred to LEB after editing step data If this dialog box is displayed use any of the following methods to resend a Segment Program 3 block to the Loop Controller e Transfer the entire project Select an LCU LCB element LCB from the project tree Then right click and select Transfer to LC from the pop up menu or select Execution Transfer to LC Selected from the Main Menu e Transfer the Segment Program 3 block only Select the applicable Segment Program 3 block from the project tree Then right click and select Transfer to LC from the pop up
97. When using LCB projects with unit Ver 1 5 or earlier LCBO1 unit Ver 1 5 or earli er LCBO5 unit Ver 1 5 or earlier C81D CPU6I JP unit Ver 1 0 however entry 167 User Link Tables Section 3 5 numbers cannot be downloaded in a batch if the entry numbers are not arranged beforehand Always arrange the entries right click and select Arrange Num ber before downloading CX Process Tool Version 3 2 or Lower Entry numbers are always in ascending order When an entry is deleted the entry numbers are automatically reassigned in ascending order Transferring User Link Tables The restrictions in the following table apply to user link table selection and trans fer using the CX Process Tool in combination with a Loop Controller LCBL J 1 Additions and deletions are not possible while the Loop Controller is in operation when using a combination of the CX Process Tool Ver 4 0 or higher and LCB CL Ver 2 0 or later Other combinations require the transfer of LCB LCB ele ments when entries are added or deleted The Loop Controller will stop operat ing when the LCB LCB elements are transferred Selection and Transfer Capabilities according to the Version of the CX Process Tool and Loop Controller CX Process LCB Ver 2 0 or later LCB Ver 1 5 or earlier Tool Version e Selected entries can be trans ferred and deleted while the Loop Controller is in operation e Selected entries cannot be transferred or deleted during ope
98. Wizard will be displayed Select the He move Option and click the Next Button CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard 3 x Welcome A Madify repair or remove the program im Welcome to the CX Process Tool Setup Maintenance program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below C Modify i Select new program features to add or select curently installed features to po remove C Repair Reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup 4 InstallShield Cancel 5 If deleting the CX Process Tool completely is selected the following dialog box will be displayed Click the Yes Button to start the Uninstaller that will delete the CX Process Tool CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard x Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its Features 6 When the uninstallation has been completed the following dialog box will be displayed CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on CX Process Tool Cancel 2 1 8 Uninstalling the CX Server Note 1 The Installer manages the version and driver for the CX Server If the CX Server installed on the computer is old the Installer will automatically up date the CX Server If the CX Server Driver Management Tool or the CX Server is uninstalled from the control panel i
99. XI Execution Form 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 Every Cycle Sequence Table 2 Double click a row in the conditions or actions section or select the row and select Data Edit Signal Name from the pop up menu The Signal Dialog Box will be displayed Input Relation Output Table command ITEM Write Command type iS specified source value and execute checking Specify source parameter Block Item Block Item C ITEM tag C TEM tag Function Block group number Black araup number All Block number Block number Model System Common 4 C User Link Table C User Link Table Memory type C Element Element Number Number gt Detail information Jetatiimfamatiorn 007 CPU Llinit fatal error Cancel Select the Input Relation Output Table Command or ITEM Write Tab and set a signal in the Signal field for a condition or action Refer to the fol lowing tables in 3 8 6 Settings for Conditions and Actions for details Note Timers and counters must be set in advance in Element Edit Mode before they can be set Refer to 3 8 7 Editing Elements for details Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 4 Set values for the signal in the rule column of the condition and action sec tions Signal Every Cycle Execution Form Value 02 03
100. a user link table When the cursor is positioned on a user link table that has been pasted Edit Connection Find Target Block Directly inputs ITEM data for the ITEM When the cursor is on an ITEM displayed in blue in Edit Block Diagram displayed in blue Mode When a block diagram has been When the cursor is positioned on a specified moves the cursor to the function block that has been pasted Setting I Cycle 0 02 sec Scale Scale 100 200 or 5096 relevant block in the Project Workspace Sets the execution cycle for all function blocks in a function block diagram Download Downloads only the function blocks actually set above to the Loop Controller Same as selecting 100 200 or 50 from the Scale Menu Show CSV Tag Same as selecting Show CSV Tag Name from the Select Mode Menu Connection Map Show Memory Map Undos the last operation that was executed Displays the I O relationships for the When the cursor is positioned on a function block that is selected function block that has been pasted and connected The status showing how the Loop When an LCU or LCB element is Controller is using CPU Unit memory can selected Display Grid Mode Same as selecting Grid Mode from the Mode Select Mode Menu be displayed as a list Print Block Diagram Prints the open block diagrams Function Block Reference Displays the help reference for the When the cursor is positioned on a selected f
101. accord with project data Note For the format conversion refer to 3 1 12 Editing Projects 269 Operation Check Section 4 6 4 6 Operation Check 270 12 3 N WARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution This section provides information on how to check the operation of the function block data in the Loop Controller The following two types of checks are possible 1 Monitoring ITEM Data for Selected Function Blocks 2 Downloading individual ITEM Data settings 3 Operation Check of Block Diagrams Checks if analog connections have been properly done It is possible to apply forced set reset to analog signals 4 Operation Check of Sequence Tables or Ladder Diagrams Checks sequence tables or ladder diagrams execution It is possible to apply forced set reset to contact ITEMs When the calibration function is executed the MV manipulated variable will change due to changes in the PVs present values input to the control block Therefore set pseudo input values to confirm safety when the MW changes before executing the calibration function Devices may perform unexpected operations resulting in serious accidents Compare the currently opened function block file and the function block data in the Loop Controller before checking the operation of the function block data If the relationship between the block address and block model of the registered function block is incorrect the operation of the function block data can
102. address 001 tem 009 is different 50 00 100 00 2 LOU The value af block address 004 item iz different 20 00 0 00 3 Block address 701 of Number O0Condition signal registration is different 13 line Registered Mot registered 4 Block address 701 of LCBVLCU Number 00 S input data is different for condition area 07 line 1 Column N Y Black address 701 of LCBJLCLI Number 004 N input data is different for condition area 11 line 5 Column x Finished verification Comparison between Take the following steps to compare the currently active function block file and Files mnemonics with another function block file and mnemonic data Note The mnemonics in the function block file ist are compared with the mnemonics in the mnemonics ladder diagram information file mtld 1 2 3 1 Select one of the following items and select Compare from the Execute Menu e Comparison of a number of LCU LCB elements Project Workspace e Comparison of an LCU LCB element LCU LCB element LCBO1 LCBO5 LCBO5D LC001 1 to LC001 3 e Comparison with a single function block Function block e Comparison of a step ladder program Sequence control folder The following dialog box will appear Compare Compare T arget C LC001 LCE 001 01 225 Compare level nitial setting data 5 Operation data 0 C Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 Execute Cancel 2 Sel
103. an external Unit If the same words are written to the externally connected loads may act unexpectedly and cause injury When the calibration function is executed the MV manipulated variable will change due to changes in the PVs present values input to the control block Therefore set pseudo input values to confirm safety when the MW changes before executing the calibration function Devices may perform unexpected operations resulting in serious accidents Before transferring function block data initial setting data or operation data to the Loop Controller confirm that the destination for the data is correct and also confirm the overall safety of the system including the Loop Controller Not do ing so may result in unexpected operation Before performing Validate Action be sure to perform Compare on currently opened function files and the Loop Controller s function block data If there are inconsistencies in the registered function blocks block address vs block mod el it will not be possible to perform Validate Action correctly XXV Application Precautions 4 4 xxvi N Caution N Caution A N Caution N Caution Before forcing changes of analog signals or contact signals using Validate Ac tion confirm the safety of the instrumentation system as a whole Not doing so may result in unexpected operation When downloading a sequence table for the LCBLI J unit ver 1 5 or later that has been edited
104. as shown below 701 Mnemonics Command Operand Mame STEP 00 LOAD 000019 Hun Start flag OR 001014 High alarm output AMD 001026 switch OUT 002096 AutodM anual switch Insert Row Delete Row Refresh OF Cancel Note To convert the step ladder programs in the ladder diagram into mne monics when the Mnemonics Dialog Box is not displayed select Convert Ladder to Mnemonics from the Manipulate Ladder Menu Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 The user may click the icon instead to execute the same the func tion as the Refresh Button in the above Mnemonics Dialog Box Note 1 Unless the step ladder programs are converted the cross reference func tion will not be available 2 If an Internal Switch occurs in a ladder diagram that has been created the Internal Switch will appear as shown below The OUT instruction and LOAD instruction in mnemonics will be automatically created and the operand will be the ITEM of the Internal Switch in block address 349 by default Example The OUT instruction and LOAD instruction will be automatically created with internal switch 349011 as the operand Before Conversion After Conversion LCBO1 702 Mnemonics 001 013 001 026 11 on No Command Operand Name 001 STEP 00 002 LOAD 001013 High high alarm output a SM 003 OUT 998011 Internal Switch 004 AND 001026 Remote Local switch 005 OUT 001086 Auto Manual switch
105. banks to be used e Bank data blocks are registered in the function block group in which Segment Program 3 Block Model 158 block is registered e Bank data blocks are registered in descending order from the highest available function block address LCBO1 CJ1G CPU42P 50 49 48 CS1W LCBO5 500 499 498 CJ1G CPU43 44 45 300 299 298 e When the maximum number of banks to be used is increased rule 2 is followed When the number is de creased bank data blocks are removed in ascending order from the lowest function block address Setting Program Pattern Data To set program pattern addresses press the Program Pattern Data Address Setting Button in the Edit Segment Program 3 Parameters Window The following Edit Program Pattern Block Parameters Window will be displayed Edit Program Pattern Block Par X Memory TUE First 1000 Memory Usage Step Number Bank Mumber 1 D efault BU Step 001 Start Step Count Step 007 End Bank 1 Start Bank Cour Bank Check Memory amp rea Cancel The items in the Settings Window are as follows 333 Setting Segment Programs Appendix C Area type CIO W H DM or EO to E12 EC can be selected Beginning address Used to set the beginning address for allocating program pattern data PLC memory allocation images Left column Indicates the beginning and end of the addresses allocated for pr
106. based on the following rules 1 In ascending order of the X coordinates of the function block position 2 In ascending order of the Y coordinate of the function block position Example The following figure shows a block diagram with nine function blocks pasted When the operation cycle batch setting is executed the op eration sequence will be automatically set to 1 2 3 9 The dotted por tion is the same as the X coordinate so function blocks are pasted in as cending order of the Y coordinate Block Diagram Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Fixed Location Mode The order of priority is automatically set to 1 2 3 18 starting from the upper left when the operation cycle batch setting is executed Block Diagram Note If the same function block is pasted to multiple connection dia grams the operation sequence on the block diagram for the lower numbered function block will be enabled Displaying Connection Maps To check the I O relationships for a function block select the function block on the Navigator and select Operation Connection Map As shown below a con nection map showing the input source ITEMs and output destination ITEMs will be displayed around the function block CX Process Tool Equipment A NodeD1 ie x File View Settings Execution Move Edit Scale Window Help S a Rj e m 01 LCBO5 Connection 001 Basic PID
107. can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The monitor tag lists in active function block file will start printing 221 Printing Section 3 11 3 11 7 Printing CSV Tag Lists Printing an Active i e Currently Open CSV Tag List 1 2 3 1 Display the CSV tag lists Select Execution and then CSV Tag List 2 Right click the CSV Tag List Window and then select Print from the pop up menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Click the OK Button to start printing Printing for an LCU LCB Element 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element from the Project Workspace and then select Print and CSV Tag List from the File Menu 2 Click the OK Button The CSV tag lists in the LCU LCB element will start printing Printing for a Node 3 LCU Elements and 1 LCBI 1 Element 1 2 3 1 Selectthe active function block file from the Project Workspace and then select Print and CSV Tag List from the File Menu 2 Click the OK Button The CSV tag lists in active function block file will start printing 3 11 8 Printing All Printing All Data Function Blocks Block Diagrams Ladder Diagrams Cross References and Monitor Tag Lists for an LCU LCB Element 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element from the Project Workspace and then select Print and All from the File Menu 2 You can also specify the start page Select the Show an
108. cold start or a hot start The display will change to Sequence Table Monitoring and the sequence table execution status will be dis played The colors displayed on the screen can be used to check the actions of the sequence table Conditions Signal names Set numbers Rule numbers Hed Conditions met Hed Current step indicated with red dot Hed Conditions met Blue Conditions not met Blue Other status Blue Conditions not met 01 LCBO5 03 701 Sequence Table Sequence Table Validating Action me DUERME 8 The value area for the ae PEE current step is displayed 003 IN 001 086 Auto Manual switch YON In cream 004 IN 002 014 High alarm output N Y 005 IN 001 013 Highihigh alarm output Y 006 007 008 009 Actions Signal names Orange with 1 Actions being executed every cycle for output 1 Orange with 0 Actions being executed every cycle for output O Red with 1 Actions not being executed every cycle for output 1 Red with 0 Actions not being executed every cycle for output 0 _001 002 OUT H 000 013 4 Run Start flag 003 OUT 001 086 0 4Suto Manual switch 004 OUT H 001 026 0 Remote Local switch 005 OUT H 002 086 0 By ito Manual switch 006 OUT H 002 026 0 Remote Local switch 007 OUT 001 025 0 command AT Executing 008 001 009 OUT H 001 017 0 Alarm stop switch Y 010 011 N
109. commu nications has been finished The dialog box will include a message stating an error occurrence at the stage of initialization with error code 0503 01 LCODI 1 ERROR OCCURRED WHILE CLEARING ERROR CODE 0503 Cancel If another Support Software application communicating over the CX Server such as the CX Programmer CX Protocol or CX Motion or an application using the dedicated serial driver is connected online the CX Process Tool cannot be connected to the same COM port online via Host Link The initial ization of serial communications is possible but actual online connections will not be possible Disconnect any other applications then reconnect the CX Process Tool by initializing serial communications If the CX Process Tool is connected or initializing serial communications using FinsGateway as the driver no software applications communicating over the CX Server can be connected to the same COM port When serial communications are initialized the FinsGateway communica tions service will start If another FinsGateway application is running the FINS communications of the application may be affected by the initialization of serial communications With Windows NT4 0 serial communications cannot be initialized unless the user is the administrator Initializing serial communications will start the SYSWAY CV communica tions for the FinsGateway With this method a FINS commands ar
110. compatible computer Intel CPU Core Pentium or Celeron family For Windows Vista 1 GHz min For any other OS 333 MHz min required 1 GHz min recommended OS Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate or Business XP Professional up to Service Pack 2 2000 Professional Service Pack 3 or higher ME NT Workstation Service Pack 6a or higher 98 SE See note 1 Supported English languages Memory For Windows Vista 1 GB min For any other OS 256 MB min required 512 MB min recommended Hard disk space Min required 350 Mbytes of free space Recommended 450 Mbytes or more of free space including approx 280 Mbytes used by communications middleware Min required XGA 256 colors Recommended SXGA 65 536 colors min CD ROM drive At least one Hecommended Microsoft mouse or compatible pointing device Software that must be installed CX Server or FinsGateway with the CX Process Tool Connecting Connection with Using FinsGateway Communications protocol with PLC Host Link A peripheral CPU Unit or Serial Serial Unit Driver bus toolbus connection cannot be used Communications Board Unit e Connect the computer to the peripheral port or built in RS 232C port of the CPU Unit or the RS 232C port of a Serial Communications Unit Board e Connecting cable When connecting to the CPU Unit peripheral port CS1W OCNL IL IL 2 m 6 m When connecting to the CPU Unit s RS 232C port XW2Z L ILILI L 2 m 5 m For detai
111. contact and R W is Wr from the Loop Control Board Output as CSV Tag Select this option to add user link table tags to the SCADA Information tag file or RS View tag file Note fthis option is not selected when registering the user link table the user link table tags will not be output even if adding user link table information is selected during the output process Monitor Plus Tag Creates Monitor Plus tags Select this option when setting monitoring or setting the user link table from the CX Process Monitor Plus Alarm Set Creates alarm tags If alarm tags are set they can be displayed in the CX Process Monitor Plus Alarm Log Screens Note 1 EM1 to EM12 can be used in LCBUL Ver 3 0 or later projects 2 Pulse outputs can be used in LCBOCO Ver 3 0 or later projects 162 User Link Tables Section 3 5 3 The EM bank can be set independent of the type of CPU Unit A Loop Con troller execution error will occur however if an EM bank that is not present in the CPU Unit is specified in the user link tables Refer to 4 5 Monitor Run Status for the procedure for confirming execution errors The following Mon itor Run Status Window shows an error status in ITEM 095 x 00 LCBOS 3 0 DsaNam ata Rn 056 Reception disable switch 0 057 Send disable switch 0 081 Min block addr Low MV limit 000 082 Min block addr Hiah M s limit 000 083 Min block addr Deviation alarm 000 084 Min bloc
112. dialog box will appear Click the OK But ton Reset the load rate Cancel 4 5 3 ITEMs Marked Detailed display Example 33 black addr execution error Show detail H4 Block addr database error 000 Show detail The details of ITEMs remarked Detailed display can be changed through the Execution Menu Example Minimum block address with an execution error resulted The error code i e the value stored in for each function block will be displayed in the block address with the vertical row specifying the 10 s digit in the block address and the horizontal row specifying the 1 s digit in the block address 1 Block address not used 0 Normal Execution error code Other 1 to 89 Error Execution error code For details on execution error codes refer to the Operation Manual for the Loop Controller or Function Block Reference Manual Example Minimum block address with an execution error is 002 093 Min block addr execution eror 000 Show detail 267 Monitor Run Status Section 4 5 Example Block address 002 with an execution error 1 source destination designation error while registering block addresses 000 001 002 and 100 Execution error code Normal Execution error code 1 Source Destination designation error Block address not used 1 Detaled Display se teen Box gyf ud ERE eas el 7 DU XD Sh 3
113. driver e FinsGateway n C CX Server Never show this message Cancel Select the communications driver to use FinsGateway or CX Server This dialog box will not be displayed when starting by selecting Start Only from the CX Programmer s I O tables The CX Server will automatically be selected as the communications driver Note 1 When using the CX Process Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus always set FinsGateway as the communications driver CX Server is not supported as the communications driver for the CX Process Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus 36 Basic Operating Procedures Section 1 7 2 For details on starting the CX Process Tool refer to 2 1 9 Starting the CX Process Tool File View Settings Execute Help peal ALA A ao Re E 3 Project Workspace 2 Create a new project in the Project Workspace 3 Go to step 3 below and set the System common block Starting by Selecting Start with Settings Inherited from the Tables 1 2 3 1 Right click the Loop Control Board or Unit in the I O Table Window and se lect Start Special Application Start with Settings Inherited Example Right click on the Loop Control Board e g CS1W LCBO5 T 1 PLC IO Table NewPLC1 File Edit View Options Help fj CS1G CPU42 EE Inner Board EUIS ard CS51W LCBOS y 0007 tain Rea H 4 0000 Rac
114. each ITEM set the data in the Setting Dialog Box Registering Registering Registering Select Edit User Link Table from the Settings elements in the from the User elements Menu user link table Link Table individually Editing Screen Right click and select Register Registering Select Edit User Link Table from the Settings elements in Menu groups with Right click and select Block Set same tag name and serial numbers CX Process Tool Ver 3 2 or higher Creating software links by A Right click and select Register User Link Table 3 5 2 pasting user link tables ina Link input Read from CPU Memory or select block diagram Register User Link Table Link output Write to CPU Memory from the pop up menu Right click and select Register User Link Table Register Block Cell and then select a tag or input a new tag Software link 44 Operations Section 1 8 Attaching user defined comments annotations to function blocks and step ladder diagrams displaying printing comments Settings tags for CX Process Monitor Loop Control Unit only Compiling tags for Monitor Software Loop Control Unit only Checking tags for Monitor Software settings Loop Control Unit only Settings tags for CX Process Monitor Plus CX Process Tool Ver 3 2 or higher Compiling tags for CX Process Monitor Plus CX Process Tool Ver 3 2 or higher Checking tags for CX Process
115. element or function block 2 Select Transfer to LC from the Execute Menu 3 The Transfer Dialog Box shown below will be displayed Select the LCB back up indication after transfer option LCB Transferring All Blocks E x Start transfering System will be stopped m Target ITEM Init sta Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 m Sending Status PC gt LCB Start Cancel J Update User Link Table refresh cycle 7 ferE JO son tormatiorn v LCE back up indication after transfering v Transfer data to Memory Card 4 Click the Start Button Note With the LCBO1 05 unit Ver 1 50 or later LCBO5D or LCBOS if backup is per formed during operation data is backed up without stopping operation When performing backup during operation note the following points e he CPU Unit s cycle time may increase by approximately 10 ms e t may take up to 10 minutes for backup processing to be completed 306 Backup and Recovery Section 4 8 e f the stop command is executed during backup processing operation will stop but backup processing will continue e f backup is attempted before processing for a previous backup operation is started the latter backup operation will be invalidated Perform backup again once backup processing has been completed e The following operations are not possible during backup processing Now executing back up operation Stop processing
116. entries to match the operation cycle of the destination function block Finds entries by tag name Download Selected Downloads the selected entries only See note Entries 3 All Entries Downloads all entries Filter Entries are displayed according to the following filter settings e Analog Contact Displays the analog signal data or contact signal data e Read Write Displays entries that read from or write to the CPU Unit memory e Memory Area Filters according to memory area CIO W H DM EM e Field Terminal Displays the entries with field terminal attributes e Specified as Field Terminal Selected when a user link table is displayed for which extension settings have been made No Connection Displays entries with zero links Connection Map Displays the connection map for the selected entry Prints the user link table Cut Cuts an entry and places it in the special copy buffer for the CX Process Tool i e not on the clipboard Copy Copies an entry and places it in the special copy buffer for the CX Process Tool i e not on the clipboard Paste Pastes the entry from the special copy buffer for the CX Process Tool i e not from the clipboard Note 1 When using LCB projects with unit Ver 1 5 or earlier entry numbers cannot be downloaded in a batch if the entry numbers are not arranged beforehand Always arrange the entries before downloading 171 User Link Tables Section 3 5
117. etc Note Use the above classification when transferring or comparing function block data to the Loop Controller Refer to 4 3 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Initial settings and operation data S classifications are displayed on ITEM Setting Screens of the CX Protocol Tool For details on the ITEMs set each function block refer to the Function Block Reference Manual S Initial setting data set with the CX Process Tool O Operation data set with the CX Process Tool or CX Process Monitor ITEM e Disabled 2 CX cess tin OCk EET nu E X 1 2_ put block diagram in formation Note In Edit Block Diagram Mode an ITEM displayed in blue can be set as well by selecting the ITEM clicking the right mouse button and selecting Edit Edit Connection from the pop up menu Either input BBBIII or select from the Func tion Block Group Block ITEM and ITEM pull down lists 126 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Example Setting PV Error PVE Source in Basic PID Block 1 2 3 1 Select the blue ITEM Basic PIO mF C ae 7 7 r 2 Click the right mouse button and select Edit Edit Connection from the pop up menu The following dialog box will appear Select the Block ITEM No and input
118. file consists of administrative data for the Project Workspace File name Function block Functionblockfiles Block diagram E Berk es files Mnemonics Ladder diagram mtld information files Comment files files tag setting files CX Server configuration files Only when CX Server is selected as the communications driver Job information files 5 Loop Controller configuration m files Data files of user link tables LnkTable csv Data files of sequence tables stbl 0 The project file mul can be specified when opening files so that the above re lated files will be all read at the same time The project file is created by selecting New from the File Menu and specifying the project name The file name will be the same as the project name CX Process Tool Section 1 1 Function Block Files ist Block Diagram Information Files mtbd Mnemonics Ladder Diagram Information Files mtld Note Note Note A function block file consists of the data for the function blocks of a single CPU Unit i e for up to three LCU elements and or one LCBI J element This file is created by selecting Settings Insert The file will be automatically named Node where XX denotes the node number between 01 and 32 The following data is contained in a function block file Daaname Descipion _ Function block data Initial settings S Data on registered fun
119. flashing ON and not flashing Table STEP specified step setting Condition already met Not executed commands from other sequence table RUN start from other sequence table STOP stop from other sequence table ITEM write SET constant write Condition already met Not executed The output status will be as shown in the following table when output signals are deleted during online editing Simi Output status after download Output Not Holding OUT D Flashing OUT F If previously ON and not Output will not function flashing Table STEP specified step setting Not executed commands from other sequence table RUN start from other sequence table STOP stop from other sequence table ITEM write SET constant write Sil ming Timing stops Still counting The present value of the counter is held Present Value Displays The CX Process Tool must be version 3 2 or higher and the LCBO5 unit Ver 1 5 and Set Value Changes or later or LCBO3 must be used during Operation for Elements Present Values for Elements Timers and Counters The present values of timers and counters will be displayed while validating se quence tables The present values are displayed in parentheses following the TIM element numbers and CNT elements numbers in the Element column 287 Operation Check Section 4 6 Action Validation on the Element Screen D CX Process Tool BMP Node01 Node01 LCBO5 V1 5
120. following ITEMs on the Loop Control Unit If the following ITEMs are already set on the Loop Control Unit and are uploaded to the CX Process Tool only the following ITEMs are not uploaded MV Output Retrace Time for PV Error has been added to 2 position ON OFF Block Model 001 3 position ON OFF Block Model 002 Basic PID Block Model 011 and Advanced PID Block Model 012 High MV Limit Arrival Output and Low MV Limit Arrival Output have been added to Basic PID Block Model 011 Indication and Operation Block Model 032 and Ratio Setting Block Model 033 MV Error Input and MV Error Display have been added to Batch Flowrate Capture Block Model 014 Indication and Operation Block Model 032 and Ratio Setting Block Model 033 PV Error Input and PV Error Display have been added to Indication and Setting Block Model 031 Indication and Operation Block Model 032 Ratio Setting Block Model 033 and Indicator Block Model 034 Inputs X1 to X8 have been added to Constant Comparator Block Model 202 Inputs X1 to X8 and Comparison Input H1 to R8 have been added to Variable Comparator Block Model 203 Contact Inputs S33 to S224 have been added to Internal Switch Block Model 209 1 For details on which actual ITEM this restriction applies to refer to the ITEM list for the relevant function block in the Function Block Reference Manual 2 The version of the Loop Control Unit can be verified in the Monitor run status sc
121. following procedure to automatically set the addresses 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU element and then select Find LCU from the File Menu Find LEL E Choose LEU and Click Select Bg Bell IEEE Find Refresh eec Cancel 245 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 2 Click the Find Button The Loop Control Units on networks of the PLC to which the CX Process is connected will be found and the cursor will move to the Loop Control Unit that was found Find LCU x Choose LEU and Click Select HE FinsGateway service Serial Communication a Network address Node PLCs C518 CPU42 1 1 0 FINS address L5 Tw LEDOT T 1 15 Cursor will move to Loop Tw CLKzIT1 1 18 Control Unit L5 TwW DLKZT 1 13 gt Unit at nodes are displayed L5 Tw ETNH T T 1 25 L5 Tw DLEZT I 1 31 J Find Refresh Select Sets the addresses for the current Finds a Loop Control Unit Loop Control Unit and sets them for the LCU element Updates and reconfigures the display 3 Keep on pressing the Find Button to find the next Loop Control Unit Note Although it is possible to search for a Loop Control Board as well the unit address is always 255 and thus Loop Control Boards are not sup ported by this function 4 To register the addresses of a selected Loop Control Unit click the Select Button The addresses will automatically be set for t
122. for Online Connections Section 4 2 3 If necessary the Network Settings Dialog Box can be displayed by clicking the Settings S Button next to the network type The port name COM port number can be selected in the Driver Tab Also the baud rate and data format can be set to match those of the connected PLC When the computer is being connected directly to the PLC leave the node address set to 0 the default setting in the Network Tab It will not be pos sible to open this project later with FinsGateway selected as the commu nications driver without changing the node address to a non zero setting Note When CX Server has been selected as the communications driver set the node address to a non zero value in the Network Settings Dialog Box before compiling the Monitor tag file or CSV tag file Select Change PLC from the Settings Menu to display the dialog box If the computer is connected online return the node address setting to O Setting Unit Addresses Loop Control Units Only T 2 di 1 After completing the settings described above select the title LCOO1 1 to L C001 3 Select Network Settings from the Settings menu and the follow ing dialog box will be displayed LEU 01 LEDUIT 1 Unit address IE 15 31 i Cancel 2 Input the unit address in decimal 16 to 31 in the unit address field Set the value calculated by adding 16 10 Hex to the CPU Bus Unit unit number setting 0 to 15 or O
123. from the Settings Menu 2 Right click on the User Link Table Edit Screen and select Add from the pop up menu 2 Method 2 Registration from the Block Diagram 1 Right click on the block diagram and select Register User Link Table Link Input Read from CPU Memory or Register User Link Table Link Output Write to CPU Memory from the pop up menu A user link table block will be created 2 Select the block that was created right click and select Register User Link Table Register Block Cell from the pop up menu User Link Tables Section 3 5 The following dialog box will be displayed for either method 1 or 2 Register User Link Table 3 3 x 5 Refresh period System common operation cycle Link counts 0 Counts Taq Comment Specify Link memory Contact Synchronization Link constant Memory type co v Memory address 0 AD Analog Sync Signal Bit Position RUN Range Conversion ON C OFF 0 EL 10000 Mext Output as CSV Tag information Scaling upper limit 10000 DP position 2 Scaling lower limit 0 Unit Alarm Set Monitor Plus Tag setting 161 User Link Tables Section 3 5 User Link Table Settings Number Entry number For details on the entry number refer to 3 5 4 Editing User Link Tables Refresh period The refresh cycle for CPU Unit data The cycle can be set to the
124. gt AE Conversion percentage Percentage ineeri lt data Q Settings in engi Reverse conversion neering units Configuration for Engineering Unit Conversion Loop Controller The above diagram shows the configuration for using the engineering unit dis play and setting function to convert Loop Controller parameters into engineering units Engineering units are values that have been converted into the values actually used for I O based on scaling of ITEM data handled by the Loop Controller They are applicable to values such as temperatures and voltages Pa Con versely the main analog data handled by the Loop Controller e g PV or SP for basic PID is expressed in values such as 15 00 to 115 or 320 00 to 320 This is called percentage 96 data The CX Process Tool converts function block ITEM displays into engineering units based on CSV tags set by the user Displays and settings on the CX Pro cess Tool can use engineering units when the engineering unit display and set ting function is enabled making it possible to check and input values more intu itively When this function is disabled or when CSV tags are not set editing is only possible for percentage 96 data When the CX Process Tool exchanges data with the Loop Controller it is per centage 96 data that is transferred Loop Controller internal processing is executed using percentage 96 data so reverse conversion from engineering units t
125. has been up dated for this version change as summarized in section 1 2 4 and the following information has been added major changes only Page 18 Lists of function blocks and ITEMs incompatible with earlier versions Page 20 Explanation of new dialog box used to select communications driver Page 23 Explanation of CX Server connections Page 44 Explanation of CX Server installation Page 66 Explanation of PLC type CPU type and network type selection Page 76 Explanation of annotations comments in function blocks Page 96 Explanation of the automatic conversion between mnemonic code and ladder diagram formats Page 100 Explanation of annotations comments in ladder diagrams Page 131 Explanation of initial settings required when using CX Server Page 133 Explanation of initial settings required when using a Peripheral Bus connection Page 154 Explanation of downloading individual ITEM settings Page 162 Explanation of the online tuning function October 2002 CX Process Tool version changed from 2 50 to 3 00 The manual has been up dated for this version change as summarized in section 1 4 5 April 2003 CX Process Tool version changed from 3 0 to 3 1 The manual has been updated for this version change as summarized in section 1 4 6 December 2003 CX Process Tool version changed from 3 1 to 3 2 The manual has been updated for this version change as summarized in section 1 4 7 07 August 2004 CX Process Tool version changed from
126. how to set individual parameters from the CX Process Tool For details on block function specifications and functions and information on specific operations refer to the Loop Control Board Function Block Reference Manual Setting Segment Program 2 Blocks Use the following method to set the program pattern 1 Open the Segment Program 2 ITEM list right click in the ITEM list and select Extension from the pop up menu Operatian data gt 013 O 51 0 Run stop command 014 52 0 Hold switch 017 S3 0 Move to next wait command 018 Q 54 0 Move to next step command 020 855 0 Reference input disable switch O ADI 200 0 Edit Items 024 B l 10 00 Find Black 025 201 0 Connection 026 D 02 200 0 022 Boz 20 00 028 202 0 029 oO ao 200 0 Print Item List O30 BOS 30 00 Step 3 B3 output value O31 Q J 3 0 Step 3 Time unit 2 The Edit Segment Program 2 Parameters Window will be displayed 7 Segment Program 2 Parameters O O O O OU O OOO 5154 1 2 3 4 z b T 9 10 11 lz Time width 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 zl Output S alue B 10 00 20 00 30 00 40 00 5 nt 60 00 70 00 80 00 90 00 100 00 90 00 al Wwe ait width 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 wait time 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 second second second second second second second second second second second secor EX ISI
127. in 3 9 5 Displaying Function Block ITEM Lists In addition when the monitor ITEM list is executed ITEM data transfer editing is enabled in engineering units Note For details on ITEM data transfers refer to 4 6 2 Downloading Individual ITEM Data Settings Displays in Block Diagrams When checking operation in a block diagram the ITEM values are displayed in engineering units The display can include integers a decimal point and a total of up to five characters for the unit 1001 Basic FID Engineering Unit Display When Checking Operation If there is more information than can be displayed in the diagram it can be viewed in a tool chip when the cursor is over the function block as shown below 1001 Bazic Engineering Unit Display in Tool Chip Format Engineering units can also be set for forced changes to analog output signals while checking function block operation Note For details on forced changes refer to 4 6 5 Forced Changes to Analog Output Signals Setting Engineering Units for Wireless Debugging Engineering units can be used for numeric inputs for wireless debugging Note For details on the wireless debugging function refer to 4 6 4 Wireless Debug ging Ver 3 0 or Later Only 3 9 8 Related Functions Print Preview and Printing When the Engineering Unit Mode is enabled data strings in the ITEM list are printed in engineering units when the ITEM list is printed The data string
128. is located Delete Row Deletes the row where the cursor is located Invert NOT Inverts the selected operation NO condition lt NC condition SET lt RESET OUT lt OUT NOT BSET lt gt BRSET and Up differentiated lt Down differentiated Selected Edits the selected annotation Annotation Bringto Displays the selected annotation in front of other annotations Front Displays the selected annotation behind other annotations Back Send Makes the selected annotation transparent Behind Symbols and Lines Changes the selected annotation s font size Reverses undoes the last operation 92 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Mem Validate Action Starts checking the operation of the ladder diagram Ends checking the operation of the ladder diagram Pop up Menu Menu Displayed by Clicking Right Button Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Data Configuration Inputs an operand When an instruction symbol is selected RESET Inputs a RESET instruction Edit Mode Select Cell Set the cursor to normal selection status Delete Line Sets line deletion mode Symbols Inputs a condition LOAD Inputs a NOT condition NOT Inputs an output OUT NOT Inputs a NOT output ON DIFF Inputs an upward differentiation instruction OFF DIFF Inputs a downward differentiation instruction Inputs a SET instruction STEP Inputs a STEP declaration Declara tio
129. name of the function dia gram Inesrt Block Diagram X Function Block group number 07 Function Block Feed forward oesi 3 Select Setting User defined Block Create As shown below the background of the block diagram will change to purple 175 Creating User defined Blocks Section 3 6 An input interface I F block and output interface block will also be inserted automatically These two blocks are virtual blocks that will serve to assign external I O for the user defined block OX Process Tool Equipment 01 l ial o X File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help Si 01 LOBOS Feed forward 1 Equipment B NodeO1 001 01 00 1 05 225 01 System Input Output 02 Field Terminal 28 03 Sequence Control 04 Block Diagram 1 28 05 Block Diagram 2 28 06 Block Diagram 3 Sa 07 Feed forward 4 Adjust the layout of the function blocks and insert an Advanced PID Block Model 012 and a Lead Delay Block Model 147 block Right click and se lect them from the Register Control Block on the menu IET ee ction Hlc imi yil Virtual function block for input interface Eee Virtual function block for output interface Cycle system common operation
130. no cross references will be displayed 1 2 3 1 Select Convert Ladder to Mnemonics from the Manipulate Ladder Menu or click the Refresh Button while the mnemonics are displayed and then click the OK Button 190 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 2 Select the LCU LCB element and select Cross Reference from the Execu tion Menu The following screen will appear Modell Cross reference 001 013 001 013 001 026 001 026 001 086 002 026 002 086 100 011 100 011 Pile Es Contact Info High high alarm output Hemoate L switch Autorki anual switch Hemate Laocal switch T wm J CH rar 3 4 Step Ladder Instructions O Can be used Cannot be used In logic se In step se quence quence Command Operand Description LOAD Read source Indicates a logical start of the logic block Z LOAD NOT block ad dress ITEM number Head source block ad dress ITEM number Read source block ad dress ITEM number Head source block ad dress ITEM number Head source block ad dress ITEM number creates an ON OFF execution condition based on the ON OFF status of the contact and con nects to the next stage Indicates a logical start of the logic block creates an ON OFF execution condition based on the reverse of the ON OFF status of the contact and connects to the next stage Takes a logical AND of the status of the contact an
131. online with the CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher confirm that the system will operate normally with the edited sequence If the sequence is not suitable for operation unexpected operation may result Confirm in advance the conditions at any node for which the sequence table is being edited over a Controller Link or Ethernet network Not doing so may result in unexpected operation Confirm the status of connected devices before transferring the setting for the MV tight shut function and MV analog output reverse function to the Loop Con troller Devices and equipment may perform unexpected operations if the data destination is mistaken When the calibration function is executed the MV manipulated variable will change due to changes in the PVs present values input to the control block Therefore set pseudo input values to confirm safety when the MW changes be fore executing the calibration function Devices may perform unexpected opera tions resulting in serious accidents Application Precautions A N Caution Caution A N Caution Observe the following precautions when using CX Process Tool and Loop Con troller If the power supply is turned OFF while function block data is being backed up from RAM to flash memory the backup will not be completed normally If the power supply is turned back ON within 24 hours however the super capacitor will have held the RAM data The backup operation will restart when power is t
132. overlap either one can be moved to the front or back by clicking the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and selecting Annotations Selected Annotation Bring to Front or Annotations Selected Annotation Send to Back Order of Execution in Block Diagrams 122 Internal Loop Controller operations are executed according to the operation cycle set for each function block Steps 1 to 4 below are executed in each of the eight types of operation cycles For details on the operation cycles can be set for function blocks refer to the Loop Control Boards Function Block Heference Manual 1 User Link Tables Read attributes written as LCB in the CX Process Tool 2 System Common Block 3 Control External Controller and Sequence Blocks The order of execution is as follows 1 In order of operation sequence ITEM 005 2 In order of function block address 4 User Link Tables Write attributes written as Wr in the CX Process Tool With the CX Process Tool the function block operation sequence ITEM 005 can be registered as described below e Registering from ITEM Lists Directly edit ITEM 005 in each function block and set the operation se quence 1 to 2 000 The default setting is 2 000 e Batch Registration from Block Diagrams Select Settings Setting Block Operating Order from the menus The following operation sequence will be set automatically Free Location Mode The priority for the order of operation is
133. paste the contents of the Output Window display into a spreadsheet such as one created with Excel 0x C D all 1 Comparison result Current project 00 LCBO5 3 0 225 lt gt Function Block file C EquipmentC Node01 ist Tal 2 Result Source Destination 3 1 LCU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 008 is different 115 90 4 2 LCU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 009 is different 90 100 LCU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 039 is different 10 5 6 4 LCU No 00 The value of block address 004 item 009 is different 1 2 3 5 Block address 701 of LCB LCU Number Condition signal registration is different 10 line Mot registered Registered 8 B Block address 701 of LCB LCU NumberO0 N input data is different for condition area 06 line Column Y X 9 7 Block address 701 of LCB LCU Number YN input data is different for condition area 06 line 4 Column X Y pr 10 8 Block address 701 of LCB LCU Number YN input data is different for condition area 08 line 8 Column X Y 11 9 Block address 701 of LCB LCU Number YN input data is different for condition area 12 line 5 Column X Y 12 110 Finished verificatian 13 M bt Sheet Sheet2 Sheet3 Note To clear the display select Clear from the pop up menu 72 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 2 2 3 Menus Menus in Edit Block ITEM Mode Main Menus Submenu Description Conditions for C
134. position The following display will be shown if another function block already exists at the specified location If this display is shown release the function block after changing the speci fied location 6 The cursor will automatically form a pencil icon when it is moved to the loca tion where the connection lines start 7 Click the ITEM location where the connection lines will start then point to the ITEM location where the connection lines will end and double click The connection lines will be displayed To connect function blocks by going 113 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 around other blocks connection lines can be bent at right angles Connect the function blocks by clicking at the corner of the bend CX Process Tool DeviceA Node0O0 Bi File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help amp Si mma 88 E Node00 LCBO5 3 0 Block Diagram 1 1 ca a CS1G H CPU42 Cycle System common operation cycle 00 LOBOS v3 0 225 01 System 3 02 Field Terminal ii 901 AI 4 point 0041 S 902 AO 4 point DA041 e LP Sd J 03 Sequence Control L _ 1 04 Block Diagram 1 REC 001 Basic PID EE z it RSP 002 Basic PID co 1S i 003 Square Root 4 11 05 Block Diagram 2 11 06 Block Diagram 3
135. rows When one or more rows have been cut or copied Column Insert Row Inserts one signal row When row signal How value is selected in Edit Mode Deleted one signal row When a row signal Delete Row value is selected in Edit Mode Insert Column Inserts one rule column When a column rule is selected in Edit Mode Delete Column Deletes on rule column When a column rule is selected in Edit Mode Data Edit Signal Name Edits a signal When a signal is selected in Edit Mode Comment Edits a comment When a comment is selected in Edit Mode Logical Yes Sets a value to Yes When a value is selected in Edit Mode Data Sets a value to No Block Yes Sets an entire row or column to Yes When a row or column is Set Sets an entire row or column to No selected in Edit Mode Edits an element when elements are displayed When a row or column is selected in Edit Mode and Element elements are displayed Delete Deletes a value or tag name PRI 90 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Starts validation of the sequence table Only when online Stop Stops validation of the sequence table When a table is being validated Edit Start Starts editing the sequence table Only when a table is being validated m editing the sequence table When a table is Ip a to LC Downloads the edited sequence table On
136. supported Pulse output writing ON for one refresh cycle is possible to memory in the CPU Unit when a specified ITEM turns ON Table reference function for Not supported Results of conditions set in other tables can be Pulse output sequence tables referenced from Sequence Table Block Model 302 suing TBL commands Step ladder timer instructions Not supported Timer commands TIM can be used in Step Ladder Program Block Model 301 Note These functions are supported only for Loop Control Boards and Loop control CPU Units with unit version 3 0 or later 23 Version Improvements Section 1 4 1 4 11 Version 5 1 CX Process Tool version updated from 5 0 to 5 1 The improvements made from version 5 0 to version 5 1 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Function blocks for gradient Not supported Supported temperature control Gradient PV 10 point control group for up to 4 Mode Converter Block Model 021 groups when a Loop Controller with Gradient SP Mode Converter Block gradient temperature control is used Model 022 Gradient PID Block Note For details on gradient Model 024 Gradient Precompensator temperature control refer to the Loop Block Model 023 Controller with Gradient Temperature Control Operation Manual Cat No W460 1 4 12 Version 5 2 The improvements made from version 5 1 to version 5 2 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table
137. table Show Point Navigation When this option is selected intersection points are displayed This option is se lected by default This option performs the same function as Point Navigation Enable on the Operation Menu Show Vertical Line When this option is selected vertical lines are displayed This option is not se lected by default This option performs the same function as Vertical Line Show on the Operation Menu 3 12 8 User Link Tab Page xi Step Ladder Seguence Table User Link Table Connection 4 Register Tag Name automatically when connected to Field Terminal Set default to update refresh cycle of User Link Table automatically E Cancel Register Tag Name automatically when connected to Field Terminal When this option is selected tags are automatically registered in the user link table with automatic tag naming when software connections are made for field terminals This option is selected by default Set default to update refresh cycle of User Link Table automatically When this option is selected the default the refresh period for tags in user link tables is set to the same value as the processing period for the function block to which a software connection is made When this option is not selected the refresh period specified for tags in user link tables is used This option performs the same function as the Update user link table refresh cycle option in th
138. the cursor to Controller is the function block with the matching block number in the selected Project Workspace Monitor Searches for the Monitor Software tag name that has been When a Loop Tag specified moves the cursor to the function block with the Controller is matching monitor tag in the Project Workspace selected CSV Tag Searches for the tag name for SCADA software that has When a Loop been specified and moves the cursor to the function block Controller node with the matching CSV tag tag for SCADA software in function block file the Project Workspace or Project Workspace is selected User Link Finds the tag name for the user link table related to a When a field Table selected field terminal terminal is selected Convert Ladder to Converts all the ladder diagrams in the Loop Controller When an LCU or Mnemonics per into mnemonics LCB element is LCU LCB selected Cross Reference Displays the cross references of the selected step ladder When an LCU or program i e what instructions use contact ITEMs LCB element is selected Connection Map Displays the relationship between inputs and outputs for When function block the selected function block file for a node is selected Show Memory Map The status showing how the Loop Controller is using CPU When an LCU or Unit memory can be displayed as a list LCB element is selected PLC Operating Mode Changes the operating mode of the CPU Unit from the When a fun
139. the required information on the regis tration card and mail it in This completes installation of the CX Programmer 2 1 5 Installing FinsGateway One of the following communications drivers must be installed in the computer to enable using the CX Process Tool e CX Server Installed at the same time as the CX Process Tool e FinsGateway Version 3 or higher FinsGateway Version 3 or FinsGateway 2003 Embedded Version is bundled with the CX Process Tool Install one of the to use FinsGateway as the commu nications driver The FinsGateway Runtime Version can also be used If the FinsGateway Run time Version is already installed it is not necessary to install an embedded ver sion Preparations before Installing FinsGateway e f FinsGateway Version 2 or lower is already installed perform Step 1 Backing Up the FinsGateway Settings first 56 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 Installing FinsGateway Step 1 Backing Up the FinsGateway Settings Note 1 2 3 Step 2 Removing the Previous FinsGateway Note Step 3 System Restart Step 4 Internet Explorer Installation Step 5 Updating ComCtl32 dll Step 6 Updating the HTML Help Runtime Component 1 2 9 5 e f FinsGateway is being installed for the first time start the procedure from Step 4 Internet Explorer Installation If necessary back up the previous FinsGateway settings as follows If FinsGateway is removed uninstalled
140. those function blocks are not downloaded Other function blocks are downloaded successfully e The following function blocks cannot be registered on CX Process Tool when Loop Control Unit Ver 1 50 and onwards and versions of CX Process Tool low er than Ver 1 50 Ver 1 00 or Ver 1 20 are used For this reason these func tion blocks cannot also be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit If the following function blocks already exist on the Loop Control Unit and are 25 Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions Section 1 5 Note uploaded to CX Process Tool only the following function blocks are not uploaded When a new upload is performed these blocks become empty Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 Accumulated Value Input Adder Block Model 182 Accumulated Value Input Multiplier Block Model 183 Constant Comparator Block Model 202 Variable Comparator Block Model 203 Clock Pulse Block Model 207 ON OFF Valve Ma nipulator Block Model 221 Motor Manipulator Block Model 222 Re versible Motor Manipulator Block Model 223 Motor Opening Manipula tor Block Model 224 Likewise the following functions can be used only when Loop Control Unit CS1W LCO001 Ver 1 50 and onwards and CX Process Tool Ver 1 50 and on wards are used e The following ITEMs can be set on CX Process Tool when versions of Loop Control Unit earlier than Ver 1 50 Ver 1 0 N or Ver 1 20 and CX Process Tool Ver 1 50 or onw
141. version 5 2 or later are used Search Area Specification Wait ITEM189 Search Area Number ITEM194 and Reference Input Search Method ITEM190 for Segment Program 2 search area specification Note For details on particular ITEMs refer to the Function Block Reference Manu al 1 6 Connecting to the PLC Either one of the following communications drivers can be selected to support the connection with a PLC Programmable Controller e FinsGateway e CX Server Selection is also possible when CX Process Tool is started from the Start Menu or when Start Only is selected from the I O Table Window using CX Program mer that was installed from the CX One only When using the CX Process Tool installed from the CX One the default setting is to not display the dialog box for selecting the communications driver Note If Start with Setting Inherited is selected from the I O Table Window using CX Programmer that was installed from the CX One CX Server will be used auto matically as the communications driver 1 6 1 Features of FinsGateway and CX Server The following table compares the special features of the communications driv ers FinsGateway Serial communications modes Host Link SYSWAY CV Host Link or Peripheral Bus for serial connections Network communications Supported Supported through a serial connection Direct network connection Supported Supported Node address setting range 1 or higher cannot be set to
142. will be automat ically expanded by the specified amount in descending order starting from block address 900 Note 1 The expanded portion of the sequence table cannot be edited directly When editing a sequence table edit the portion from the original table that existed before expansion 2 When sequence table expansion is cleared the expanded portion of the table is deleted automatically 203 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 For example if a sequence table at block address 701 is expanded three new areas will be automatically registered as shown below Number of rules 32 64 Number of conditions Block address 701 Block address 900 The original sequence Area for the increased table number of rules 32 32 Block address 899 Block address 898 Area for the increased Area for the increased number of conditions number of conditions and rules 64 64 Equipment i ga 01 001 01 00 LOBOS 225 01 System 02 Field Terminal B 03 Sequence Control A Es Sequence Table m ER 898 Table for extension ue 899 Table for extension T 900 Table for extension J Block Diagram 1 iy 05 Black Diagram 2 3 8 9 Table References for LCBO5 Ver 3 0 or Later The table reference function enables a main sequence table called the main table to reference the results of condition rules in another sequence table called the reference table This
143. will be automatically trans ferred to RAM at startup if pin 2 of the DIP switch on the front of the Loop Control Unit is turned ON This function is used to enable battery free operation The basic procedure is as follows a Execute Backup Data Operation Backup from the Execute Menu b Turn OFF the power supply to the PLC c Turn ON pin 2 of the DIP switch on the front of the Loop Control Unit d Turn ON the power supply to the PLC For an LCBL the contents of flash memory will be automatically transferred to RAM at the following times e When a cold start operation command is given e When a RAM error data lost occurs when power is turned ON causing a cold start e When ITEM 101 backup start command in the System Common block is ON and a flash memory error occurs but RAM is normal when power is turned ON RAM data will automatically be backed up to the flash memory first and then a cold start will be implemented automatically 307 308 Backup and Recovery Section 4 8 The contents of flash memory can also be transferred to RAM as required by executing Backup Data Operation Recover from the Execution Menu An all clear operation is performed before the data is transferred Transferring Tag and Comment Data Section 4 9 4 9 Transferring Tag and Comment Data Data Saved in Flash Memory Flash Memory Types Note Method for Transferring and Recovering to Inner Flash Memory Transferring and Recoverin
144. 0 10 1000 0 D 10500 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 11 100 0 0 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 1000 0 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 13 1000 D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 14 1000 0 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 15 1000 D 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 16 100 0 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 17 1000 D 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 18 100 D 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 19 1000 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 20 1000 0 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 2 100 0 0 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 22 1000 D 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 23 1000 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 24 1000 D D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 25 1000 0 0 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 E 4 k omen The items in the Edit Window are as follows Horizontal Axis P and D Used to set PID parameters MH and ML Used to set the MH and ML values for a connected PID block Extra Data 1 to 5 Used to set extra data 1 to 5 Horizontal Axis Bank number 1 to 100 Indicates the bank number Setting the Maximum Number of Banks to Be Used The maximum number of banks to be used refers to the number of banks to be used in a single program A Seg ment Program 3 block stores in bank data blocks the bank data to be used in the program The number of bank data blocks required depends on the number of banks to be used e Up to 15 banks of data can be stored per bank data block When a maximum of 100 steps is used 7 bank data blocks are used For example when 70 banks are used the maximum numb
145. 000 Scaling Lower Limit 0 DP Position 2 Unit Cancel 2 Set the tag name scaling upper lower limits unit and other information for the function block The same scaling upper lower limits decimal point posi tion and unit setting are used for all of the SP PV and other ITEMs in the function blocks 3 Click the Configure Button The settings required for CSV tags are listed in the following table 145 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 setting Setting range Tag name representative tag 16 characters max All characters can be used Tag Comment 16 characters max All characters can be used Upper Limit 5 000 to 99 999 e g if decimal point is set to 1 550 0 to 9 999 9 Lower Limit 5 000 to 99 999 e g if decimal point is set to 1 550 0 to 9 999 9 Decimal Point number of digits 0 to 9 below decimal point for scaling 8 characters max All characters can be used Note When the node function block is saved a CSV setting file named project name CSV is automatically stored with the following data added to the user set data Seng OO Setting range Network address to 127 Node address 0 to 32 Block movelname Note When CX Server has been selected as the communications driver the node address must be set to a non zero value before compiling the CSV tag file Note Always set tag names SCADA software uses these to identify data 146 Using SCADA Software
146. 04 05 06 OF 08 09 10 No Signs Comment 001 IN 000 013 002 IN 000 003 000 031 lt 000 031 004 Conditions Notation on CX Process screen IN source specification Contact input or contact output ITEMs from function blocks CSV tag and tag ITEM contact input or contact output ITEM for control or operation block User link table tag name I O memory in CPU Unit Timer counter completion status or status contact such as a pre alarm status contact for a timer counter Result of comparison for relational expression Relational Expression parameter 1 lt parameter 2 parameter lt value lt can be replaced with other comparison symbols Run Start flag 005 IN 001 035 AT command aT Executing Y 006 007 008 009 3 8 6 Settings for Conditions and Actions Settings on CX Process screen Input Tab Page Source specification Block and ITEM Input Tab Page Source specification Tag name Input Tab Page Source specification User link table Input Tab Page Source specification Element Helational expression types are set in the command classification on the Relation Tab Page The same settings are possible for parameters 1 and 2 as for the inputs listed above i e Block and ITEM tag name user link table or element or a value constant can be set Setting method Select the block and
147. 1 231 232 233 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 3 1 Creating Function Block 3 1 1 Data Configuration This section describes the function block data created using the CX Process Tool Personal computer memory Project Workspace Select Add IST File from the Function block file Function block file File Menu Select Insert Insert Node from the Settings Menu Creates a new Function block file ist function block file lt 7 ree i Select Save As from File Select Open from the File Select Save from File Menu Menu Specifies the Menu Saves the Saves the present Project multi node file and open all present Project Workspace to a different Select relevant files T Workspace folder File Menu Creates a new CS Process data TOTIS rang Project Project folder Workspace folder Multi node file Function block files Others When creating a new Project Workspace specify the folder project folder where the Project Workspace will be saved Select New from the File Menu Save all the Project Workspace data in the project folder in the memory of the personal computer Select Save from the File Menu To prepare a function block file ist in the Project Workspace insert a node Select Insert Insert Node from the Settings Menu To open all the existing data in Project Workspace specify only the multi node file mul in the proje
148. 2 e Switching RUN STOP for Basic PID Block Model 011 and Advanced PID Block Model 012 e Tight shunt function and analog output reversal function for analog output terminals Free positioning of block Not supported Positioning is possible anywhere in the block diagram diagrams positioning was possible only at fixed locations Increase in the number of blocks Only 16 blocks could be Up to 64 blocks can be registered in each function block that can be registered in function registered in each group block groups function block group Transferring tag comment data to Not supported Transfer The following data can be transferred to flash memory in flash memory was possible to a the Loop Controller block diagram data tags Memory Card in the comments annotations etc Data cannot be transferred CPU Unit to a Memory Card for Loop Control Board version 3 0 Wireless debugging Not supported A fixed value can be input as a pseudo input to adjustment block PVs in a new calibration mode User link MV tight shut Not supported Tight shut outputs to memory in the CPU Unit are tables function supported MV analog output Not supported Reversing outputs to memory in the CPU Unit are reversal function supported Copying pasting Not supported Entries in user link tables can be copied and pasted EM bank Not supported Only the EMO to EMC can be specified specification current bank could be used Not
149. 23 Example 001 019 001 026 001 080 Take the following steps to set or reset the contact ITEMs Set or reset the input contact with the arithmetic operation of the source function block stopped If it is an output contact set or reset the contact with the operation of the destination function block stopped 1 Double click the contact The following Execute Dialog Box will appear 11 Block Diagram 1 001 Basic FID HH High high alarm output High alarm output L Low alarm output LL Low law alarm output 51 Alarm stop switch PVE P error indication R L Remote Local switch AT command amp T Executing DA Deviation alarm output AW Autor Manual switch MVE M error display 2 Double click TEM and change the data to 1 Example Change ITEM 026 to 1 Changed to 1 019 0 PvE PY error indication CT R L Remote Local switch 0 command AT Executing 3 Click the Stop Block Operation Button Example 001 The operation of the Basic PID Block will stop 279 Operation Check Section 4 6 4 Click the Execute Button Example As shown blow 1 will appear under contact 001 026 otopped 1 o TEF 001 019 001 0265 Set to 1 7 lt gt User error Note Not only the contact ITEMs used in the step ladder program but also the contact ITEMs in function blocks and other contact ITEMs can be reset through the Execute Dialog Box
150. 24 Appendix ITEM Notation in Block Diagrams Table 3 below lists function block ITEM abbreviations in block diagrams and their corresponding ITEM numbers and data contents For details on ITEMS refer to the Loop Control Board Function Block Reference Manual Table 3 ITEM Abbreviations in Function Block Diagrams Function block diagram Function block Block Model Basic PID 004 011 Basic PIO Advanced PID 012 Blended PID 013 006 Blended Abbreviation for analog input ITEMs ITEM Abbreviation ITEM number for analog number output ITEMs PV source SP 029 Current set point designation output PV ABN 018 PV error contact DV 044 Deviation output source destination Remote set point MV C 08 source designation Out of range processing at MV MV output MIE AD 0 MV ABN 5 021 61 output destination block MV error contact source destination PV source designation PV error contact source destination Remote set point MVCMP source designation PV compensation source designation Out of range processing at MV output destination block MV compensation source designation MV tracking source designation MV error contact source destination PV source designation P2 source designation MV error contact source designation S Deviation output D Deviation output Output for MV compensation P V MV C MV output rel 1 Accumulated value lower 4 d
151. 3 2 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table em User defined block Not supported Supported Registers a group of function blocks as a single user defined function block HS View tag files csv Not supported The Supported The RS View tag file csv can be CSV tag file must be automatically and directly generated imported to an OPC server and then the RS View tag file csv has to be created manually OPC server direct access tag output Not supported Supported ITEMs other than HMI data can be output for OPC server direct access when the CSV tags are compiled Applies only to the following Ramp Program Block Model 155 Segment Program Block Model 156 and Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 HMI memory map CSV output Not supported Supported The allocations of HMI memory can be output to a CSV file The file shows which words in the EM Area are allocated to tags and tag ITEMs Tuning screens Multiple screens Not supported Only Supported Up to four screens can be open one screen can be open Data logging saved to Not supported Supported Logging is started when the tuning CSV file screen is opened and continues until the tuning screen is closed Setting of number of communications Not supported Supported retries Sequence table Online editing Not supported Supported Displaying PV and Not supported Supported changing set value for timers and counters
152. 3 2 to 4 0 The manual has been updated for this version change as summarized in section 1 4 8 The safety precautions have also been changed and new precautions added Terminology used to refer to the Loop Control Units and Boards has been changed with an explanation pro vided at the beginning of the manual February 2005 CX Process Tool version changed from 4 0 to 4 1 The manual has been updated for this version change as summarized in section 1 4 9 Minor corrections have also been made November 2005 CX Process Tool version changed from 4 1 to 5 0 The manual has been updated for this version change as summarized in section 1 4 10 Minor corrections have also been made 339 Revision History Revision code Dale _ Revised content 10 July 2006 CX Process Tool version changed from 5 0 to 5 1 The manual has been updated for this version change as summarized in section 1 4 11 Minor corrections have also been made 11 November 2007 The CX Process Tool version has been changed from 5 1 to 5 2 The CX One ver sion has been changed to 2 1 Loop Controller functions have been improved The manual has been updated for these changes as summarized in 1 4 Version Improvements 340 OMRON Corporation Control Devices Division H Q Shiokoji Horikawa Shimogyo ku Kyoto 600 8530 Japan Tel 81 75 344 7109 Fax 81 75 344 7149 Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands
153. 3 5 164 E Modell LOBOS User Link Table m Memor 0001 temperature 0001 0 system GIO 0002 temperature 0002 0 System GIO 0003 temperature 0004 0 System GIO 0004 temperature 0004 0 System GIO 0005 temperature 000S 0 System GIO 00068 temperature DULCE 0 System 0007 temperature OOD Serial b 1 0 System G DM 00100 to DM 00115 0008 temperature 0008 erial numbers 0001 to 0 System G automatically 0009 temperature 0009 0016 automatically 0 System allocated to temperature 0010 temperature 0010 added to the file name 0 System G 0001 to temperature 0011 temperature 0011 0 system G 0016 0012 temperature 0012 0 System GIO 0013 temperature 0014 0 System GIO 0014 temperature 0014 0 System GIO 0015 temperature 0015 0 System GIO 00168 temperature 0016 7 0 System 7 GIO User Link Table batch registering First Humber 1 Refresh System common operation cycle Contact Synchronization Syne Signal Tag name Comment Specify Link memory Link Made Constant CIO v Memon Memory A D Analog vw Output as CSV Tag information Scaling upper limit 0000 Scaling lower limit 0 Monitor Plus Tag Set 4 Click the OK Button 5 As shown below tags from tempera
154. 3 LCU Elements 1 Element 1 2 3 1 Select an active node file in the Project Workspace select Print User Link Table from the File Menu 2 Click the OK Button The specified sequence tables in the active node file will be printed 3 11 12 Printing Connection Maps Printing an Open Connection Map L2 9 1 Display the connection map 2 Right click on the connection map and select Print from the pop up menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing Note To print the connection map for a function block selected in the Project Work space select Print from the File Menu 223 Setting Options Section 3 12 3 12 Setting Options 3 12 1 Overview Options can be set for the CX Process Tool Select Options from the Setting Menu The following Product Information Settings Dialog Box will be displayed Configure Project Information X General Communication CSWV Tag Setting Function Block Diagram Step Li 4 Project Workspace Display by Tag name Enable OPC server Direct Access Tag The settings made here apply to the entire Project Workspace i e the entire project Option Settings The following items can be set Tab Option Default General Project When selected displays CSV tag Workspace names for function blocks on the Display by Tag project tree name Ma
155. 44P 35 x x x x a CJ1G CPU45P 35 x x x x x la Can be changed directly For example version 1 5 can be changed directly to LCBO1 version 2 0 A Can be changed indirectly using a multistep process For example after LCBO1 version 1 5 has been changed directly to LCBO5 version 1 5 it can then be changed LCBO5 version 2 0 x Cannot be changed either directly or indirectly 323 Table of LC Type Changes Appendix A Table 2 Conversion to CJ1G CPUI Loop control CPU Unit Project lt gt i Before LC type Unit change version io a0 x a a O 85 x x x x a a a 35 x x x x a a cnecPUgP a a a J30 x x x enecrussp o Ja a a jone crusap a0 x x x x cnecPUuP a a a ene cruup 30 x x x x a a a ee ee b p fa fa CJ1G CPU45P 3 0 GTC Ore cpus a 7 a CIC ae a m A a CJ1G CPU45P GTC CJ1G CPU44P CJ1G CPU45P Co a CJ1G CPU42P Co Co o CJ1G CPU44P Co a CJ1G CPU45P x X N x X N x x N CJ1G CPU44P 35 x x x ja CJfG CPU45P 35 x x x x ja 3
156. 6 Importing User defined Blocks from Files 179 3 7 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions 180 Se adden Diao ams eue ur doh Se eed d UE dtt ee DAR RR Ew 180 F2 MIDCHIODICS us ies eritis meted e PEORES P m odia bodie 187 Cross reference DISD IOQV ro xta 89 pario des Sdn ton Fee deed m RU n d 190 3 7 4 Step Ladder l structlos osuere e e Wee over e adem were xe 191 F REST Lom 194 3 5 Create Sequence Tables oues Sow a ep or Ra edd vw qued d u etit ated 195 3 8 Creatine a sequence Table ier ue t de at Pe iti i 195 3 8 2 Names of Sequence Table Elements 197 3 6 5 vc5etunb Executon oH maie pea bed Zeta dated ed Shed ed ede 197 3 8 4 Zooming In and Out of a Sequence Table 197 Editing Sequence Tables 93 bes n he RS ese WAS ee icta 198 3 8 6 Settings for Conditions and Actions 199 23 8577 Elements hove htt ge a ee a ee D e ED 202 3 8 8 Expanding the Sequence Table 203 3 8 9 Table References for 5 Ver 3 0 or Later 204 3 8 10 Checking for Errors in the Sequence Table 205 3 8 11 Validating the Actions of the Sequence Table
157. Alt Right Increases the size of the connection diagram display Zoom Out Alt Left Decreases the size of the connection diagram display con 96 SECTION 3 Creating Function Blocks This section describes how to create and manipulate function blocks Sek Creatine Function Block aec dens d quedo 99 255 odes 2 so aep tx eei 99 3 1 2 Starting the C X Proeess Tool ane Shad 100 Greatiie a New ntt ate Cae OO s due Erection dno edes ado 103 Sud CupesobPbunolot locks 4 56008 Re EE euer t Er EE BS 105 3 1 5 Making System Common Block Initial Settings 106 3 1 6 Registering Function Blocks 108 3 1 7 Editing Function Blocks hn 110 Block DIJETAITIS S Saw Rab na ede RIS BIO Oa EE CL 111 3 1 9 Editing ITEMs in Function Blocks 124 Saving the Project Workspace s a sr ibm nde dow REM dn 128 3 1 11 Opening a Project Workspace 0 ccc III 128 331 12 IB Cis Proje ees oderat oue oe ase eee heehee ees 129 3 22 CX Process tae e
158. Block Diagram 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 1 06 Block Diagram 3 001 2 position ON OFF 002 2 position ON OFF oft Ready No Changing Set Values Adding and Deleting Elements Timers and Counters during Operation Changing Set Values The set value of a timer or counter can be changed while the Loop Controller and sequence table are operating 288 Operation Check Section 4 6 1 2 3 1 During sequence table operation double click the element in the Element Screen Alternately select the present value on the sequence table right click and select Edit Data Element Action Validation on Element Screen CX Process Tool Node01 Node01 1 5 V1 5 03 702 Sequence Table 8 xj File View Settings Execute Scale DataEdit Operation Validate Action Window Help 8 x 3 e ALA A co Rj i mmm BMP E5 Node01 001 01 Z3 00 LCBOS v1 5 225 01 System 1 02 Field Terminal 1 03 Sequence Control 701 Sequence Table 702 Sequence Table 2 04 Block Diagram 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 1 06 Block Diagram 3 001 2 position ON OFF 002 2 position ON OFF Double click here Element Block Validating Action Set Value TIM 000 47 100 CHT 001 0 200 Ready 1 1 x Right click here and selec
159. Block Model 016 Range Conversion Block Model Control Unit version 2 50 127 Ramped Switch Block Model 167 Level Check Block Model 210 Al4 Terminals DRT1 ADO4 Block Model 588 AO2 Terminals DRT1 DAO2 Block Model 589 Communications drivers FinsGateway only FinsGateway or CX Server can be selected as the communications driver When CX Server is selected both CX Programmer and the CX Process Tool can be started simultaneously sharing the communications driver CX Server Also the computer can be connected through the PLC s Peripheral Bus Tuning Screen Not supported Added the Tuning Screen that could previously be used with CX Process Monitor only in lower versions This screen allows parameters such to be adjusted from the CX Process Tool For example PID constants and SPs can be adjusted in the Basic PID Block Also the Fuzzy Logic Block can be displayed only in this version of the CX Process Tool Download individual Not supported When the CX Process Tool is online and a function block s ITEM ITEM data has been set it is possible to download just that ITEM s data operation data only to the Loop Control Unit by clicking the Download Button For example this function can be used for the AT command autotuning from the Basic PID Block or Advanced PID Block Annotations comments Not supported It is now possible to insert comments at any point in the diagram when operating in Block Diagram Edit Mode or Lad
160. Board The personal computer can be connected to the PLC through a Controller Link Network using the FinsGateway CLK PCI slot Driver or a FinsGateway version 2 or higher Controller Link Driver CX Process Tool Loop Control Unit Loop Control Unit IBM PC AT or compatibla Controller Controller Link Unit Link Unit Controller Link Network Controller Link Support Board Note The Controller Link Driver FinsGateway CLK PCI slot Driver or the FinsGate way version 2 or higher Controller Link Driver must be installed in order to con nect to the PLC via a Controller Link Network Controller Link Unit Controller Link Type Transmission Models o rers ere te CS1W CLK21 V1 CPU Bus Unit Wired Twisted pair cable CS1W CLK12 V1 Optical H PCF Optical we mme CS1W CLK52 V1 Optical Gl Optical fiber eee CJ1W CLK21 V1 CJ CPU Bus Unit Wired Twisted pair cable Ewan Some PM M mmm 33 Connecting to the PLC Section 1 6 Controller Link Support Controller Link Transmission Computer FinsGateway Driver Boards Support Board medium 3G8F7 CLK12 V1 Optical fiber cable PC AT or CLK PCI slot Driver 3G8F7 CLK13 ring configuration compatible FinsGateway Version 3G8F7 CLK52 V1 3G8F7 CLK53 PCI slot 2 cannot be used 3G8F7 CLK21 V1 Wire 3G8F7 CLK23 3G8F5 CLK11 V1 Optical fiber cable IBM PC AT or Controller Link Driver compatible Connections via Ethernet The personal computer can be connected to the P
161. Box will be displayed at the top of the function block s face plate control e The accumulation of trend data starts when the Tuning Screen is opened and is displayed only while the Tuning Screen is displayed e Click the Time Range Button to set the width of the time axis displayed on the Screen e To zoom in on the scale displayed click the Scale Button and change the set ting e To add bias to the display click the Bias Button and change the setting e Click the ITEM List Button to reference an offline ITEM setting list The list will be displayed behind the Tuning Screen 297 Tuning Section 4 7 4 7 4 Face Plate Controls Basic PID 011 298 This section describes the contents of the face plate controls that are displayed on the right side of the Tuning Screen The user set tag name is displayed here Basic PID YE PV numerical value display SP numerical value display BoC z SP Change Button HH High High Alarm i Remote local switch H High Alarm PET Displays SP position PV bar display gt Up Down Buttons to change SP a Switch to AUTO Button Switch to MAN Button L Low Alarm LL Low Low Alarm Manual Pointer Display MV position MV Change Button 69 00 E Sa cad Ne 2 de dee Display MV apa meh numerical value Up Down Buttons to change MV PV Bar Display Displays a bar between the upper and lower limits of the PV range Gre
162. Button 3 8 1 Creating a Sequence Table 1 2 3 1 Right click the 03 Sequence Control folder and select Settings Insert In sert Function Block An Insert Sequence Control Block Dialog Box will be displayed Insert Sequence Control Block Block Mame 301 Step Ladder Block Address 01 Insert Cancel 2 From the sequence block names select 302 Sequence Table A 701 Se quence Table will be created in the Sequence Control folder Insert Sequence Control Block Block Mame 301 Step Ladder 01 Insert Cancel 195 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 3 Double click the 701 Sequence Table The sequence table will be dis played on the right side of the window Pile ES CX Process Tool Equipment 2 01 File View Settings Execution Scale Edit Operation Validate Action Window Help osal e pa pel 01 LCBO5 03 701 Sequence T able Equipment 5 8 8 01 001 01 1 03 00 LCBOS 225 H 01 System 02 Field Terminal i 5g 03 Sequence Control es 701 Sequence T able 4 04 Block Diagram 1 001 Basic PID 002 Basic PID 003 Square Root 59 05 Block Diagram 2 8 06 Block Diagram 3 Sequence Table Edit Disabled Execulion Form Every Cycle Function Block Ready By default the sequence table is set so that editing is disabl
163. CADA CSV tag file when the RS View CSV tags are compiled using Execute Create Tag File HS View Tag When this file is imported into the RS View 32 using the import utility the ITEMs and tags speci fied with CSV tag settings are registered in the tag database in the RS View 32 project 1 RS View tag files are not downloaded uploaded or compared 2 The SYSMAC OPC Server Version 2 40 or higher is required to generate an HS View tag file from the CX Process Tool A comment file contains of the tag data attached to a function block connection diagram or step ladder diagram The file name is automatically set to the same name as the project This file contains the communications settings for communications with the PLC when CX Server is being used as the communications driver The file name is automatically set to the same name as the project CX Process Tool Section 1 1 Job Information Files The job information file consists of data on the registration of jobs for Project sjb Loop Controller Workspace The file name is automatically set to the same name as the project The Loop Controller configuration file is a system file that includes data on the Configuration Files existence of Loop Controllers in the project Data Files of User Link The data file of user link table consists of user link table data that can be edited by Tables CSV Format the user If this file is edited using Excel for example the editing resul
164. CX Process SYSMAC OPC Monitor Monitor Plus Server FinsGateway Yes Yes Yes Ver 3 FinsGateway NO Yes Yes Ver 2003 The CX Process Tool Setup Disk contains each of the communications drivers The following exe files are required for setup e CX Server See note CD ROM drive gt CX Process Tool CX Server setup exe Note The CX Server will be installed at the same time as the CX Process Tool e FinsGateway Ver 3 50 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 CD ROM drive gt Fgwv3 FGW3ee Serial disk1 SETUP EXE CD ROM drive gt Fgwv3 FGW3ee ETN disk1 SETUP EXE CD ROM drive gt Fgwv3 FGWS3ee CLK PCI disk1 SETUP EXE CD ROM drive gt Fgwv3 FGW3ee CLK disk1 SETUP EXE e FinsGateway Ver 2003 CD ROM drive gt Fgw2003 Fgw2003 Disk Images Embed setup exe 2 1 2 Preparations for Installation Note If the CX Process Tool was previously installed from the CX One and it is neces Uninstalling the Previous Version of CX Process Tool 1 2 3 Uninstalling the CX Server PLC Tools sary to update it from the individual CX Process Tool CD ROM always uninstall the CX Process Tool using the following CX One uninstall procedure before installing it from its individual CD ROM Always uninstall the previous version of the CX Process Tool before installing the new version 1 Start Add Remove Programs or Add Remove Applications from the control panel 2 Select CX Process Tool from the dialog b
165. Control Unit the RUN indicator should be lit and the ERC indicator not lit On the the EXEC indicator should be lit Note With the CS1D CPULI IL JP approximately 2 minutes is required after power is turned ON for duplex initialization before the standby Loop Controller will start operation The EXEC indicator and the DPL STA b e 42 Basic Operating Procedures Seclion 1 7 TUS indicator on the Duplex Unit will flash for 40 seconds before light ing Step 6 Trial Operation 1 2 3 1 Start operation from the CX Process Tool using Operation Run Stop Command from the Execution Menu or turn the PLC OFF and ON See section 4 4 Run Step command 2 Monitor status with the CX Process Tool using Operation Monitor Run Status from the Execution Menu and check the load rate for example See section 4 5 Monitor run status Execution error display Stopped Hot start Cold start Self unit address LOU number Start address of Data Memory DJ Processing time load rate Max processing time load rate Operation Cycle Automatic Switch Processing time load rate Max control load rate indication Operation Cycle Automatic Switch Processing time load rate control load rate indicatic 3 Check the connections with the CX Process Tool using Start from the Vali date Action Menu See section 4 6 3 01 LCO01 1 Block Diagram 1 PARR FF a
166. Default 0 Uniti Cancel The contents of the ITEMs for each step will be displayed in table format When the table is directly edited and the OK Button is pressed the values will be reflected in the function block ITEMs For details on the editing function refer to Edit Window Functions The items in the Edit Window are as follows Horizontal Axis 1 to 30 Step numbers Vertical Axis Time width A Used to set the time width as A Output value B Used to set the output value as B The value will be displayed in engineering units if the Engineering Unit Mode is set Wait width Used to set the wait width The value will be displayed in engineering units if the Engineering Unit Mode is set 329 Setting Segment Programs Appendix C Max wait time Used to set the maximum wait time Time unit Used to set the time unit to seconds minutes or hours Initial output value Used to set the BO value The value will be displayed in engineering units if the Engineering Unit Mode is set Unit The unit will be displayed if the Engineering Unit Mode is set Setting Segment Program 3 Use the following procedure to make the settings for Segment Program 3 1 Open the Segment Program 3 ITEM list right click in the ITEM list and select Extension from the pop up menu Operation data gt Jt disable switch 003 ERR 0 Execution error display clear 013 51 0 5 command 014 52 0 Hold switch
167. EM200 to 1 to disable automatic assembly and disassembly by the CX Process Tool This function is supported by Loop Control Unit Version 2 50 and later versions or LCBI J 15 2 No syntax check will be made on the step ladder program instructions being created in mnemonics The step ladder programs will be transferred to the Loop Controller as they are A syntax check will be made on the step ladder programs when the Loop Controller starts operating and any execution er rors will be stored in the Loop Controller The error codes can be checked on the Monitor Run Status Screen 1 2 3 1 Select the Step Ladder Block and select Edit Step Ladder Program from the Settings Menu 2 Click the E icon or select Mnemonics from the Manipulate Ladder Menu The following screen will appear 701 Mnemonics Command Operand M ame STEP 00 Insert Row Delete Row Refresh OF Cancel 3 Take the following steps to input the instructions and operands from the key board a Click Insert Row LCBO1 701 Mnemonics Command Operand b Double click the Instruction Field LCOD1 1 402 Mnemonics Input the instruction Example LOAD Note a The instruction may be in lowercase or uppercase characters Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 b Input LOAD and not LD otherwise the instruction will not be accepted LCBO1 701 Mnemonics Command Opera
168. EPOO only when the default is used that was created with the previous assemble operation will be downloaded 3 Confirm that equipment will not be adversely affected before changing timer command settings Machines and devices may perform unexpected opera tion if settings are transferred incorrectly 4 Each program block in a ladder diagram can have up to 22 lines and 10 col umns Always set ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag of a step ladder program block model 301 to 0 in advance When the Mnemonic Flag is set to 0 the program will be converted to mnemonic code automatically assembled when it is downloaded to the Loop Controller This function is supported by Loop Control Unit Version 2 50 and later versions or LCBI Js 1 Click the 07 Sequence Control Folder and select Insert Insert Function Block from the Settings Menu so that the Step Ladder Program Block will be allocated to a block address 2 Select the Step Ladder Block and select Edit Step Ladder Program from the Settings Menu Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 3 The following screen will appear 10 CX Process Tool Equipment A NodeD1 File View Settings Execution Scale Select Mode Manipulate Ladder Validate Action Window Help oenl E maa 2 Modell LCBO1 03 701 Step Ladder 1 a Equipment 4 S89 01 001 01 00 LCBO1 225 28 01 System 02 Field Terminal 28
169. FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition InstallShield Wizard Select Components Select the components setup will install Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install Description Serial Install FinsG ateway for Ethernet Controller Link PCI network SYSMAC LINK PCI Controller Link SYSMAC LINK C81 BUS Interface gt 23 78 MB of space required on the E drive 174 16 MB of space available on the E drive lt Back Cancel 5 Click the Next Button 6 Specify the installation folder Unless a particular folder is required use the default location and click the Next Button 7 The following window will be displayed Click the Install Button to begin installation OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard E 4 InstallShield Cancel 64 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 8 The following screen will be displayed when installation has been com pleted Click the Finish Button and restart the personal computer OMRON FinsGateway Yersion 2003 Embedded Edition InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete
170. IV 2 General PRECAUTIONS x NIC Ua Mns eee pe eee XXiV Sr OALely PEECAUTTOTIS Date tee am tet eame tae eren era Gb e aed Vra bo tre dioe ie XXiV A Application Precautions cu o ans e aces poti eder rn De RP RACER DE ae AC S CH dis XXVI xxiii Safety Precautions 1 2 3 XXIV Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent and instru mentation systems a process engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment petrochemical plants and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems mach
171. LC through an Ethernet Net work using the FinsGateway ETN UNIT Driver CX Process Tool Loop Control Unit IBM PC AT or Loop Control Unit p compatible Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit Ethernet Ethernet Board Note The FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Driver must be installed in order to connect to the PLC via an Ethernet Network Mode Unt Ethernet PLC C8 CPU Bus Uni CSW ETNH Series CHWETN CPU Bus Uni EE The following two methods can be used to connect to the PLC Communications Network type specified Cable connection network in dialog box Using CX Server Peripheral Bus Select Toolbus Special high speed communications Connect to the PLC s peripheral Toolbus protocol for Programming Devices or RS 232C port Host Link Select SYSMAC WAY Standard protocol for SYSMAC WAY general purpose host computers 34 Connecting to the PLC Section 1 6 The connections shown in the following diagram can be used with either Periph eral Bus or Host Link connections Connections to the Peripheral Connections to the RS 232C port of the CPU Port of the CPU Unit Unit or Serial Communications Board or Unit CX Process CI CX Process Tool Loop Controller T ol Loop Controller DEM IBM PC AT or CS1 CPU Unit I IBM PC AT or RO E compatible Peripheral compatible RS 232C 9 pin male port 9 pin male port 7 CS1W CN226 or 7 CS1W CN626 Y Con
172. Light blue Function block calculations stopped Ratio Setting 033 Tag name mei RatioSetting SP Ratio MAN o Change Button P PV numerical EE 2800 value display SP ratio numerical value display Switch to Re SP ratio mote Button position display j Up Down Buttons to PV bar display change SP ratio Switch to AUTO Button Switch to MAN Button PV Bar Display This bar shows the PV range lower limit to upper limit Green Status normal Hed PV Alarm either HH H L LL occurred Blue Alarm OFF Light blue Function block calculations stopped Indication and Operation 032 Tag name wm IndicationO pe PV numerical 7 m value display AUTO input numerical value display HH High High Alarm Switch to Remote Button H High Alarm jene CAS PV bar display EN lt AUTO input position display L Low Alarm po am Switch to AUTO Button Switch to MAN Button LL Low Low Alarm PV Bar Display This bar shows the PV range lower limit to upper limit Green Status normal Hed PV Alarm either HH H L LL occurred Blue Alarm OFF Light blue Function block calculations stopped Indicator 034 Tag name o won Indicator E PV numerical PV mma value display lt HH High High Alarm High Alarm 100 00 PV bar displa
173. Limit input 2 00 sec CIO 00000 Constant Hd 0006 LIMIT2 Limit 5 2 input 2 00 ec CIO 00000 Constant Hd 0007 Manual Operating 0 2 00 00000 Constant Hd 0009 PRESS Press input error 200 sec ClO 00000 Constant Hd 0009 ERR Rotate count erar 0 2 00 W 00000 Constant Hd 0010 START System run signal 0 2 00 sec CIO 00000 Constant Hd Data Imported from CX Programmer Symbol Table ICXProgrammerlocalsymbolablie CX Process Tool user link table _ Address Memory type and memory address bit position e Always Rd Refresh cycle fest Always 25 Note The settings for the user link table will be saved automatically in an CSV format file called LnkTable csv in a folder with the same name as the project when the project is saved This file can be edited The results of editing the file will be re flected in the user link table when the project is opened or when the active node is switched 166 User Link Tables Section 3 5 Contents of LnkTable csv KE LNK number Link number See note a Tag name from user link table only though16th character Comment from user link table only through 24th character Number of links Automatically set by system number of tags referenced Cycle Refresh cycle 0 to 8 0 System common operating cycle 1 0 01 s 2 0 02 s 3 0 05 s 4 0 10 s 5 0 20 s 6 0 50 s 7 1 00 s or 8 2 00 s Memory type 1 CIO 2 W 3
174. Loop Control Types Functional Elements and Versions Loop Controller Types There are two types of CS CJ series Loop Controller Separate Loop Control lers and Loop Controllers Pre installed in CPU Units Loop Type name Product name PLC series and Unit type Controller type Separate Separate Loop Control Unit CS1W LCOO1 CS series CPU Bus Unit Loop Loop Controller Controller Loop Control CS1W LCBO01 05 CS series Inner Board Loop Controller Board Loop Control CS1W LCB05 GTC CS series Inner Board Loop Controller Board with Gradient Temperature Controller Pre installed in CPU Unit with Process control CS1D CPULILIP A one Unit Loop Controller consisting CPU Unit Pre installed CPU Unit of an Inner Board pre installed in a Loop CS series CS1D H CPU Unit Controller Loop control CPU CJ1G CPULIDIP An Inner Board Loop Controller Unit integrated into a CS series CJ1 H CPU Unit Loop control CPU CJ1G CPULILIP GTC An Inner Board Loop Controller Unit with Gradient integrated into a CJ series CJ1 H CPU Temperature Unit Controller Loop Controller Functional Elements e Separate Loop Controllers consist of only the Loop Controller functional ele ment i e the Loop Controller element e CPU Units with Pre installed Loop Controller consists of a CPU Unit functional element i e the CPU Unit element and the Loop Controller functional ele ment i e the Loop Controller element Versions The functional elements i e
175. Low MV limit 000 Execute Cancel The ITEMs and data displayed on the Monitor Run Status Dialog Box is from the System Common block block model 000 For details refer to the list of ITEMs for the System Common block in the Function Block Reference Manual 266 Monitor Run Status Section 4 5 Note Fora Loop Control Unit the processing time load rate and maximum control load rate indication for each operation cycle block e g ITEM 054 and ITEM 055 are indicated in 0 01 units The data range is 0 00 to 100 00 unit 0 01 For an LCBLI IL jJ the processing time load rate and maximum control load rate indica tion LCB load rate and maximum load rate for the overall Loop Controller for each operation cycle block e g ITEM 047 and ITEM 048 are indicated in196 units The data range is O to 100 unit 1 1 2 3 1 The values under the Data column are recorded when the Monitor Run Sta tus Dialog Box is opened 2 To refresh the data with the dialog box displayed click the Refresh Button 3 To execute the ITEM displayed under the Run column select the ITEM and click the Execute Button 4 5 2 ITEMs Marked Reset Example 051 Processing time load rate 0 01 O52 processing time load rate 0 01 Reset O53 Operation Cycle Automatic Switch 0 Reset 054 Processing time load rate 0 00 ITEMs remarked Reset can be set to 0 reset Select the ITEM and click the Execute Button The following
176. M list will show the computer s offline value for that ITEM rather than the actual value in the Loop Controller 125 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 4 Set other ITEMs in the same way Initial Settings S and Operation Data O The following table provides the details of initial settings S and operation data O _ __ Initial settings S Initial settings in each function block in the data in an LCU LCB element that exists in a function block file ist and step ladder programs Note Data on the registered function blocks i e data on the allocation to the block address and data on the software connection of analog and accumulator signals Operation data O Data for operating each function block in the data in an LCU LCB element in a function block file ist Initial settings and operation All the data in an LCU LCB element in a function data S block file ist The CX Process Tool is normally used to set initial data 5 and the CX Process Monitor is used to set operation data O Data Type ITEM Example PID Block CX Process CX Process classification Tool Monitor Initial settings Initial setting parameter Forward Reverse direction Cannot be for each function block SP setting method set compensation method etc Operation data Operation parameters Example PID Block SP Set in special Set for each function block alarm settings PID cases constants
177. Memory Card 2 Transfer cannot be performed to the inner flash memory Transfer or recovery to the inner flash memory will be performed by executing the following operations Transfer to Inner Flash Memory Download LCU LCB elements select Transfer to LC Selected or transfer data to the inner flash memory select Transfer to LC Recover to Inner Flash Memory New upload Transfer from LC New The Memory Card backup recovery functions automatically when the following operations are performed with the Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit Backup to the Memory Card Downloading LCU LCB elements or transferring data to a Memory Card Recovery from the Memory Card Performing new uploads Transfer from LC New 4 9 1 Backing Up Data to the Memory Card Inner Flash Memory Transfer to flash memory can be performed when LCU LCB elements are down loaded or when a data transfer is performed to a Memory Card Downloading LCU LCB Elements 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB elements in the Project Workspace 309 Transferring Tag and Comment Data Section 4 9 2 Download the LCU LCB elements 3 Click the Start Button and data will automatically be transferred to the inner flash memory after the function block data is transferred Data Transfer to Inner Flash Memory 1 2 3 1 Select Transfer to LC Transfer tag info from the Execute Menu Data will be transferred to the inner flash memory Note The following di
178. Menu 1 Set the unit numbers of the Loop Control Units with the rotary switches on the front panels Loop Control Units only 2 Set the I O tables 243 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 CX Process Initial Settings 1 2 3 3 Set the IP address and subnet mask 4 Connect the cable between the Ethernet connector and Ethernet Unit see note Note Refer the Ethernet Unit Operation Manuals W420 W421 for de tails Setting Network and Node Addresses Select the active function block file in the Project Workspace and select Net work Settings from the Settings Menu The following dialog box will appear Setup network address Network address im _ Node address for Unit address 16 51 Cancel 1 Set the network address to between 000 and 127 in the Network Address Field and set the node address to between 1 and 32 in the Node Address Field 2 Click the OK Button Note Set the network address to O if the local network is connected to Ethernet Note If Ethernet is used manually set the above network address and node address Unit Addresses Loop Control Units Only 1 2 3 Note 244 using the FinsGateway manual setting If the manual settings are not made or different addresses are set no online connections will be possible After the above settings select the LCU element LC001 1 to LC001 3 and se lect Network Settings from the Settings Menu T
179. NS after CSV tags NSFP are compiled Show Tag Monitor Displays information tag names data exchange function When LCU Execution Create Tag File List Tag Loop blocks etc for the CX Process Monitor tags that have element function Control been set block file or Project Unit only Workspace is selected Displays tag information set for SCADA software When an LCU LCB including the tag names block addresses function block element function names scaling units etc block file or Project Workspace is selected Monitor Displays information tag names data exchange function When an LCU LCB Plus Tag blocks etc for the CX Process Monitor Plus tags that element function have been set block file or Project Workspace is selected Check CSV Tag Checks a compiled CSV tag file for errors Tag Error Monitor Checks a compiled Monitor Plus tag file for errors Plus Tag 77 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Submenu Description Conditions for Command selection Execution Transfer Selected Transfers the data in the specified Loop Controller or When a Loop continued to LC function block in the current function block file to the Controller is specified Loop Controller connected online selected or function block is selected FBD In Downloads layout information for a function block When an LCB formation connection diagram to an LCBLJLJ element function block or function bl
180. O Must be set to 0 when the computer is connected directly to the PLC Other features e The same COM port can be used for si The same COM port can be used for si multaneous online connections with ap multaneous online connections with Tools plications using FinsGateway such as such as CX Programmer CX Protocol iw Reporter and SYSMAC OPC Serv and CX Motion er e Supports high speed Peripheral Bus com munications Note The PLC s node address must be set to 0 when using CX Server and connecting directly to the PLC in a 1 1 or 1 N connection The 1 N connection is possible with Host Link communications only On the other hand the node address can not be set to 0 when connecting to the PLC through FinsGateway the node ad dress must be 1 or higher If CX Server was selected as the communications driver and a Function Block 3l Connecting to the PLC Section 1 6 File ist was created for node address 0 with filename NodeOO in that project the project multi node file cannot be opened if FinsGateway is selected later 1 6 2 Selecting the Communications Driver The following dialog box is displayed by default when the CX Process Tool is started from the Start Menu if the CX Process Tool was installed from the individ ual product CD ROM Select communication driver fram below Communication driver FinzGateway E C CX Server Newer show this message Note 1 This dialog box is n
181. O table offline 3 Set the CPU Unit s serial communications mode in PLC Setup settings 4 Set the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit or for a CS1D Duplex System on the front panel of the Duplex Unit e use the peripheral port turn ON pin 4 or the PRPHL pin and set PLC Setup Programming Console address 144 to 0000 HEX e To use the RS 232C port set pin 5 or the COMM pin to OFF and set PLC Setup Programming Console address 160 to 0000 HEX i e the default value After the above steps take the following steps in the CX Process Tool e Set the network address to any value between 000 and 127 for direct serial connections and set the node address to 01 e Set the unit address input in decimal the unit number of the Loop Control Unit plus 10 Hex Loop Control Units only e Select Activate Serial Port Driver from the File Menu set the COM port and communications speed and click the OK Button If any of the above settings is incorrect the CX Process Tool will not connect to the Loop Controller CX Process Tool Online connections e Set the network address e g 000 and node address 01 e Set the unit address e Initialize the serial port Loop Control Unit CS1 CPU Unit 239 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 Setting Network and Node Addresses 1 2 3 1 Select the active function block file in the Project Workspace first Select Network Settings from the Se
182. O Ol here QUT TT TIT 18 NOISIODOS 00 5 is 58882 PRESS NE aD Wee whe oe eae ee Ge oe Ss 19 12426 NOTSIOD sane deity wx ons Pise tr Rt pd i cl n os bor iet diat 20 Tho VBOI Sos atch Senor trahe an eas 20 Js D shit dc et EE 21 EEI VROME T uiis to ase ax ad acini rare nau oe edd einer he 22 154510 VOISIOD ance leto Up ador itas ect d oa 25 beo ER DERE ek eee ee eh peut pedet 24 22 235 eae a malit nto edu Bad d 24 1 5 Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions 25 1 5 1 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 1 20 25 1 5 2 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 1 50 25 1 5 3 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 2 00 26 1 5 4 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 2 50 28 1 5 5 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 3 2 29 1 5 6 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 4 0 30 1 5 7 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 5 0 30 1 5 8 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 5 2 30
183. Process Mon itor Plus is used to monitor function blocks in LCBI IL 15 A connection can be made through Host Link Controller Link or Ethernet so that the data can be monitored on the Control Screens like on site instruments Trend Screens Graphic Screens or Annunciator Screens The CX Process Monitor and CX Process Monitor Plus are used in combination with the CX Process Tool The CX Process Monitor and CX Process Monitor Plus have the following three main functions Monitoring Status of Function Blocks in Loop Controllers Control Block PVs SPs MVs analog signals and contact signals can be moni tored Loop Controllers can be started and stopped The status of the CPU Unit such as the operating mode can be displayed Manipulating Function Blocks in Loop Controllers In Control Blocks settings can be changed automatic or manual operation can be selected manual control is possible and PID constants can be adjusted It is possible to stop the processing of specific Control Blocks on a Tuning Screen Monitoring Alarms in Function Blocks in Loop Controllers Alarms from Control and Alarm Blocks can be displayed and alarm logs can be saved The CX Process Monitor and CX Process Monitor Plus use FinsGateway as the communications driver for connections with the PLC When using the CX Pro cess Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus always set FinsGateway as the com munications driver for the CX Process Tool If the CX Server is
184. Process Monitor Plus Download the function blocks The monitor tag file is generated by compiling the CX Process Monitor tag file that was generated The compilation process will automatically created the monitor tag files in the following folder Folder Omron CX Process Monitor Plus db The underlined portion is the installation folder of the CX Process Monitor Plus File names mtagmst and mtagsubmst 1 Start the CX Process Monitor Plus by selecting Program OMRON CX Process Monitor Plus CX Process Monitor Plus from the Windows Start Menu 2 Click the Start Button The monitor tag file will be compiled Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 3 4 Using SCADA Software 3 4 1 Creating SCADA Software and RS View Tag Files The following procedures are required to create tag files for SCADA software or the RS View 1 2 3 1 For Loop Control Units register Send All Blocks 462 and Receive All Blocks 461 and if required Expanded CPU Unit Terminal or CPU Unit Ter minal function blocks For LCBLILI set ITEMS related to the HMI functions in the System Com mon Block 000 and register tags for user link tables as required 2 Set CSV tags for each function block Note CX Process Tool version 3 1 or higher supports automatic registra tion of CSV tags when function blocks are registered The tag can also be edited in Excel or other software and then read into the proj ect 3 Compiling the CSV tag files The tag
185. Program from the When a step ladder program is Program Settings Menu selected Sequence Same as selecting Edit Edit Sequence Table from the When a sequence table is Table Setting Menu selected List Monitor Same as selecting Display Tag List Monitor Tags from When LCU element is the Execution Menu selected node function block file CSV Tag Same as selecting Display Tag List CSV Tag from the Or Project Workspace Is selected Execution Menu Monitor Same as selecting Display Tag List Monitor Plus Tags Plus Tag from the Execution Menu User Link Same as selecting Edit User Link Table under the Table Settings Menu Cross Ref Same as selecting Cross Reference from the Execution When an LCU or LCB element is erence Menu selected Connection Same as selecting Connection Map from the Execution When a function block folder or Map Menu function block file is selected Memory Same as selecting Memory Map under the Execution When a Loop Controller is Menu selected 3 O Activate Function Block Same as selecting Activate Function Block File from When a function block file is File the Settings Menu selected Rename Same as selecting Rename from the Settings Menu When an LCU LCB element function block group or step ladder program is selected 81 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up menu Description Conditions for selection command System Job Displays the System Job Information D
186. RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustiv
187. Related to MV to Be 0 100 Select this option to set the data range s lower limit to 0 00 and upper limit to 100 00 for the three items MV MV output value or manual MV during MAN mode MH_LMT high MV limit ML_LMT low MV limit in the OPC Server Replace the first character of tag name with select this option to replace the hash symbol at the beginning of tag names in the CSV tag file with an underscore Tags cannot be imported to some SCA DA software if a hash symbol is used as the first character of the tag names The hash symbol can be changed to an underscore to enable importing 229 Setting Options Section 3 12 3 12 5 Function Block Diagram Tab Page Configure Project Information Scale 100 v Grid Grid Color Function Block bitmap Scale This option sets the zoom factor for block diagrams This option performs the same function as the Scale Menu in Edit Block Diagram Mode 100 default The normal display size 50 Half of the default size 200 Twice the default size Grid Mode e Newly Generated Projects in LCBI 0 Ver 3 0 or later To display the grid select the checkbox and set the grid width The default grid width setting is enabled and Narrow Grids can be displayed on block diagrams and lines can be created at the spacing for the selected grid and moved e Newly Generated Project Other Than the Above Select the checkbox default cleared and select
188. SYSMAC CS CJ Series WS02 LCTC1 EV5 CX Process Tool Ver 5 2 OPERATION MANUAL WS02 LCTC1 EV5 CX Process Tool Ver 5 2 Operation Manual Revised November 2007 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property NDANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage A N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Con
189. SYSMAC OPC Server can be used directly to set and monitor all ITEMs in the following function blocks from SCADA software Function Blocks That Can Be Directly Accessed from the OPC Server e Ramp Program Block Model 155 143 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 e Segment Program Block Model 156 e Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 Using OPC Server Direct Access To directly access function blocks from the OPC server the OPC Server direct access tags must be output to the SCADA tag file or the RS View tag file Use the following procedure to output the OPC Server direct access tags 1 2 3 1 Select Setting Option 2 Select the Enable OPC Server direct access tag option on the General Tab Page Configure Project Information Communication CSV Tag Setting Function Block Diagram Step Li Project Workspace Display by Tag Enable OPC server Direct Access Tag 3 Select Execute Create Tag File CSV Tag or Execute Create Tag File RS View Tag The SCADA or RS View tag file will be output Creating SCADA Software and RS View Tag Files 144 Step 1 Registering Function Blocks to Exchange Data with SCADA Soft ware Loop Control Units Register Send All Blocks 462 and Receive All Blocks 461 and if required Expanded CPU Unit Terminal and CPU Unit Terminal function blocks LCBLILJ Set ITEMS related to HMI functions in the System Common Block 000 and regi
190. Section 3 4 Editing with Excel after Automatic Registration Use the procedure shown in the following flow diagram 1 To register a function block select the CSV Tag Auto Register option 2 When the node function block is saved File Save the CSV tag setting csv Automatic compiling of CSV tag setting file is automatically compiled 3 Using a program such as Excel edit the tag names scaling and other data in the CSV Editing CSV tag setting file tag setting file csv in the projects folder Readi Vt tting file 4 Open the projects folder File Open eading CSV tag setting file Only when already edited Set CSV tags Select the control block or operation block and then Settings CSV Tags 5 Compile the tag setting file for SCADA soft ware Execute Create Tag File CSV Tag MEM Creating tag file csv for SCADA software Use the following methods 1 2 3 1 When registering function blocks such as Control Blocks or Operation Blocks for which CSV tags can be set select the CSV Tag Auto Register option as shown in the following illustration Clear the option if the function block is not to be registered Insert Function Block for Block Diagram Type of Function Block Control Black OC1 Block Mame DOT 2 position ON OFF Block Address Iw CS Tag Auto Registration Insert Cancel
191. See note 1 To display connection line diagrams first clear the ITEM data for the connection line data and then it is necessary to connect lines At this time the analog connection data as execution item data is not lost it is saved Therefore the I O for analog accumulated values will be executed nor mally even if the data is downloaded to the Loop Controller and operation is per formed ITEM 200 mnemonic flag will automatically become 1 if a step ladder program block model 301 is uploaded Therefore to display ladder diagrams first set ITEM 200 mnemonic flag to O and then convert mnemonics to ladder diagrams 2 Upload Previous Update Transfer from Loop Controller to Computer If there is a function block file as a base of the function block data in the LCU LCB element the function block data in the Loop Controller will be read Data can be read in units of LCU LCB elements or function blocks Data on the Edit Block Diagram Screen will be displayed by using the block dia gram information file After function block data created with the CX Process Tool is downloaded to the Loop Controller and the operation data is changed with the CX Process Monitor select this method if only the operation data needs to be refreshed To use this method for data in units of LCU LCB elements the source LCU LCB element LCBO1 LCBOS3 LCB05 LCBO5D LCO001 1 to LC001 3 currently opened with the CX Process Tool must match the function block d
192. Setting ITEMs in function blocks e Editing sequence tables Block 302 and the Step Ladder Program Block Block 302 See note Note Editing sequence tables is supported only by the C81W LCBO5 Loop Control Board 00 LCBO05 CS1D LCBO5D Loop Control Board 00 LCBOB5D e Settings tags for CX Process Monitor Loop Control Unit only or CX Pro cess Monitor Plus software or setting CSV tags for SCADA software Tag Names and Analog Signals and creating monitor tag files Loop Control Unit only CX Process Monitor must be already installed or CSV tag files e Downloading function block data to Loop Controllers e Uploading data from Loop Controllers e Comparing function block data with data in a Loop Controller or Function Block File e Sending Run Stop Commands to Loop Controller e Monitoring status including System Common Block Settings Load Rate per Operation Cycle Group and Execution Errors e Monitoring actions of Loop Controllers including operation checks on function block diagrams and ladder diagrams e Tuning parameters such as PID constants in function blocks Control Blocks e Backing up function block data from the Loop Controllers RAM to flash memory and restoring that function block data from flash memory back to RAM e Initializing function block data in Loop Controllers To create monitor tag files using the CX Process Tool with the CX Process Moni tor or CX Process Monitor Plus software both the CX Proces
193. Start transfering l arget TEM Initial setting data 5 peration data Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 Receiving Status LCB gt PC Start Cancel Transfer data from Memory Card 8 Click the Start Button The uploading of the new function block file will start A dialog box will appear while the new function block file is uploaded 9 The box will be closed automatically when processing is completed Upload Previous 1528 d 1 Open the existing file of function block data in the Loop Controller 2 Compare the file and the function block data in the Loop Controller a Select the LCU LCB element or the function block to be refreshed Se lect Compare from the Execute Menu 239 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 4 3 3 260 Compare b C d e Select an LCU LCB element from the File and Block to Compare field Set the level to initial setting data and operation data Click the Compare Button Check the comparison results and confirm that the file matches the data in registered function block and block diagram information If they match take step 3 below Select the LCU LCB element LCBO1 LCBOS3 LCB05 LCBO5D LC001 1 to L C001 3 or the function block to be refreshed and select Transfer from LC Previous from the Execute Menu The following dialog box will appear x 9 The Function Block data will be updated by o
194. Table Online editting E change to black Every Cycle 4 Select Edit Transfer to LC from the Validate Action Menu Alternately right click and select Validate Action Edit Transfer to LC The following dialog box will be displayed to download function blocks Function block transfering Block No 701 x Start transfering Target ITEM nitial setting data 5 C psa data 0 Sending Status PC gt LCB Option lt lt Update User Link Table refresh cycle Transfer Block connection information to LC LCB back up indication after transfering Transfer data to Memory Card 5 Click the Start Button Downloading will be started and the sequence table including the edited data will be downloaded 285 Operation Check Section 4 6 Operation will continue with the edited sequence table NodeO1 1 5 V1 5 03 701 Sequence Table 1 E Bl x 01 02 04 05 Sequence Table Online editting Execution Form 20 IN Tag002 HH High ni gh alarm output IN TagO0O2 R L Sw Remote Local switch IN Not set H START IN Tag002 A M SW IN LNKOOO1 Run Device Operation for Online Sequence Table Editin 1 2 3 1 The Loop Controller will continue to operate during online editing from the CX Process Tool 2 When editing has been completed the sequence table is downlo
195. Tool these function blocks cannot be registered in the CX Process Tool so they cannot be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit If these function blocks have been downloaded to the Loop Control Unit al ready the data for these function blocks won t be uploaded from the Loop Con trol Unit The supported function blocks will be uploaded normally If Upload New is selected the unsupported function blocks will be empty Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions Section 1 5 ITEMs Incompatible with The following ITEMs can be used only with version 2 50 or later versions of the Earlier Versions CS1W LC001 Loop Control Unit and version 2 50 or higher versions of the CX Process Tool e Block Registration Flag 9 and Toolbar Version ITEM110 in Sys tem Common Block Model 000 e Warning Limit ITEMO20 in the following Blocks Basic PID Block Model 011 Advanced PID Block Model 012 2 position ON OFF Block Model 001 3 position ON OFF Block Model 002 In dication and Setting Block Model 031 Indication and Operation Block Model 032 Ratio Setting Block Model 033 Indicator Block Model 034 and 4 point Warning Indicator Block Model 110 e SP Rate of change Limit Time Unit in Advanced PID Block Model 012 e The following ITEMs in Batch Flowrate Capture Block Model 014 Local SP Setting Upper 4 Digits ITEMO24 Remote SP Setting Upper 4 Digits ITEMO28 Current SP Upper 4 Dig
196. Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 4 3 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data The specified LCU LCB element data or function block data in a function block file ist can be downloaded to RAM in the Loop Controller The specified LCU LCB element data or function block in RAM in a Loop Controller can be uploaded to the specified LCU LCB element or function block file or compared with other files In the following description transferring from the personal computer to the Loop Controller is called downloading and transferring from the Loop Controller to the personal computer is called uploading With after downloading the function block data to RAM in the Loop Controller the data can be backed up in flash memory in the Loop Controller by selecting the option LCB backup indication after download Refer to 4 8 Backup and Recovery for details Data to be downloaded uploaded or compared can be in the following units in addition to units of LCU LCB elements or function blocks Selected item s Download Upload Compare Previous New Two or more LCU LCB elements Not possible Not possible Not possible OK between files only One LCU LCB element One item in a step ladder program Not possible OK OK OK sequence control directory One ITEM OK Operation data O Not possible Not possible Not possible only The following data can be downloaded uploaded or compared Data Descipion
197. Validate Action Mode Displaying the status of contact Double click the command symbol Current step number Rule conditions met not met Condition signal conditions met not met Action signal conditions met not met 236 Overview of Online Functions 1 Section 4 1 Function Description Menu commands Tuning Settings such as the function block s PID constants can be Select Monitor Tuning Screen adjusted from the Execution Menu Backup Recovery Copies function block data from RAM to flash memory in the Select Backup Data operation Loop Controller or restores the data back to RAM from the Execute Menu Clear all Initializes the function block data in the Loop Controller Select Operation and Clear all from the Execution Menu 237 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 4 2 Initial Settings for Online Connections The following initial settings are required in order to connect the CX Process Tool to the PLC online and enable the online functions described above Select one of the following communications drivers for the online connection with the PLC Programmable Controller e FinsGateway e CX Server 4 2 1 Selecting the Communications Driver 238 Note The following dialog box is displayed when the CX Process Tool is started from the Windows Start Menu or when Start Only is selected from the I O tables Select communication driver fram below Communication driver Fin
198. X Process Tool Select the LCU ele ment and then select Find LCU LCB from the File Menu This can be per formed even before initializing serial communications Refer to Automatical ly Setting Addresses page 245 for details Initializing Serial If a serial connection is used it is possible to start FinsGateway Communica Communications tions service with the following steps Te d Select Activate Serial Port Driver from the File Menu The following dialog box will appear Initialize Serial Part Speed esoo Cancel 2 Input the name of the COM port of the personal computer and the baud rate The baud rate can be set to 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 bps but it must be the same as that set in the CPU Unit in serial communications mode otherwise no communications will be possible Note Set the data length to seven bits the number of stop bits to two and the parity to even as communications conditions 3 Click the OK Button 4 The following dialog box will appear proceed intializing serial Fins ateway will be restarted Are you sure 241 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 Controller Link Initial Settings 242 Note 1 2 3 5 Click the OK Button Serial communications will be initiated 1 The following dialog box will appear is an online function such as download ing or uploading data is attempted before the initialization of serial
199. X Process Tool beforehand that the content of ITEM 099 onwards in the System Common block Block Model 000 is as follows WEM Dsamame 099 MPU FROM version indication 150 Version V1 50 and onwards must be indicated 1 5 3 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 2 00 26 The following function blocks described in this manual can be used only when Loop Control Unit C81W LCO01 Ver 2 00 and onwards and CX Process Tool Ver 2 00 and onwards are used e The following function blocks can be registered on CX Process Tool when ver sions of Loop Control Unit earlier than Ver 2 00 Ver 1 0L Ver 1 20 or Ver 1 50 and CX Process Tool Ver 1 50 or onwards are used However if the data of these function blocks is downloaded to the Loop Control Unit in major item units units of Loop Control Unit when these function blocks are registered on Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions Section 1 5 Note CX Process Tool an error occurs and only those function blocks are not downloaded Other function blocks are downloaded successfully e The following function blocks cannot be registered on CX Process Tool when Loop Control Unit Ver 2 00 and onwards and versions of CX Process Tool low er than Ver 2 00 Ver 1 001 Ver 1 20 or Ver 1 50 are used For this reason these function blocks cannot also be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit If the following function blocks alrea
200. X Server Installer Install Internet Explorer version 5 0 in advance if it is not al ready installed 2 1 4 Installing the CX Process the CX Server 1 2 3 1 Place the CX Process installation disk CD ROM into the disk drive 2 Double click the Setup exe Icon in the CX Process Tool Disk1 folder in the CD ROM from Windows Explorer or other software E Setup exe A dialog box indicating that setup preparations are in progress will be dis played and then the InstallShield Wizard will be displayed Click the Next Button CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for CX Process Tool The InstallShield Wizard will install C lt Process Tool on your computer To continue click Next 52 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 3 The License Agreement Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully IMPORTANT By installing this package you agree to be bound by the following Software License Agreement If you do not agree please return the enclosed software Software without installing this package to the shop where you bought the Software The warranty service set forth in Section of the Software License Agreement and any information on the Software and its revision and new version will not be provided to you unless
201. a connection map tion Map Recent File Displays up to the four files most recently used up to the Displays up to the four files most recently used files most recently used Activate Serial Port Connects to the PLC via Host Link Driver Find LCU Displays the serial Host Link Controller Link or Ethernet When an LCU or Link networks of M PLC to rs the CX Process Tool is element is connected and searches for Loop Controllers It gets the selected network addresses node addresses and unit address of all Loop Controllers found and sets them in the currently active node function block file 73 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Submenu Description Conditions for Command selection File Show Show The Communications Driver Dialog Box will be displayed When an LCU or continued Driver when the CX Process Tool starts LCB element is Select Hide The Communications Driver Dialog Box will not be selected Dialog displayed when the CX Process Tool starts Engineer View Toggles between Engineering Unit mode and Percentage ing Unit Mode Mode Assert Toggles between displaying and hiding the Engineering Rounding Unit Assert Rounding Errors Dialog Box Errors When a function block file is selected Activates the selected function block file so that the file can be edited or operated online When the file is activated the function block file on the tree will turn red Activate F
202. a function block file ist into the When the Project continued Project Workspace Workspace is selected Note Ifthe current function block file has been changed it must be saved before executing this command Insert Creates and inserts an LCU or LCB element into a When a function LCB LCU function block file block file is selected The LCU LCB numbers and corresponding model numbers are as follows 00 LCB01 LCBO1 Ver 1 0 or later 00 1 LCBO3 Ver 2 0 or later 00 1 5 LCBO5 Ver 1 0 or later 00 LCBO5D LCBO5D Ver 1 0 or later 01 LC001 CS1W LCOO1 02 LC001 CS1W LCOO1 03 LC001 CS1W LCOO01 Inserts a block diagram When an LCU or LCB element is selected Insert Block Diagram Insert Creates and adds a function block When a function Function block group is Block selected When the current function block file or LCU LCB element When a function is selected Deletes the function block file block file LCU LCB element block diagram or function block is selected Edit Edits function block ITEMs When a function Function block is selected Block ITEMs Edit Block Sets the CX Process Tool to Edit Block Diagram Mode When the block Diagram and make the software connection between function diagram is selected blocks The edit block diagram menu will be explained later Sets the CX Process Tool to Edit Step Ladder Program Mode and edits the instructions
203. ack Returns to the previously display function block connection map Forward Returns to the connection map displayed before Back was executed Jump Selected Selects an ITEM in the connection map When the function block for which the connection map was display is selected Memory Optional Displays a connection map for a specified CPU Unit Area I O memory area CIO W DM or EMO and address Increments the displayed address by one word When an I O memory address for the connection Decrements the displayed address by one word map is selected Edit Function Block Item Displays a window showing a list of function block WERE ITEMs Edit Block Diagram Display a function block diagram window When an ITEM in the function block for which the connection map was display is selected Edit Step Ladder Diagram Display a connection map for a step ladder When a step ladder program command is selected Edit User Link Table Displays a user link table window When a tag for a user link table is selected Edit Sequence Table Displays the Sequence Table Window When the sequence table symbol is selected Set Tags Displays the Function Block CSV Tag Setting Dialog When an CSV tag setting is Box for the displayed connection map selected Update Display Updates the connection map display Scale 10096 Displays the connection diagram at 100 20096 Displays the connection diagram at 200 Displays the connection diagram at 50 Zoom In
204. aded to the Loop Controller While the sequence table is being written to download it the Loop Controller will operate with the previous sequence table 3 When the sequence table in the Loop Controller has been completed down loaded operation for the sequence table will continued from the step num ber from before the download See note Note If however the conditions have been met to move to the next step operation will be continued from the next step Editing Start of online editing End of online editing CX Process Tool Downloading Writing Download completed Loop Controller Continues Operating ii Sequence table Operating See note Execution continues from the rule being executed in N Step number Rule Time Note Operation continues with the sequence table from before the download Outputs The operation of outputs after the download will be as shown in the following table according to the output status just before the download 286 Operation Check Section 4 6 Output type Output status before Output status after download download Outputs Holding OUT H OFF until the condition is met again OFF Not Holding OUT Pulse OUT_P OFF opposite status from last cycle OFF ON opposite status from last cycle Flashing OUT_F OFF and flashing ON opposite status from last cycle and flashing ON and flashing OFF opposite status from last cycle and flashing ON and not
205. ag files are stored using the Monitor Software from the Setup Dialog Box 3 CX Process Monitor tag files are not used when comparing downloading or uploading data A CX Process Monitor Plus tag file contains the CX Process Monitor Plus tag data for a single CPU Unit with a maximum of three Loop Control Units CX Process Monitor Plus tag data consists of tag names tag comments corre sponding ITEM numbers or block addresses and analog signal scaling data By reading the tag file with the CX Process Monitor Plus the block address or ITEM number in function block data corresponding to the CX Process Monitor tag on each screen can be specified The CX Process Monitor tag file is created by selecting Create Tag File Moni tor Plus Tag from the Execution Menu If the CX Process Monitor Plus is then started and the Start Button is pressed the monitor tag files mtagmst and mtag submst will be automatically generated If the monitor tag files are read from the CX Process Monitor the block addresses or ITEM numbers in the function block data corresponding to the monitor tag names pasted on the screen can be se lected 1 It is necessary to install the CX Process Monitor Plus on the same computer before creating monitor tag files 2 CX Process Monitor tag files are stored by default in the following folder with fixed file names Folder Omron CX Process Monitor Plus db 3 CX Process Monitor Plus tag files are not used when comparing do
206. allocated in the field terminal block Orange e When program pattern data is allocated in Segment Program 3 Block Model 158 Dark green 1 For User Link Table contacts the memory address in which the contact signal is allocated is displayed in color 2 The following two types of overlapping can be confirmed when checking whether the same I O memory address has been used more than once e When data has been written sent from the Loop Controller to the same memory address the CPU Unit The corresponding cell will be dis played in red to indicate an overlap warning e When data has been read received to the Loop Controller from the same memory address the CPU Unit or when data has been read ceived from and written sent to the same I O memory address in the CPU Unit The corresponding cell will be displayed in aqua to indicate an overlap in the receive area CPU Unit CIO Area Used in HMI CX Process Tool interface Offline Used in User Link Table Memory Map Used in field block terminal Area type CIO Displays whether the tag is being used in the HMI interface data area the User Link Table or a Field Block Terminal Also displays whether any address is being used more than once This function simplifies management of the CPU Unit memory by enabling con firmation of which areas in the CPU Unit s I O memory are being used by the Loop Controller Displaying Loop Con
207. alog box will be displayed when the functions groups have been downloaded x Transfer tag information OK Note To download functions after adding or deleting function blocks be sure to click the OK Button to transfer the tag information to the internal flash memory If the tag information is not transferred to the internal flash memory block diagrams will become corrupted when a new upload is performed and may be deleted Memory Card Downloading LCU LCB Elements 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element in the Project Workspace Area 2 Download the LCU LCB element 3 The following dialog box will be displayed LCB Transferring All Blocks x Start transfering System will be stopped m Target ITEM nitial setting data C Operation data 0 Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 m Sending Status PC gt LCB Start Cancel Update User Link T able refresh cycle Transfer Black connection information to LE LCB back up indication after transfering v Transfer data to Memory Card 4 Click the Option Button and make sure that the Transfer data to Memory Card option is selected This option is normally selected by default when the Memory Card is installed 5 Click the Start Button Function block data will be automatically transferred to the Memory Card after being downloaded Transferring Data to the Select Transfer to LC Memory Card from the Exec
208. als including parameters or the con tact signals including parameters as the source for data exchange with the computer Also create AO Terminal Settings from Computer or DO Terminal Settings from Computer Function Block to enable receiving analog signals or contact signals from the computer Using the CX Process Tool set tag names for the function blocks analog sig nals including parameters or contact signals including parameters specified as sources Also set tag names for the analog or contact outputs of the AO Ter minal Settings from Computer or DO Terminal Settings from Computer Function Blocks It is also necessary to set the zero point span point decimal place and scaling of engineering units Create the monitor tag file to transfer the created tag data to the CX Process Monitor The CX Process Monitor must be installed before creating the monitor tag file Download the function blocks The CX Process Monitor Plus uses the network address node address and unit address set using the CX Process Tool Setting Network Settings or Setting Change PLC for communications with the PLC The communications set tings for the CX Process Monitor Plus and thus made from the CX Process Tool The function blocks used to exchange data with the CX Process Monitor Plus must be registered and connected Register the following blocks for the items to be monitored em Loop Control Unit 788 Function block data to exchange
209. am Function Block Groups Specity Black All Pages Show Start fi C Hide System comman 02 Field Terminal z hemna G A 04 Receive Terminal from all node P z 055270 teminal to amp ampute C FEES vj x Be Ges Unit terminal e c 7 Segquence GA c s C Specity Function Block Group 2 Select the LCU LCB element to print 3 Click the OK Button to print all the LCU LCB element data To print a function block group select the function block group or the block addresses to be printed The following Print Preview Screen will appear CX Process Tool Equipment A NodeDl Pile ES Print Nest Page Pag 1 ModcO1 Print Function Blocklizt Printe d09 24M 22 06 38 Function Hock List Contents 00 LCBO 01 Syste m address 99 Field Terminal address 901 902 SequenceContral mods 302 701 Block Dia gam 1 address System Common Internal S witch Block name AI 4 point AD041 AO 4 point DA041 Block name SequenceTable Block name Baac PID Baac PID Square Root gt I lNM Z 4 Click the Print Button to start printing 217 Printing Section 3 11 Printing Example Page Node O1 Frint Function Blocklist Print diaz 22 06 55
210. am 3 001 2 position ON OFF 002 2 position ON OFF ea Block Validating Action Iw 000 100 002 CHT 001 0 Ready 291 Operation Check Section 4 6 2 The following dialog box will be displayed Select the new element timer or counter to be added Element Initial Data Setup E X Element type f Timer C Counter Set Value Pre Alarm value Unit 1 0 0 ec 2 1 sec 4 min System element 0002 Block Set and Send Delete Cancel 3 After adding the element click the Set and Transfer Button Deleting Elements Possible on Element Display Screen Only An element can be deleted while the Loop Controller and sequence table are operating 292 Operation Check Section 4 6 L2 dis 1 Double click the element to be deleted CX Process Tool BMP Node01 Node01 LCBO05 V1 5 03 702 Sequence Table E 8 File View Settings Execute Scale DataEdit Operation Validate Action Window Help 8 x ALA A a Rj Si mmm a BMP 001 01 Z3 00 LCBOS V1 5 225 01 System Element Block Validating Action 000100 CHT 0010 3 TIM 002 1 02 Field Terminal 03 Sequence Control 701 Sequence Table 702 Sequence Table 2
211. am created in mne to Ladder Diagram monics or uploaded into a ladder diagram This procedure is possible only when ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag of the step ladder program block model 301 is set to O The step ladder program cannot be converted to mnemonic code if ITEM200 is set to 1 Select Convert Mnemonics to Ladder from the Manipulate Ladder Menu or click the Sal icon The mnemonics will be converted to a ladder diagram Note 1 When uploading a step ladder program block model 301 from a unit Ver 2 00 or earlier Loop Control Unit ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag will be set to 1 automatically Change this setting to ITEM200 1 when the program is converted to ladder diagram format 2 No syntax check will be made on step ladder programs being created in mnemonics Therefore when a step ladder program is converted into a lad der program the instruction blocks may be illegal 3 If ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag is set to 0 the program will be disas sembled automatically mnemonic to ladder diagram conversion during the upload operation when it is uploaded from the Loop Controller 3 7 3 Cross reference Display Take the following steps to display the cross references for a step ladder pro gram The cross references show the instructions with their contact addresses and mnemonic row numbers in the Step Ladder Bock for each block address Note Before displaying the cross references convert the ladder diagram into mne monics otherwise
212. and select Register User Link Table Link Input Read from CPU Memory from the pop up menu e Output User Link Tables Writing data from the Loop Controller to the CPU Unit Right click on the block diagram and select Register User Link Table Link Output Write to CPU Memory from the pop up menu The following type of function block will be pasted into the block diagram Example Input User Link Table User link Table 2 Right click on the ITEM to be set and select Register User Link Table Reg ister Block Cell from the pop up menu The ITEM will be displayed with a red border and the following dialog box will be displayed Select User Link T able E3 Tag Mew 005 User link Table Batch Flowrate Capture gt m bm ese 3 Select the name of a user link table tag that has been registered or input a new tag to register it in the user link table 119 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 As shown below the memory address here DMOOO00 in the CPU Unit that corresponds to the selected tag will be displayed User link Table Dh4 00000 To change the display to the tag name right click and select Display Mode CSV Tag Mode from the pop up menu A checkmark will be added to the menu and the tag name will be displayed instead of the I O memory ad dress User link Table 4 Create software connections just as for other function blocks
213. and select Speci fied as Field Terminal User Link Table Edit Menu Right click at the top of the User Link Table to display the editing menu described in the following table 170 User Link Tables Section 3 5 Pop up menu Registers an entry for a single link tag in the User Link Table Block Set Registers multiple links tags with the same attributes in the User link Table at the same time with tag name to which serial numbers are attached Move Increases the entry numbers for the specified entry and all entries lower than it by an increment of 1 Arrange Number Reassigns all entry numbers in ascending order This See note 1 is not a reordering function The reference for the related function blocks is also automatically changed by this operation Edit See Edits the selected entry note 2 Makes the extension settings for a selected entry see note 2 Delete Selected Deletes selected entries Entries After deletion the corresponding entry numbers are available No Deletes all the entries for zero links at the same time Connection After deletion the corresponding entry numbers are available Delete Deletes the CX Process Tool entry and the entry stored Registered in the LCB at the same time Entry Update Selected Sets the refresh cycle for the selected entries to match Refresh Entries the operation cycle of the destination function block Cycle All Entries Sets the refresh cycle for all
214. ards are used However if the data of these ITEMs is downloaded to the Loop Control Unit when these ITEMs are set on CX Pro cess Tool only those ITEMs are not downloaded Other ITEMs are down loaded successfully e The following ITEMs cannot be set on CX Process Tool when Loop Control Unit Ver 1 50 or onwards and versions of CX Process Tool lower than Ver 1 50 Ver 1 00 or Ver 1 20 are used For this reason these ITEMs cannot also be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit If a download in major item units Loop Control Units or a download in function blocks units including initial setting data is performed the respective defaults are set to the following ITEMs on the Loop Control Unit If the following ITEMs are already set on the Loop Control Unit and are uploaded to the CX Process Tool only the following ITEMs are not uploaded AT auto tuning functions of Basic PID block Block Model 011 and Ad vanced PID Block Model 012 and wait function and additional steps step numbers 8 to 15 of the Ramp Program block Block Model 155 1 For details on which actual ITEM this restriction applies to refer to the ITEM list for the relevant function block in the Function Block Reference Manual 2 The version of the Loop Control Unit can be verified in the Monitor Run Sta tus Screen Execution Operation Monitor Run Status on CX Process Tool When the above function blocks are used check in the Check System Op eration screen on C
215. are Root Function Blocks e Icons indicating data Selected Red Not selected Blue e The function block names will be displayed after the block address Desciplon Exampe _ Project Workspace Data consisting of up to 32 function Equipment A block files The same data capacity as a project folder Function block files Data for a single PLC CPU Unit Node 01 Consisting of up to three Loop Control Units and one LCBL IL Loop Controller Data for a single Loop Controller L C001 1 Function block Classifications such as block diagrams Block diagram 1 groups determined by the CX Process Tool Function blocks Individual function blocks Basic PID Note To restore the original Project Workspace display i e the display up to the func tion block file right click on the Project Workspace and then select Initialize Workspace Display from the pop up menu 2 2 2 Output Window The execution results of operations are displayed in the Output Window Comparison result Current project 00 5 V3 0 225 222 Connected LC No Result Source Destination Information Display 1 LCU No 00 The value of block address 001 item 012 is different 50 00 1 00 The names of operations ng 2 LCU No 00 The value of block address 001 item 024 is different 1 0 LCU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 009 is different 90 00 100 00 executed are displayed along with
216. ata in the Loop Controller in the following items 1 Registered function block block address vs block model 2 Block diagram information 3 Step ladder program in mnemonics If the LCU LCB element does not match with the function block data in item 1 or 2 the data with the same ITEM number in the function block with the same block address will be under any condition read regardless of whether the block model matches or not The data will overwrite the data currently opened Therefore the data currently opened may change to illegal data If the LCU LCB element does not match with the function block data in item 3 the operation depends on the setting of ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag e When ITEM200 1 the mnemonic code that is read will not match the previous ladder diagram Therefore before uploading data in this method it is recom mended to compare the initial setting data items in the Loop Controller and check that the LCU LCB element matches the function block data in item 1 through 3 especially 1 and 2 Refer to 4 3 3 Compare for details e When ITEM200 0 the mnemonic code that is read is automatically disas sembled converted from Mnemonics to Ladder When Step Ladder Program Block Model 301 Is Uploaded e TEM 200 Mnemonic Flag Is 1 Ladder diagrams cannot be displayed To display ladder diagrams first set ITEM 200 mnemonic flag to O and then convert mnemonics to ladder e TEM 200 Mnemonic Flag Is 0 Revers
217. atically generated Imported using import utility Note The CSV settings file project name csv is a data file automatically generated by the system to create a SCADA software or RS View tag file In comparison the SCADA tag file or RS View tag file is output based on the CSV settings file and contains the CPU Unit I O memory allocations for each tag ITEM anded Scaling Data for SYSMAC OPC Server Version 2 6 CX Process Tool Version 4 0 or Higher Only Scaling functions have been expanded in SYSTEM OPC Server Version 2 6 and higher The expanded scaling data enables scaling in engineering units using an OPC Server Therefore scaling settings in the SCADA software are not re quired CX Process Tool version 4 0 or higher is required to export CSV tags with expanded scaling data from the CX Process Tool to SYSMAC OPC Server version 2 6 Expanded scaling data cannot be exported if lower versions of the 142 CX Process Tool are used Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Exporting Expanded Use the following procedure to export CSV tags with expanded scaling data Scaling Data Step 1 Set Options Select Setting Option and then select the CSV Tag Setting Tab to display the following window Configure Project Information Ea General Communication CSV Tag Setting Function Block Diagram Step L v Show extended property Always enable OPC Server scaling tag option Treate User Link Table as OPC Server scaling
218. ay the pop up menu and se lect Annotations Selected Annotation Edit The following diagram shows the appearance of the annotation when it can be edited Comment D ata 4 k 3 Input the text In this example Tank Temp PV1 has been input Press the Enter Key to create a new line iT ank Temp 1 e 4 To stop editing the annotation click on something other than the annotation The annotation will contain the new text Tank Temp d PUID A 1 Sa 1 Note a To change the size of the font in the annotation select the annota tion click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select Annotations Selected Annotation Font Size The de fault font size is 12 points b The annotation can be enlarged if necessary The default size is the minimum size so the annotation cannot be made smaller than the default Select the annotation select the symbol on the right side of the annotation arrows will be displayed on both sides of the symbol and enlarge the annotation Tank Temp PU1 Y 1 1 121 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 5 Grab the annotation and move it to the desired position Note a When the annotation is displayed over a function block or con necting line and covers it up click the right mouse button to dis play the pop up menu and select Annotations Selected An notation Send Behind Blocks and Lines b If two annotations
219. ay up to the function selected block file Pop up Menu in Output Window Menu Displayed by Clicking Right Button Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Copy All Ctrl C Copies to the clipboard the contents displayed When the Output Window is in the Output Window selected Clear Clears the contents displayed in the Output Window Pop up Monitor Tag List Menu Menu Displayed by Clicking Right Button Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Monitor Tag Setting Displays the Monitor Tag Setting Dialog Box When the monitor tag list is Monitor Tag ITEM List Displays the ITEM list for the send block to the displayed relevant computer to all nodes find Project Workspace Registered Block ITEM List Displays the ITEM list for the relevant source function block find Project Workspace Prints the monitor tag list 94 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up Monitor Plus Tag List Menu Menu Displayed by Clicking Right Button Register When the monitor plus tag itis diced ITEM List Displays the ITEM list for the applicable function block Project Workspace search User Link Table Displays the User Link Table Edit Window Connection Map Displays a connection map visually showing the input source and output target for selected signals Check Overlapping Tag Name Checks for Monitor Plus tags that are used more than once Find Tag Searches for the specified Monitor Plus tag name Class
220. ayed for function blocks using addresses specified in the memory of the CPU Unit Right click on the map and select Jump Memory Area Optional and specify the memory address The speci 123 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 fied address can be incremented by selecting Jump Memory Area Increment and decremented by selecting Jump Memory Area Decrement 3 1 9 Editing ITEMs in Function Blocks Use the following procedure to set the ITEMs in each function block 1 2 3 1 Double click the function block Name the block address of which is shown on the left hand side on the Project Workspace Screen A list of the ITEMs will appear in the right pane Ox Process Tool Equipment 1 ial o X File View Settings Execute Window Help psal ALA Si Node 1 5 04 001 Basic PID Equipment NodeO1 001 01 21 280 00 LCBOS 225 01 System 3 02 Field Terminal 901 AI 4 point 4D041 902 AO 4 point DA041 D3 Sequence Control D4 Block Diagram 1 zi 001 Basic PID 002 Basic PID 003 Square Root 28 05 Block Diagram 2 106 Block Diagram 3 Basic PID Comment 01 Model Basic PID System common operation Operation cycle common 2000 Operation order PV source designation Hysteresis setting PV error source designation Alarm limit RSP source Set Point setting mode default PV tracking at local
221. ber as a continuous series of numbers BBBBIIII Block ITEM Number Data 000000 Ife Tag Name Field Terminal Sequence Control Function Block Group M Block ITEM M ITEM User Link Table Entry Cancel 227 Setting Options Section 3 12 Enable OPC Server Direct Access Tag When this option is selected ITEMs other than for HMI data will be added to the tag file as OPC server direct access tags when outputting the tag file This ap plies to Ramp Program Block Model 155 Segment Program Block Model 156 and Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 only This option is selected when the HMI area is not used and all of the ITEMs for these blocks are to be monitored and set directly from the SYSMAC OPC Server Function Blocks That Can Be Directly Accessed from the OPC Server e Ramp Program Block Model 155 e Segment Program Block Model 156 e Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 3 12 3 Communication Tab Page Configure Project Information General Communication CSV Setting Function Black Diagram Step Le Retry times 3 Cancel Retry times This option sets the number of retries for communications with the Loop Control ler The default is 3 retries Increase this number if there are communications timeouts Time out value This option sets the timeout time for communications with the Loop Controller The default is 5 000 ms If a heavy c
222. black operation command COMMENT FID Comment MODEL O11 Model Basic PID ERR 0 Execution error display CAT TMEX System common Operation cycle D common SLAM 21000 Uperation order Py 000 000 PY source designation PV 0 00 P input SP 115 00 Highhigh alarm setting SP 100 00 High alarm setting SP 0 00 Low alarm setting LL SP 15 00 Lowrlow alarm setting SP 1 00 Hysteresis setting HH High high alarm output H High alarm output L Low alarm output LL alarm output AF Alarm stop switch PVE AD PY error source designation PY AB PY execution erar indication ALM LIM Alarrn lirit D A 4 6 2 Downloading Individual ITEM Data Settings It is also possible to change a single ITEM s data and download that ITEM s data to the Loop Controller but only operation data Type O in the ITEM List can be downloaded this way 1 2 3 1 Double click the ITEM that you want to change A setting dialog box like the one in the following diagram will be displayed x Dataname Proportional band Datarange Coefficient Data 0 1 999 9 Data description Data Next Transfer to LC Cancel 2 Change the data to the desired value and click the Transfer to LC Button The changed value will be displayed in the ITEM List 4 6 3 Block Diagram Check This section provides information on how to check the block diagrams connect ing the function blocks of a Loop Contr
223. ble to set FinsGateway as the communications driver and start the CX Process Tool Likewise if CX Server has not been installed it will not be possible to set CX Server as the communications driver and start the CX Process Tool 2 The CX Process Tool cannot use FinsGateway version 1 as the commu nications driver Use FinsGateway version 3 or later 3 If any other Support Software e g the CX Programmer CX Protocol or CX Motion is connected over the CX Server or an application using the dedicated serial driver is connected the same COM port cannot be initial ized for online Host Link serial communications for the CX Process Tool Disconnect the other Support Software or the application using the dedi cated serial driver offline and then go online with the CX Process While the CX Process Tool is connected online no other Support Software can communicate via the CX Server 4 The CX Process Tool and FinsGateway Version 1 cannot be installed on the same computer 5 The CX Process Tool runs on Windows NT 4 0 with Service Pack 6a or higher 6 FinsGateway version 3 and FinsGateway 2003 Embedded are bundled to gether with the CX Process Tool If the FinsGateway Runtime version 3 has been already installed there is no need to install the FinsGateway em bedded version The CX Server is a communications driver shared by the following OMRON Tools e CX Programmer e CX Protocol e CX Motion The CX Server has the following a
224. blocks can be used in user defined blocks Restrictions in the Up to 96 user defined function blocks can be created in each function block file Number of User defined Blocks Displaying User defined User defined function blocks are displayed as one function block with the input Function Blocks and output names assigned in the input and output interfaces User defined Block A Actual display of User defined Block A This user defined block consists of inputs a and b and output c 174 Creating User defined Blocks Section 3 6 User defined Blocks User defined blocks can be inserted into a function block diagram for use with Pasted with Other other function blocks Function Blocks User defined Block A Inserting User defined Block A 3 6 3 Creating User defined Blocks on the CX Process Tool The following example shows how to create a user defined block In this exam ple a user defined block is created for feedforward control shown in dotted lines in the following diagram This portion will be created as a user defined block Analog Input Advanced PID Block Model 012 Addr 001 Analog Output MV MV com pensation Lead Delay Block Model 147 Addr 100 1 2 3 1 Create a new block diagram by selecting the LCU or LCB element right clicking and selecting Insert Alternately select an existing block diagram 2 Input the name of the user defined block as the
225. can be done using either of the following two procedures e Searching for Overlapping Addresses One at a Time Click the 4 Find Overlapping Icon in the Memory Map Display The first address being used more than once will be displayed Each time the icon is clicked the next overlapping address will be displayed e Searching for All Overlapping Addresses at Once Next click the E Find Overlapping whole area Icon The following Search Result Window will be displayed showing all of the addresses in I O memory being used more than once Overlap Displays the number of times the address has been used Type Displays the type code UL User Link Table HS HMI Send Area HR HMI Receive Area FT Field Terminal Overlapping Address Displays the address that is being used more than once by the Loop Controller Search Result Overlap Overlapped Address posision Tag Name ITEM 3 UL ww300 00 3 UL 1300 01 3 UL 300 0 Note To display the Search Result Window treating Overlap Recv Area overlap in data read from CPU Unit as Overlap including overlap in data written to CPU Unit click the Ey Checking for Overlapping of Reading attribute Icon and then click the E Icon 215 Printing Section 3 11 3 11 Printing Function blocks block diagrams ladder diagrams the cross references of step ladder programs or monitor tag lists can be printed
226. can change MV and SP values Select AUTO or MAN to switch MV Adjustment Area The MV Adjustment Area is displayed for the following function blocks Details Basic PID 011 Advanced PID 012 Batch Flowrate Capture 014 Indication and Operation 032 and Ratio Setting 033 MV open direction open direction MV open direction enabled 096 enabled 100 disabled AUTO or AUTO or Manual remote CAS Manual remote CAS No Manual Pointer Output limit ML Output limit MH Make Manual Pointer and MV open direction settings when registering the Con trol Screen Make output limit ML MH settings using the Tuning Screen 2 position ON OFF 001 3 position ON OFF 002 AUTO or remote CAS AUTO or MAN AUTO or remote CAS AUTO or MAN 4 m Output operation switches Output operation switches 299 Tuning Section 4 7 Face Plate Control Examples HH LL Low Low Alarm 300 SP Change Button Indication and Setting 031 Tag name 18011 Ej IndicationSet MAN NR NRO PV numerical ame value display pe SP numerical High High Alarm value display H High Alarm SP position display Up Down Buttons to change SP PV bar display L Low Alarm l Switch to Local Button PV Bar Display This bar shows the PV range lower limit to upper limit Green Status normal Red PV Alarm either HH H L LL occurred Blue Alarm OFF
227. cedure is basically the same as when added OPC server direct access tags to SCADA tag files The following flowchart shows all the operations involved in using RS View32 to specify an ITEM in the Loop Controller 1 HMI interface tags Control operation blocks 2 User link table tags External Controller Terminal Block tags Set System Common Block HMI interface re 1 Register user link table tags Settings Edit User Link Table lated ITEMS a a When edited by Excel after automatic registration 1 To register a function block select the b When set individually with CSV Tags Dialog Box 1 Set CSV tags Select the control block or operation 2 Select the option to output CSV tag information when reg istering the data link table CSV Tag Auto Register option block and then Settings Tag Setting CSV Tag 2 When compiling CSV tag files check Add User Link Table Informa tion Only when al 2 When the node function block is ready edited saved File Save the CSV tag setting file csv is automatically compiled 3 Using program such as Excel edit tag names scaling etc the CSV tag setting file csv in the Projects folder 4 Open the Projects folder File Open Compile RS View 32 tag file Execution Create Tag File RS View Tag Import RS View tag files to SYSMAC OPC Server version 2 4 or higher Import the RS View32 tag files to t
228. ck Diagram 1 1 Devices 1 88 CS1G H CPLI42 00 LCBOS v3 0 225 H 01 System 1 02 Field Terminal 03 Sequence Control 04 Block Diagram 1 8 OS Block Diagram 2 280 06 Block Diagram 3 ILCBOS 3 0 Net 0 Node 0 e To zoom out from the display select Zoom Out from the Scale Menu or press the Alt Right Cursor Keys e To zoom in from the display select Zoom In from the Scale Menu or press the Alt Left Cursor Keys 2 Setting the Block Diagram Width Select File Print Block Diagram The following Drawing Area Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Drawing area setting X C Ad Portrait 5xB C Landscape 9 5 C Portrait 7x8 Mote Figures in parentheses are standards of the number in which Function Black can be placed Select the drawing area and click the OK Button e Up to 64 function blocks can be used in one block diagram The figures in parentheses in the dialog box are rough standards taking visibility into ac count 3 Changing the Grid Width Select Change Mode Grid Mode or click the block diagram and select Display Mode Grid Mode Wide Middle Narrow and Grid OFF can be selected from the submenu Select the appropriate width The function block and connected lines will move along the grid The default setting is Middle 112 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 4 Select i e highlight the b
229. ck version System Table 1 0 sec HMI TM HMI IF TOOL VR lt Operation data gt RD_STOP SD_STOP BACKUP BCNT_EN Reception disable switch Send disable switch Backup start cmnd while running Force ITEM104 disabled 2 Input the default System Common Block settings The following example shows how to set the System Common Operation Cycle for example Double click the ITEM 004 line The following dialog box will appear BLKOOO ITEMOO4 x Data Name System common operation cycle Data Range Integer Data 1 5 Data Description sec 1 0 1 2 0 2 3 0 5 4 1 5 2 r General data Data data Block ITEM Number t C Name Field Terminal Sequence Control T lock 3 PO KATEM User Link Table En __ __ Next cancel 3 Input the data value and click OK To set the next ITEM click Next To set the previous ITEM click Back 107 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 3 1 6 Registering Function Blocks Use the following procedure to register a function block 1 2 3 1 With a block diagram displayed left click the function block category dis played in the function block registration bar The cursor will be changed into a cross 2 Move the cursor to the registration position on the block diagram and left click CX Process Tool Equipment Node00 E Bl File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode
230. cks registered under the folders are displayed Output Window The name of the operation being executed project information and the execution results are displayed 70 9 1 001 01 3 00 LCBOS v3 0 225 01 System 02 Field Terminal 03 Sequence Control k Diaar 001 Basic PID 002 Basic PID 003 Fuzzy Logic 004 Square Root 23 05 Block Diagram 2 Lj 06 Block Diagram 3 901 EHI Al 8 point 0003 ee eee Y1 oe eee a 3 oe ewe t 2 3 e as a 001 aer Basic PID pues MEE IE E 002 Basic PID Comparison result Current project 00 LCBOS 3 07 gt Connecte No Result Source Destination 1 LCU No 00 The value of block address 001 item 012 is different 50 00 1 00 2 LCU No 00 The value of block address 001 item 024 is different 1 0 3 LCU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 009 is different 90 00 100 00 4 Finished verification 2 _ Ready LCBOS V3 0 Net 1 Node 1 uM 2 Contents Window Contents of the various windows are displayed such function block ITEMs block diagrams and step ladder programs blocks selected in the Project Workspace area are displayed Overview of User Int
231. control Control action Proportional band Integral time 5 5 5 5 o 5 5 5 o 5 5 5 o o o o 5 5 5 o 251 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 The classification can be checked using the following details in the Function Block Reference Manual S Initial settings set with CX Process Tool O Operation data set with either CX Process Tool or CX Process Monitor ITEM type Data nf length i bytes 5 ITEM Step Pro Pro write ladder cess cess pro Tool Monitor block gram GENE Parameter 001 AW _ peo o ewe po 2 Special lej 2_ Parameter ood _ j Measurement PV easurement PV Analog in 1006 D Note The function block file ist can be downloaded to and uploaded from the Loop Controller and compared with other files regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit 4 3 1 Downloading Transfer to LC Specified LCU LCB elements LCB01 03 05 00 LC001 to LC003 or function blocks can be transferred to the Loop Controller CX Process Tool All data i e LCU LCB element in function block file ist or function block and mnemonic data Initial setting ata Operation data Ti Download RAM in Loop Controller l Backup Flash memory in Loop Controller
232. ct Operation and Clear All from the Execution Menu The following dialog box will appear 01 1 001 1 1 Clear all registered function blocks Cancel 2 Click the OK Button A confirmation dialog box will appear 3 Click the OK Button Note When CX Server is being used and a communications timeout error occurs dur ing the Clear All operation select Change PLC from the Settings menu click the Network tab and set the response timeout time to 10 s or longer 313 Controlling the CPU Unit Section 4 11 4 11 Controlling the CPU Unit If the communications driver is set to the CX Server and CX Process Tool ver sion 3 0 or higher is used the operations described in this section can be per formed to control the CPU Unit These operations enable the CPU Unit to be ini tialized i e tables created or PLC Setup set and the operating mode of the CPU Unit to be changed without the CX Programmer The following operations are possible e Creating the I O tables e Setting the PLC Setup e Changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit 4 11 1 Creating the I O Tables 1 2 3 1 Select PLC Info Create I O Table from the Settings Menu The PLC IO Table Dialog Box will be displayed rj PLC 10 Table Jof x File Options Help CS1G H CPU42 H 0000 Main Rack 9 4 0000 Rack 01 0000 Rack 02 2 To create the tables based on information on actually mounted Units online and selec
233. ct folder relative files will be read Select Open from File Menu To save all the data in Project Workspace in a different project folder select Save As from the File Menu To import a function block file ist into the Project Workspace add a function block file Select Add IST File from File Menu 99 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 3 1 2 Starting the CX Process Tool Use one of the following methods to start the CX Process Tool e Starting from the Windows Start Menu e Starting from the CX Programmer I O tables This method can be used when the CX Process Tool has been installed from CX One Starting the CX Process Tool from the Start Menu 1 2 3 1 Select OMRON CX One CX Process Tool CX Process Tool from the Windows Start Menu 2 Select the communications driver that will be used FinsGateway or CX Server and click the OK button t x Pracess Tool Select communication driwer from below Communication driver E FinsGateway C CXx Server Never show this message Cancel Note 1 For details on selecting the communications driver refer to 1 6 2 Selecting the Communications Driver 2 If the CX Process Tool has been installed from CX One CX Server will be automatically set as the communications driver by default To change the communications driver to FinsGateway first start the CX Process Tool with the CX Server as the communications driver Then select Select Co
234. ction applicable only when CX Process Tool block file LCU LCB CX Server is used as element function the communications block group or driver function block file is selected Change LC Type Converts the selected Loop Controller type When an LCB number model and unit version when inserting an element is selected LCU LCB element Window Overlaps and displays windows Tile Horizontally Displays windows side by side Arrange Icons Aligns icons Close Closes all open windows Block Closes all open block diagram windows Diagram Ladder Closes all open ladder diagram windows en Closes all open sequence table windows M Table Closes all open cross reference windows Connec Closes all open connection map windows tion Map User Link Closes all open user link table windows Table Close All Closes all open windows Displays up to the nine windows most recently used ERU 79 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Submenu Description Conditions for Command selection Help Contents Displays PDF file Web Accesses the OMRON PLC website browser plug in is required Function Block Displays reference help for the selected block type Reference About CX Process Displays the version of the CX Process Tool Online registration Registers user online Pop up Menus Menus Displayed by Clicking Right Button Pop up menu Description Conditions for selection command Tag Same a
235. ction 1 8 Uploading function block data A Activate the folder of the function block file and select the Transferring from LC element default 1 1 1 Select Transfer from LC New or Transfer from LC Previous from the Execution Menu Click the OK Button or Start Button Check and click the OK Button Click the Start Button or OK Button Comparing With another Activate and select the folder of the function block file function block file function block file Select Compare from the Execution Menu Select the function block file and select the level Select Compare With function Activate the folder of the function block file and select the block data in a LCU LCB element default 1 1 1 or function block Loop Controller oper em IT op Select Compare from the Execution Menu Select the function block file and select the level Select Compare Starting a Loop Controller A Activate the folder of the function block file and select the element default LCO01 1 Select Operation Run Stop Command from the Execute Menu Select HOT START or COLD START Select Execute Checking system Load rate check A Activate the folder of the function block file and select the operation of Loop element default 1 1 1 Controller with execution Select Operation Monitor Run Status from the Execute error Menu Wireless Debug Select t
236. ction blocks for one Loop block address allocations Controller analog accumulator signal software connections and initial settings of each function block Operation data O Operation data for each function block The contents of the function block file ist are used to compare download data and upload data Initial settings S operation data or initial settings and op eration data together can be set in the function block file 1 The function block file does not include mnemonic data for Step Ladder Pro gram Blocks The mnemonic data is stored in the mnemonics ladder dia gram information file Refer to Mnemonics Ladder Diagram Information File mtld Created by System below 2 Function block files ist created for the CX Process Tool can be imported to the Project Workspace data by selecting Add Function Block File from the File Menu The block diagram information file consists of graphic data that shows the soft ware connections The system will automatically store this file with the function block file ist in the same folder whenever a block diagram is edited The user does not normally need to access the block diagram information file directly 1 When backing up or changing the storage location of this file the file must be backed up or moved together with the node function block files because these files must always be in the same folder The block diagram information files are named as shown below
237. cycle 004 Lead Delay 5 Set the interfaces Setting the Input Interface Connect the analog inputs to be input to the user defined function block to the input interface block In this example the PV input for the Advanced PID Block Model 012 block is connected to the right of the input interface block 176 Creating User defined Blocks Section 3 6 When the connection is made the following Input Output Setting Dialog Box will be displayed OX Process Tool Equipment 01 File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate Validate Action Window Help 7 9 mlm Node01 LCBO5 Feedforward inl x Equipment a NodeO1 001 01 71 0288 00 LCBOS 225 01 System Input 004 Output 53 02 Field Terminal Lead Delay 28 03 Sequence Control Cycle System common operation cycle 3 04 Block Diagram 1 S lt T 001 Basic PID Input Output Setting 002 Basic PID 003 Square Root Function Block 005 Advanced PID 005 1 05 Block Di 2 06 suem Sand 3 ITEM 006 PY source designation S 07 Feed forward T 004 Lead Delay 005 Advanced PID Doo Input some text for the comment e g PV In the same way connect another spot on the right side of th
238. d connection data included in function block data to be uploaded from the Loop Controller Support for SYSMAC OPC Server The scaling functions from SYSMAC OPC version 2 6 scaling functions Server version 2 6 have been expanded The expanded scaling information for CSV tags can be exported to the SYSMAC OPC Server version 2 6 Starting the NS Faceplate Auto Builder The Faceplate Auto Builder for NS can be executed in the sequence of operations when compiling CSV tags from the CX Process Tool Using this method the folder for the created CSV tag file will be automatically specified in the parameter setting screen that is displayed when the Faceplate Auto Builder for NS starts 21 Version Improvements Sectio 1 4 1 4 9 Version 4 1 The improvements made from version 4 0 to version 4 1 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Installation method CX Process Tool could CX Process Tool can be installed from the CX One FA be installed as a single Integrated Tool Package as one function entity only If the CX Process Tool is installed from the CX One a dialog box to select the communications driver will not be displayed when the CX Process is started and the CX Server will be used automatically as the communications driver Startup method From the Start Menu Startup can be performed by right clicking on any of the only following Loop Controllers under the I O Table Window of CX Programmer that was install
239. d Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button All the data in the LCU LCB element will start printing Printing All Data Function Blocks Block Diagrams Ladder Diagrams Cross References and Monitor Tag Lists for a Node 3 LCU Elements and 1 Element 1 2 3 1 Select the active node block function block files from the Project Workspace and then select Print and All from the File Menu 2 You can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button All data in active function block file will start printing 3 11 9 Printing ITEM Lists Printing an Active i e Currently Open ITEM List 12 9 1 Display the ITEM list 2 Right click the ITEM List Window and then select Print ITEM List from the pop up menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing 3 11 10 Printing Sequence Tables Printing an Open Sequence Table 1 2 3 1 Display the sequence table 2 Right click on the sequence table and select Print General or Print Sepa rated from the pop up menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed e he entire sequence table will be printed if Print General is selected e f the sequence table has been expanded the expanded portion will be printed separately if Print Separated is selected 222 Printin
240. d Terminal 901 AI 4 poiny 0041 902 AO 4 poht DA041 5 03 Sequence Cohtrol H E 04 Block DiaerAm 1 59 05 Block Diagfam 2 28 06 Block Diagram 3 Feed forward I 005 Advanced PID 004 Lead Delay Output 901 022 v1 OU ga ay 005 Advanced PID Note Only upward compatibility is ensured for exported user defined block files Example e User defined blocks created using LCBL JL Ver 3 0 cannot be imported to projects using LCBL 1L 2 0 e User defined blocks created using LCBLIL Ver 1 5 can be imported to projects using LCB 1L Ver 179 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 3 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions This section provides information on the creating a step ladder program block model 301 Either a ladder diagram or mnemonics can be selected to create the step ladder program If the CX Process Tool s version is 2 50 or higher and ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag is set to the program will be assembled automatically ladder diagram to mnemonic conversion when it is downloaded and disassembled automatically mnemonic to ladder diagram conversion when it is uploaded If ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag of a step ladder program bl
241. d according to the start mode for System Common block ITEM 018 e Execute the Operation Command from the Menu Layout information for the block diagram is not downloaded when an individual function block is downloaded Always download the entire LCU LCB element when layout information has changed It is also possible to download just the individual ITEM data operation data only that was set from a function block s ITEM List It is also possible to download just the individual ITEM data operation data only that was set from a function block s ITEM List The ITEM s setting can be downloaded from the Setting ITEM List a or Monitor ITEM List b as described below Only operation data Type O in the ITEM List can be downloaded a Downloading from the Setting ITEM List e Double click the desired ITEM in the Setting ITEM List e Input the desired value and click the Transfer to LC Button Note this case the displayed value will be the computer s offline value and not the value in the Loop Controller b Downloading from the Monitor ITEM List e Select Monitor ITEM List from the Execute menu or pop up menu e Input the desired value and click the Transfer to LC Button Note In this case the displayed value will be the value in the Loop Control ler Transferring Block Diagram Data This function can be performed if LCBI J Ver 2 0 or earlier is used Only the layout data for the function blocks in the block diagram is trans
242. d for timeout detection The present timer values can be confirmed by confirming operation of the step ladder The present value and set value are displayed under the TIM command in the Vali date Action Window This is the timer setting range O to 9999 sec for moving between steps It has no input conditions STEP TIMER is placed in the same line as the STEP command Operation is started when program execution moves to the line containing the STEP com mand When the time set by STEP TIMER is reached the program execution moves to the next step Note Input condition commands are given top priority This is the timer setting range O to 9999 sec for monitoring steps It has no input conditions ALARM TIMER is placed in the same line as the STEP command Operation is started when program execution moves to the line containing the STEP com mand When the time set by ALARM TIMER is reached the Step Timer Completion flag step congestion indicator turns 1 ON At this time the step is held at the current val ues Indicates the end of a program Note The END instruction is automatically placed at the end of program when the Step Ladder Program block is prepared using CX Process Tool It is placed after STEPOO when the program comprises STEPOO only and is placed after the nth STEP where the program ends O Can be used Cannot be used In logic se In step se quence quence Note The
243. d must be input again before uploading data Edit LCB Used to set or change the password of a Loop Controller When an Password connected online The function block data in the Loop element is selected Controller cannot be uploaded unless the password set here is input for Program Protection Input Password Option Used to set options for the Project Workspace i e for the project 76 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Submenu Description Conditions for Command selection Settings PLC Info Create Creates I O tables in the CPU Unit from the CX Process I O Table Tool applica ble only when CX continued Server is used as the com munica tions driv er PLC Set Makes settings in the PLC Setup in the CPU Unit from the up appli CX Process Tool cable only when CX Server is used as the com munica tions driv er Monitor Creates a file for the CX Process Monitor Tag Loop The CX Process Monitor must be installed in advance Control Unit only CSV Tag Creates a CSV tag file based on CSV tag settings and settings in the Send Receive All Blocks blocks Block Model 462 461 RS View Creates a tag file for the RS View Tag Monitor Creates a file for the CX Process Monitor Plus Plus Tag Outputs the HMI memory allocations to a CSV file shows the address in the EM Area allocated to each tag Au tag ITEM Start Starts the Faceplate Auto Builder for
244. d or function block is selected Previous Same as selecting Upload Upload Previous from the Upload Previous When an Execution Menu L element or function block is selected New Same as selecting Upload Upload New from the Upload New When an LCU or Execution Menu LCB element is selected Operation Run Stop Same as selecting Operation and then Run Stop When an LCU LCB element Command Command from the Execution Menu function block group or function Monitor Same as selecting Operation Monitor Run Status lock file is selected Run Status the Execution Menu Clear All Same as selecting Operation Clear All from the Execution Menu Find Block Same as selecting Find Block Number from the When an LCU or LCB element is Number Execution Menu selected Monitor Same as selecting Find Monitor Tags from the When an LCU LCB element is Tag Execution Menu selected CSV Tag Same as selecting Find CSV Tags from the Execution Menu When a Loop Controller node function block file or Project Workspace is selected User Link Finds the tag name for the user link table related to a When a field terminal is selected Table selected field terminal Edit Block Same as selecting Edit Function Block ITEMs from the When a function block is selected ITEMs Settings Menu Block Same as selecting Edit Block Diagram from the When a block diagram is selected Diagram Settings Menu Ladder Same as selecting Edit Ladder
245. d the current execution condition Reverses the status of the contact and takes a logical AND with the current execution condi tion Takes a logical OR of the status of the contact and the current execution condition OR NOT Reverses the status of the contact and takes a logical OR with the current execution condition Head source block ad dress ITEM number 000000 fixed Takes a logical AND between circuit blocks LOAD OR LOAD 000000 fixed Takes a logical OR between circuit blocks gt EE 40 OUT Write des tination block ad dress ITEM number Write des tination block ad dress ITEM number Outputs the result execution condition of log ical processing 0 OFF at condition O OFF and 1 ON at condition 1 ON OUT NOT Outputs the result execution condition of log ical processing 1 ON at condition 0 OFF and OFF at condition 1 ON Lal OUT NOT 191 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 Command Operand tination block ad dress ITEM number RESET Write des REET tination block ad dress ITEM number DIFU T DIFU Write des tination block ad dress ITEM SET Write des number Description O Can be used Cannot be used In logic se In step se quence quence SET turns the operand bit 1 ON when the execution condition is 1 ON and does not affect the status of the operand bi
246. ded correctly In this case the com parison is set to both initial setting data and operation data 1 2 3 1 Select one of the following item and select Compare from the Execute Menu e Comparison of a single LCU LCB element LCU LCB element LCBO1 LCBO03 5 LCBO5D LC001 1 to LC001 3 e Comparison of a single function block Function block e Comparison of a step ladder program Sequence control folder The following dialog box will appear Compare Compare T arget C LCOUDT LCB 001 01 225 Compare level nitial setting data 5 Operation data 0 C Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 Execute Cancel 2 Select LC001 from the File and Block to Compare Field provided that online connections are possible 3 Select the level 261 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 4 Click the Execute Button The comparison of the file and data will start If they match a message will be displayed as shown below to indicate that the comparison has been completed normally Comparison result Current project 00 LOBOS 3 0 225 2222 Connected LC Rezult Source Destination 1 Finished verification Data is the same gt If they do not match the details of the differences between them will appear Comparison result Current project 00 LOBOS 53 0 225 2222 Connected LC Ma Result Source Destination 1 LOU The value of block
247. der Diagram Edit Mode This function allows user set names to be displayed and printed useful for schematic diagrams next to commands in function blocks or step ladder programs Copy function block Not supported Function block units can be copied cut pasted in the Project Workspace Automatic assembly and Not supported Step ladder programs Block Model 301 can be automatically disassembly of step assembled converted from ladder diagram to mnemonic code ladder programs when they are downloaded and automatically disassembled converted from mnemonic code to ladder diagram when they are uploaded The Mnemonic Flag specifies whether a program can be converted to ladder diagram format 18 Version Improvements Sectio 1 4 1 4 5 Version 3 00 Note The improvements made from version 2 50 to version 3 00 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Wem Ver280 Ver 3 00 Applicable Units Boards Loop Control Units Loop Control Units and Loop Control Boards New functions for Loop Control Boards User link tables Not supported Supported along with the following Automatic registration of Field Terminals to user link tables Copying and pasting software links for user link table function blocks Outputting user link table tags in CSV format attached to HMI data tags Importing local symbol tables from the CX Programmer Sequence tables Block Not supported Supported Operation can also be va
248. dvantages e f the CX Server is being used one of the three Tools listed above can be started at the same time as the CX Process Tool and simultaneous online con nections can be established with the same PLC through the same COM port on Relationship with CX Process Monitor Section 1 2 Note Note the personal computer The simultaneous online connections make it unnec essary to switch between communications drivers or switch the Tools between online offline operation e f the CX Server is being used Peripheral Bus mode can be used as a serial communications mode The Peripheral Bus mode provides even faster com munications than Host Link mode The CX Process Monitor software is not compatible with the CX Server it is compatible with the FinsGateway only The following diagram shows the soft ware configuration CX Process Tool CX Programmer CX Protocol CX Motion etc Software CX Server FinsGateway NSB Driver See note Hardware RS 232C port Controller Link Ethernet The CX Server can be connected to other networks such as Controller Link and Ethernet through the FinsGateway NSB driver 1 2 Relationship with CX Process Monitor 1 2 1 Overview of the CX Process Monitor and CX Process Monitor Plus Note The CX Process Monitor is used to monitor function blocks in Loop Controllers The CX Process Monitor does not support the LCBI 1 15 The CX
249. dy exist on the Loop Control Unit and are uploaded to CX Process Tool only the following function blocks are not uploaded When a new upload is performed these blocks become empty ES100X Controller Terminal Block Model 045 4 point Warning Indicator Block Model 110 Arithmetic Operation Block Model 126 Time Se quence Data Statistics Block Model 153 Receive All Blocks Block Model 461 Send All Blocks Block Model 462 Likewise the following functions can be used only when Loop Control Unit CS1W LCO01 Ver 2 00 and onwards and CX Process Tool Ver 2 00 and on wards are used e The following ITEMs can be set on CX Process Tool when versions of Loop Control Unit earlier than Ver 2 00 Ver 1 0L Ver 1 20 or Ver 1 50 and CX Process Tool Ver 2 00 or onwards are used However if the data of these ITEMs is downloaded to the Loop Control Unit when these ITEMs are set on CX Process Tool only those ITEMs are not downloaded Other ITEMs are downloaded successfully e The following ITEMs cannot be set on CX Process Tool when Loop Control Unit Ver 2 00 or onwards and versions of CX Process Tool lower than Ver 2 00 Ver 1 0L Ver 1 20 or Ver 1 50 are used For this reason these ITEMs cannot also be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit If a download in major item units units of Loop Control Unit or a download in function blocks units including initial setting data is performed the respective defaults are set to the
250. e When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xxl xxii PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the CX Process Tool CS CJ series Programmable Controllers PLCs and related devices The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable Control lers You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PLC system Intended Audience o6 Rete ae dea sd aang Edd ea DLE ee awe wa eee iced XX
251. e CX Process Monitor Plus to the range given in the following table Number of digits 5 max including sign and decimal point Numeric range 5000 to 99999 Example with one digit below the decimal point 550 0 to 9999 9 Generate CX Process Generate the CX Process Plus tag file using the following procedure Monitor Plus Tag File 1 2 3 1 Select Execute Create Tag File Monitor Plus Tag The following win dow will be displayed To execute an error check select the option to per form an error check Cow Tag Compile x Compile Gow Tags Gheck errors Add User Link Table information Cancel 139 Using the CX Process Monitor Plus Section 3 3 Download Function Block Data to Loop Controller Compile Monitor Tag Files 140 2 Click the OK Button Compilation of CSV tags and CX Process Monitor Plus tags will begin The following message will be displayed if compilation ends normally Note lf a CX Process Monitor Plus tag file is output while the CX Process Monitor Plus 1 2 3 is running the following dialog box will be displayed The compile result becomes effective after restarting GX Process Monitor Plus if it s running Are you sure ok Even if a CX Process Monitor Plus tag file is output while the CX Process Moni tor Plus is running the tag information will not be updated To update the in formation restart the CX
252. e FT Execution Dia log Box each time that the OK Button is clicked The Undo Button can be clicked to return to the previous PID constant settings The pre vious PID constant settings will be restored if the Undo Button is pressed a second time 3 Fine tuning will be executed according to the settings that were input 4 The PID constants adjusted with fine tuning will be stored automatically and the new values will be displayed at the top of the Tuning Screen The propor tional band integral time and derivative time settings will change Execute fine tuning when the control performance produced by autotuning is not acceptable when autotuning produces instability in the PV or when you cannot allow control to be interrupted Fine tuning improves control by automatically setting PID parameters using the three user settings listed below along with fuzzy logic applied to previous control conditions e Hunting e Overshooting e Responsiveness Either one or two of the user setting can be set to any of five adjustment levels For example to better control hunting and overshooting the Overshoot and Hunting parameters can be set to the desired levels Overshooting control In this example hunting control is set to level 4 and overshooting control is set to 3 Hunting control When the fuzzy logic block 016 is being tuned the display will show the Mem bership Function MF set with ITEMs in the Tuning Screen The Membe
253. e LCB Download Dialog Box display when downloading Loop Controllers 232 Setting Options Section 3 12 3 12 9 Connection Map Tab Page Note The connection map is displayed by selecting Connection Map from the Execute Menu Configure Project Information Step Ladder Sequence Table User Link Table Connection Map 4 Scale 100 Always update the contents of connection Scale This option sets the zoom factor for the connection map This option performs the same function as the Change Scale command on the pop up menu display after right clicking on the connection map Always update the contents of connection map When this option is selected the default the connection map is continuously refreshed When this option is not selected the connection map is not continuously re freshed 233 SECTION 4 Online Operation This section describes online operations for uploading downloading and testing function block data 4 1 Overview ol Online EUnctiolls CU ent eni D med Rhe 236 4 2 Initial Settings for Online Connections 238 4 2 1 Selecting the Communications 238 basa bebe 230 2 2 9 tae ded s 248 4 2 4 Peripheral Bus Toolbus Connections 249
254. e Loop Controller even if the above check finds errors Before downloading a sequence table with errors confirm that the error will not affect normal control operation Sequence tables can be transferred to the Loop Controller even if errors have been detected in them in the error check If transferring a sequence table with an error first make sure that the error will not affect control operations before per forming the transfer An error will occur in the following cases and the transfer will not be made to the LCB e he condition or operation signal is undefined and there is only Y N data e he timer cycle is shorter than the operation cycle of the sequence table e here is no step number specified using THEN and ELSE e here is no step number specified using the STEP command in the refer ent sequence table N is specified for the non holding output pulse output STEP command RUN command STOP command and ITEM writing e The block address of a sequence table is specified in a STEP command HUN command or STOP command within that sequence table e A TBL command is set in a reference table e he block address of a sequence table is specified in a TBL command within that sequence table 205 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 e The block address specified for a TBL command does not exist A warning will be displayed while downloading a sequence table in the following cases Downloading will continue e A input s
255. e SES Fed Ren ee ees 313 A I Controlling the PU Units oi ie ate hee ae SACR debut E bs 314 4 I2 Password 23 o iae bach dci deb ect bet s eek 315 SECTION 5 Troubleshooting 317 318 3 25 a cgo tot ot aed Bat o e o tad op dd de o pata qos et rebas oes 319 xiii TABLE OF CONTENTS Appendices Table of LC Canes onal d bk hs oes E ease hen seeks es 323 B TEEM INOtation in Block Diagrams 3 eo err Po SEE EE nr 325 eut hostium Sika DUE RS dO dia 329 D Sequence lable DeSIen Sheets xao qv Us came Vs aw quis quon e dara 337 Revision EE EE 339 XIV About this Manual This manual describes the installation and operation of the WS02 LCTC1 EV5 CX Process Tool software package and includes the sections described below The CX Process Tool is used to create and test func tion blocks for the CS1W LCO01 Loop Control Unit the CS1W LCBO1 CS1W LCBO5 and CS1W LCBO5 GTC Loop Control Boards the CS1D CPULI J P Process control CPU Units and the CJ1G CPUL and CJ1G CPUL L JP GTC Loop control CPU Units In this manual the WS02 LCTC1 EV5 CX Process Tool software package is generally referred to as sim ply the CX Process Tool Pl
256. e assembly i e conversion from mnemonics to ladder diagrams will automatically be performed when the download is performed Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 Upload New To upload a new function block file create the new function block file by taking the following steps 1 and 2 or insert LCU LCB element data in the existing file and begin with step 3 1 2 3 1 Select New from the File Menu 2 Create a multi node folder 3 Select Insert Insert Node from the Settings Menu and input the LCU LCB element name LCBO1 LCB03 5 LCBOBD LC001 1 to LC001 3 4 Select Network Settings from the Settings Menu to set the network ad dress and node address 5 Select the LCU LCB element Select Transfer from LC New from the Execution Menu The following dialog box will appear x 7 All information of Function Blocks will be lost by transferring from LC Are you sure 6 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will appear wo Load the Function Block information of LCB LCU 00 1 E d Current information will be cleared Do you want to proceed E Cancel Note Here data on the Edit Block Diagram Screen function block information will be lost and the block diagram showing the connections between function blocks will not be displayed To display the block diagram connect the function blocks again after the function block file is uploaded 7 Click the OK Button x
257. e input interface block to the input X1 of the Lead Delay Block Model 147 Input some text for the comment e g DIST Setting the Output Interface Connect the analog outputs to be output from the user defined function block to the output interface block In this example the MV input from the Advanced PID Block Model 012 block is connected to the left of the output interface block A comment such as MV can be input 6 The results is shown below Modell LOBOS Input interface PV and DIST ES Cvcle Svstem commop aperation cycle 004 Lead Dalaw 3 6 4 Inserting User defined Blocks 1 2 3 1 Place the cursor in the block diagram where the user defined block is to be inserted right click and select Register User defined Block Insert User defined Block As shown below the block will be inserted as a single 177 Creating User defined Blocks Section 3 6 block showing the comments set for the input interface and the comment set for the output interface User defined function block NodeOl 5 Block Diagram 2 1 Input interface PV and DIST 2 Register analog input and analog output terminals and connect the user de fined block between them as shown below 8 Node 1 LCBO5 Block Diagram 2 1 Cycle System common operation cycle 901 Al e AD041 Feed_forward Y2 3 4
258. e list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGHAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof XX Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notic
259. e lists before or after compilation 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element default LC001 1 function block file or Proj ect Workspace 2 Select Show Tag List Monitor Tag from the Execution Menu or click the right mouse button and select List Monitor Tag from the pop up window The following Monitor Tag List Dialog Box will be displayed The tag name that has been set for the data exchange function block with the block address for the current Loop Control Unit node address will be displayed Nodeli Monitorl ag List IB XJ Tag Block Type LinkedBlock RH RL DP Unit Comment 16 A 403 1 Black Send Terminal Tagi 0011011 Basic FID 10000 0 kl comment Tag name Linked Block address Block name model name Block model Block address Unit No address Loop Control Unit Node address function block file Network address Serial No 137 Using the CX Process Monitor Plus Section 3 3 3 3 Using the CX Process Monitor Plus The following six steps must be performed on the CX Process Tool to pass tag data to the CX Process Monitor Plus 1 2 3 1 Set the network address node address and unit address NO Register and connect the function blocks that exchange data with the CX Process Monitor Plus 3 Set the CSV tags and the CX Process Monitor Plus tags 4 Generate the CX Process Monitor Plus tag file 5 Download the function block data to
260. e rounded off value with a DP position of 1 be comes 32 1C and a warning is displayed because this value differs from the in put value 3 9 2 Functions for Which Engineering Unit Displays and Settings Are Enabled The following table shows the functions for which engineering unit displays and settings are enabled Functions for Which Engineering Unit Displays and Settings Are Enabled Fumsonname Displays Settings Printing and print previews for function lock TEMs Yes _ Block diagram operation checks Wireless debugging Segment Program 2 and Segment Program 3 ITEM Yes Yes settings 3 9 3 Setting CSV Tags for Function Blocks CSV tags must be set for a function block in order to execute the engineering unit display and settings For details on setting CSV tags refer to 3 4 1 Creating SCADA Software and HS View Tag Files 3 9 4 Setting Projects in Engineering Unit Mode Select View Engineering Unit Mode Display from the menu or click the Icon in the toolbar To clear the Engineering Unit Mode select the command again or click the icon again The default setting is for the Engineering Unit Mode to be enabled Setting the Engineering Unit Mode enables engineering unit displays and settings for all function blocks registered for the project 208 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Units Section 3 9 Note The enable disable status for the Engineering Unit Mode is held from the pre vious t
261. e sent wrapped in a Host Link header and terminator Before operating the Fins Gateway Version 3 Serial Unit select SYSWAY CV as the protocol Set the unit numbers of the Loop Control Units with the thumbwheel switches on the front panels Loop Control Units only Set the I O tables Make switch settings on the Controller Link Support Board and mount the Controller Link Support Board to the personal computer Connect the cable between the Controller Link Support Board and Control ler Link Unit Note Refer to the Controller Link Support Board Operation Manual for de tails Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 Initial Settings in CX Process Tool 1 2 3 Note Setting Unit Addresses Loop Control Units Only 1 2 3 Note Starting Communications Service Ethernet Initial Settings 1 2 3 Setting Network and Node Addresses Select the active function block file in the Project Workspace and select Net work Settings from the Settings Menu The following dialog box will appear Setup network address Metwork address Mode address Unit address 16 313 Cancel 1 Set the network address to between 000 and 127 in the Network Address Field and set the node address to between 1 and 32 in the Node Address Field 2 Click the OK Button Note Set the network address to O if the local network is connected to the Controller Link If Control
262. ease read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the CX Process Tool Please read the following manuals carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before setting up or using an application for a Loop Control Unit Board XV WSO2 LCTC1 EV5 CX Process Tool I C EV 2 ALL L D EV2 CX One Ver 2 0 FA Integrated Tool Package WSO2 LCTC1 E CX Process Monitor WSO2 LCMC1 E CX Process Monitor Plus CS1W LCO001 Loop Control Unit CS1W LCBO01 05 Loop Control Boards CS1D CPULILIP Process control CPU Units and CJ1G CPUrI IL P Loop control CPU Units CS1W LCO001 Loop Control Unit CS1W LCBO01 05 Loop Control Boards CS1D CPULILIP Process control CPU Units and CJ1G CPUrI IL P Loop control CPU Units CS1W LCB05 GTC Loop Control Board with Gradient Temperature Controller CJ1G CPU45P GTC Loop control CPU Unit with Gradient Temperature Controller CX Process Tool Operation Manual CXONE ALL IL JC EV 2 ALL L D EV2 CX One Ver 2 0 FA Integrated Tool Package Setup Manual CX Process Monitor Operation Manual CX Process Monitor Plus Operation Manual Loop Control Unit Operation Manual Loop Control Board Operation Manual Loop Control Unit Function Block Reference Manual Loop Control Board Function Block Reference Manual Loop Control Board with Gradient Temperature Controlle
263. ect the function block file from the File and Block to Compare Field 262 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 Click the button on the right of the function block file The following Open Dialog Box will appear 2 xl Look in 3 EquipmentC Ex EJ File name Files of type Function black file ist Cancel 2 3 Select the file to be compared x Compare Target C LCODT LEB 001 01 225 CAEquipmentC ode0 ist Ig Compare level Initial setting data C Operation data 07 C Initial setting data Operation data 5 07 Execute Cancel 4 Select the level 5 Click the Execute Button The results will be displayed in the Output Win dow If the data match a message will be displayed to indicate that the com parison was completed normally If they do not match the details of the dif ferences will be displayed as shown below Comparison result Current project 00 5 v3 0 225 lt Function Block file C XEdquipmentCWodeO1 ist Mo Result Source Destination 1 LEU No 00 The value of block address 001 item 009 is different 50 00 100 00 2 LCU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 008 is different 115 00 90 00 3 LCU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 009 is different 30 00 100 00 4 LEU No 00 The value of block address 002 item 039 is different 10 00 5 00 5 LEU No 00 The value of block addre
264. ed Sequence Table Edit Disabled will be displayed in red To edit the sequence table right click on it and select Edit Mode Enabled 196 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 3 8 2 Names of Sequence Table Elements Signal Signal comment Execute form Rules a Sequence Table CFT z Step number IN 000 007 CPU Uinit fatal error IN 000 007 CPU Uinit fatal error 000 031 lt 000 031 IN 001 035 Conditions 4 QUT H 001 017 QUT H 002 086 OUT H 002 035 Actions 4 Next step designation 7 3 8 3 Setting Execution Forms Right click and select Execute Form and then Every Cycle Start by S1 Start Only First Cycle or Not Execute from the pop up menu Execute Form Start m 5 start Only First Cycle Execute View Option k Edit Find Sequence Table Black 3 8 4 Zooming In and Out of a Sequence Table Right click and select Scale and then 100 200 50 Zoom In or Zoom Out from the pop up menu 100 Check Errors 2L Undo Sannectiarn Zoom In Print Zoom Out 197 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 3 8 5 Editing Sequence Tables 1 2 3 198 1 Right click on the sequence table in the right side of the window and select Edit Mode Enabled The sequence table will be changed to Edit Mode Sequence Table will be displayed in black 01 LCB05 03 701 Sequence Table OF
265. ed User de Create Sets the selected block diagram as a user defined block When a block fined The input interface and output interface are automatically diagram is selected Blocks pasted Release Returns the selected user defined block to normal block When a diagram The input interface and output interface are user defined automatically deleted function block group is selected Import Reads a user defined block from a file ucb and inserts it When an LCU or as a block diagram in the selected LCU or LCB element LCB element is selected Export Writes the selected user defined block to a file ucb When block diagram is selected Setting Block Automatically sets the order of execution of the function When an LCU or Operating Order blocks LCB element is selected Import Imports the symbol information from the current When the CX Programmer CX Programmer project to a user link table CX Programmer is Symbols running Program Input When an LCB Protection Password element is selected Used to input a password If the same password as was used for Program Protection Edit LCB Password is input the function block data in the Loop Controller can be uploaded Clears the password that was entered with Program When an LCB Password Protection Input Password element is selected Note Clear Password does not delete the password that is set i e it merely restores protection so that the pass wor
266. ed from the CX One and selecting Start Special Application e CS1W LCBO1 Loop Control Board e CS1W LCBO5 Loop Control Board e CS1D LCBOBD Loop Control Board e CS1W LCO01 Loop Control Unit e CJ1W LCBO1 Loop Controller Element built into CPU Unit e CJ1W LCBOS Loop Controller Element built into CPU Unit Note f Start with Settings Inherited is selected CX Server will be used automatically as the communications driver The node s Function Block File will also be automatically created Folder for creating saving projects Fixed location under The user can specify the folder for creating saving data folder in the projects installation folder Select File New from the menu bar and specify the destination in the Browse for Folder Dialog Box 22 Version Improvements Section 1 4 1 4 10 Version 5 0 The improvements made from version 4 1 to version 5 0 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Mem er Ver 50 See nate Support for LCB01 05 and Only Ver 2 0 or earlier The following functions are supported for LCB01 05 and supports for Loop control CPU were supported supports for Loop control CPU Units CJ1G CPUDLP Units CJ1G CPULDLDP Ver 3 0 Ver 3 0 e Switch Instrument Block Model 225 2 point Termi nal Block Model 571 and Al 16 point Terminal Block Model 582 e Switching the adjustment operation direction for Basic PID Block Model 011 and Advanced PID Block Model 01
267. ee e tet tee eee E oe 132 3 2 1 Setting and Compiling Monitor Tags for CX Process Monitor 132 3 2 2 Validate the Monitor Tag List 136 3 9 Using the CX Process Monitor Plus 138 34 SCADA SOMW EE 141 3 4 1 Creating SCADA Software and RS View Tag Files 141 3 4 2 CSV Output Function for HMI Data Allocation 157 5 4 3 Other Interfaces vati HM ses un trc dt CRUS NIS EE eina 157 IS 0 WADI eo dns Bose m AO ERE Orc uoo tel m 159 D rer 159 23 592 Creatina User Link Tables dre Met pede a bees 160 3 5 3 Importing CX Programmer Symbols into a User Link Table 165 329 42 Editing User Link Tables orc RN mis 167 3 6 Creating User defined Blocks 41 hee Er EE eje Sae eee oe oe det 173 9 02 esu haa Non ees 173 3 0 2 How User defined Blocks Work 4e Xe ew de bone sande 173 3 6 3 Creating User defined Blocks on the CX Process Tool 175 3 6 4 Inserting User defined Blocks 177 3 6 5 Exporting User defined Blocks to 178 3 6
268. efer to Unit Version Notation on Products on page viii 3 The project tree will be displayed in the Project Workspace e The node name will be automatically registered as Node the node num ber to 32 See note e The Block Diagram 1 function block group will be selected highlighted in the project tree e The Block Diagram 1 function block group will be opened 104 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Note Up to 32 nodes can be registered 01 to 32 when FinsGateway is used as the communications driver and 00 to 31 when CX Server is used O x CX Process Tool Equipment Node00 File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help se Node00 1 5 v3 0 Block Diagram 1 1 Equipment C51G H CPU42 J 00 LCBOS v3 0 225 L 01 System FBR 1 1 03 Sequence Control agis C 04 Block Diagram 1 amp Control Block 1 05 Block Diagram ield Termina 7 05 Block D 2 Field LA 06 Block Diagram 3 Sequence Control Link Input Read from CPU Memory Output Write to CPU Memory GB Insert User Defined Block LCBOS 3 0 Net 0 Node 0 3 1 4 Types of Function Blocks The function blocks to be used are registered in the Project Workspace and are assigned block numbers Function blocks are g
269. en Status normal Hed PV Alarm either HH H L LL occurred Yellow Deviation Alarm occurred Blue Alarm OFF Light blue Function block calculations stopped Changing the SP Change SP using the SP Change Up Down Buttons First press the SP Button click the value column and then change the SP using the ten key dialog using the mouse or the keyboard The ten key pad is dis played when the input box is selected To enable inputting from the ten key click the System Info Button in the Setup Dialog Box and then change the setting to enable the ten key Changing the MV Change the MP using the MP Change Up Down Buttons First press the MP Button and then enter the change using the ten key dialog box using the mouse or the keyboard Tuning Section 4 7 Remote Local R L Switching When the SP setting local only or remote local both possible for ITEMO24 for Basic PID Advanced PID Indication and Setting Ratio Setting 2 position ON OFF and 3 position ON OFF is 1 remote local both possible CAS is displayed When the CAS Button is red the setting is on remote SP When the CAS Button is blue the setting is on local SP Click the CAS Button to switch the setting Note When the CX Process Monitor is set to Remote SP A M automatically switches to AUTO You cannot set Manual A M Switching When AUTO is lit red the setting is AUTO You can change the SP value When MAN is lit blue the setting is manual You
270. en already installed there is no need to install the Embedded Version Using FinsGateway Version 3 The FinsGateway Update 3 12 software must be installed after the FinsGate way Embedded Version 3 software Installation of FinsGateway Version 3 1 2 3 1 Select one of the following folders from within the Fgwv3 FGW3ee folder Select the folder corresponding to the communications method being used in the PLC CJ Clk C Etn Serial Folder name Select this folder when connecting the PLC and personal computer the CX Process Tool and the CX Process Monitor via Controller Link using a Controller Link Support Board ISA bus installed in an ISA slot in the computer Clk PCI Select this folder when connecting the PLC and personal computer the CX Process Tool and the CX Process Monitor via Controller Link using a Controller Link Support Board installed in the computer s PCI slot Etn Select this folder to connect the personal computer the CX Process Tool and the CX Process Monitor to the PLC via Ethernet Serial Select this folder to connect the personal computer the CX Process Tool and the CX Process Monitor to the PLC via the Host Link The following procedure uses Host Link as an example 58 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 2 Using Windows Explorer or any other appropriate method open Serial in the CD ROM and double click the following icon inside the disk1
271. enables grouping common processing in the reference table Enter the TBL command with the referent block address as the input signal in the condition section and enter Y input as is or N reverse input for the rule Main Table Execution Form Rule No 01 Tabl Sequence Table E 1 Table reference INO o Comment Step No IBL 702 Sequence table referencing Yi Y Y 4 The Y indicates that the evaluation result for the condition rule of the same number in the reference table is input as is References N indicates that the evaluation result for evaluation result in the condition rule of the same number in same rule columns the reference table is reversed before input Therefore in this example rule 1 specifies that evaluation result Y is to be input as is IN 001 013 High upper limit alarm 2 the reference result Is ON met mUe 2 IN 001 013 Upper limit alarm output Y specifies that Y is to be input as is so the 003 IN 001 014 Lower limit alarm output A Y reference result is OFF not met 114 5 55 Evaluation result for 2 ES condition rules in reference table 204 Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 The table above shows the relationship between the main table and the refer ence table The evaluation results for the conditions set in the reference table are treated as the conditi
272. ep columns Select all the data in the column to be inserted and then right click and select Insert Columns from the pop up menu e When multiple columns are selected the selected number of columns can be inserted e Parameter default values are automatically input into inserted columns When new columns are inserted an equivalent number of columns of step data is deleted from the last step col umns The last step in a Segment Program 2 block is step 30 and the last step in a Segment Program 3 block is step 100 Delete Column Used to delete step columns Select all of the data in the column to be deleted and then right click and select Delete Column from the pop up menu To select all of the column data click the step number in the table e t is possible to select and delete multiple columns e When columns are deleted an equivalent number of columns of step data is inserted from the last step column The last step in a Segment Program 2 block is step 30 and the last step in a Segment Program 3 block is step 100 The default values are set for all data in the newly inserted columns Move Column Used to move step columns Select all of the data in the column to be moved and then right click and select Move Column from the pop up menu To select all of the column data click the step number in the table When Move Column is selected the cursor is changed to The column will move when selected in this state e Multiple colum
273. er Copy FBD Copies the entire block diagram function block group The block diagram that was copied can be used as follows If an LCU LCB element is selected the pop up menu is accessed by double clicking and Block Diagram Paste is selected the Block Diagram Dialog Box will be displayed If a function block group number and title are input and then the OK button is clicked the block diagram that was copied will be added as a new function block group Selected Edits the selected annotation Annotation Deletes the selected annotation Bring to Front Displays the selected annotation in front of other annotations Send to Back Displays the selected annotation behind other annotations Send Behind Makes the selected annotation transparent Blocks and Lines Changes the selected annotation s font size Undo Reverses undoes the last operation Validate Starts checking the operation of software connections Action Ends checking the operation of software connections 83 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up Menus Menus Displayed by Clicking Right Button Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Paste Function Block Pastes a function block selected on the When the cursor is in the position Project Workspace Screen to the desired where a function block can be pasted position Delete Function Block Diagram Deletes a function block that was pasted When the cursor is on a function block
274. er of banks is taken to be 70 and 5 bank data blocks are automatically registered e The banks that can be used can be edited on the Edit Window Any banks beyond the maximum number of banks cannot be edited 332 Setting Segment Programs Appendix C Changing the Maximum Number of Banks to Be Used The maximum number of banks to be used can normally be changed The following dialog box will be displayed if the maximum number of banks to be used is changed and there is a change in the registration status of the bank data blocks CX Process Tool E x Number of Bank Data Blocks are increased ar decreased by changing Bank Segment Program 3 have to be transferred to LCB after editing e X bank data If this dialog box is displayed use any of the following methods to resend Segment Program 3 to the Loop Control ler e Transfer the entire project Select an LCU LCB element LCB from the project tree Then right click and select Transfer to LC from the pop up menu or select Execution Transfer to LC Selected from the Main Menu e Transfer the Segment Program 3 block only Select the applicable Segment Program 3 block from the project tree Then right click and select Transfer to LC from the pop up menu or select Execution Transfer to LC Selected from the Main Menu Automatic Registration of Bank Data Blocks Bank data blocks are automatically registered according to the following rules depending on the number of
275. erences oco qos XXe b Ee lire 3 11 6 Printing Monitor Tag Lists Loop Control Units Pununs 5V 39 CES cine sua d un ine methane RD Ra Rie eS oce v dE e a Sates P tet a e deed ud eto HO duce eb et PROS ied de 3 11 9 Pontina TEM actes schnitt ades ent bra ein ene hats Ss THSIO Pumtme Sequence Tables re C HEP RE Cr PER ED ES Se LESE Printing User Link Tables eee S 35H 12 Prin ne Connection Maps xx yere x Ar xa oe Bye 3 19 ODUOBS 4 dato fed wate ae sequ d Rum au dox d d d ac dud d cn d di SPAM HOVERVICWS PC 312 2 General Tab Eee tro 3 12 5 Conmmunicanom TaD Pe a cass Bh Xe rene tpe P PERS RE 3412 4 CSV Tac Setting Tab Pace uve e pex bos LENTES ETT xS 3 12 5 Function Block Diagram Tab Page 3212 60 Sep Ladder lab Pate bee E bes ast re e Sequence Table Tab Pa9e prerod RR ER 24255 User Cmk Tab Page osea XX e xe eO eee ee he did 3 12 9 Connection Map Tab 207 207 208 208 208 209 209 210 210 212 212 213 213 216 216 217 218 220 220 22 222 222 222 222 223 223 224 224 226 228 228 230 23
276. erface Section 2 2 2 2 1 Project Workspace Tree The Project Workspace tree shows the function block files LCU LCB elements function block groups and function blocks Function Block File e Active Red Inactive White Node 01 to 32 Node names cannot be changed Project Workspace e Each node corresponds to one CPU Unit You can create up to three LCU elements and one LCB element under node e Project folder name e You can create up to 32 nodes in one Project Workspace Displays the CPU Unit model for Loop control CPU Units when FinsGateway is used as the commu nications driver FEquipment A d LCU LCB Element avevo arietes vnm emen e Set by default LCBO1 LCBO5 LCBO5D or LC001 1 Names can be changed Field Terminal E arci e Not registered will be displayed if no unit address has been set Receive Terminal from e The network address node address and unit address will be displayed after the unit address Send Terminal to Comp gt is set be PU Unit Terminal i 07 Sequence Control E Function Block Group Classified by the CX Process Tool H 08 SCADA Eg 10 Temporary Memory 5 blue folder 11 Block Diagram 1 e Only block diagrams can be created 5 001 Basic PID e The name will be displayed after the function block group number 002 Basic PID i Block diagram names can be changed ies 100 Squ
277. ess and function block name as shown below 001 Basic PID Function block name Block address 3 1 7 Editing Function Blocks After a function block has been registered it can be edited using the following operations Deleting Function Blocks Select from the project tree the function block that is to be deleted Then either select Settings Delete or right click and select Delete from the pop up menu Copying Function Blocks Select the function block in the Project Workspace Right click and select Copy or Cut or Paste from the pop up menu or select Copy or Cut or Paste from the Settings Menu 110 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Note Function blocks can be copied and pasted only within the same node They cannot be pasted to different LCU LCB elements Changing Block Addresses Select the function block in the Project Workspace Right click and select Block Increment Block Address from the pop up menu or select Block Incre ment Block Address from the Settings Menu The block address for the se lected function block will be incremented Note When a block address is changed the allocated HMI interface addresses for that function block will be changed When using the HMI interface with SCADA or a ladder program change the PLC memory allocations 3 1 8 Editing Block Diagrams Basic Editing Functions Connect function blocks with the analog signals and the accumulator signals while displaying regis
278. ferred to the Loop Controller Block diagram layout data cannot be transferred when function blocks are downloaded Therefore if the diagram layout data has changed se lect Execution Transfer to LC FBD Information and transfer the diagram layout data for function blocks to the Loop Controller Transferring to Memory Card and Internal FROM 256 Hefer to 4 9 Transferring Tag and Comment Data for details Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 4 3 2 Uploading Transfer from LC Note The function block data in the Loop Controller can be transferred to the comput er CX Process Tool All data i e LCU LCB element in function block file ist or function block and mnemonic data Initial setting ata Operation data Loop Controller The following functions are executed in the upload e Function block data i e LCU LCB elements and function groups can be transferred from the RAM in the Loop Controller to the computer e Tag data comment data and block diagram data can be transferred from a Memory Card or internal flash memory to the computer refer to 4 9 Transfer ring Tag and Comment Data for details see note This function is supported for the LCBI J only The following two types of data uploading are available 1 Upload New New Transfer from Loop Controller to Computer A new function block file will be created and the function block data
279. file for SCADA software default taglist csv and the tag file for RS View user set file name csv are used differently as described next Tag Files for NS series PTs 1 2 3 1 Create the tag file for SCADA software using Execute Create Tag File CSV Tag 2 Import the file into the NS Face Plate Auto Builder Note CX Process Tool version 4 0 or higher supports creating tag files for SCADA software compiling CSV tags and starting the NS Face Plate Auto Builder in one operation using Execute Create Tag File Start NSFP 141 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Tag Files for RS View 32 Ex NS Face Plate NS project NS series PT Create the tag file for RS View 32 using Execute Create Tag File RS View Tag Import the tag file directly into RS View 32 using its import utility CX Process Tool Outputs CSV tag file Execute Create Tag File CSV Tag or Execute Create Tag File Start NSFP CSV tag file for SCADA software Taglist csv Automatically generated SYSMAC OPC Server OPC tag settings file sdb binary Manually exported RS View tag file csv Imported using import utility Outputs RS View tag file Execute Create Tag File RS View Tag CSV tag file CX Process for SCADA Tool version software 3 2 or higher Taglist csv 7 Automatically generated SYSMAC OPC Server version 2 4 or higher Autom
280. files with fixed file name without extension Created by user e Job information files sjb Created by the system e Comment files cmt Created by the system e CX Server Settings file cdm Created by the system e CSV tag settings file project name csv Created by system can be edited by user e CSV tag files csv for SCADA software Created by user e Files for Loop Controllers Icb Created by the system e User link table files in CSV format LinkTable csv Created by the user e Sequence table files sbl Created by the system e User defined block files User defined block name ucb Created by the user e Sequence table operation validation and online editing elements timers and count ers set value change and present value display files Offline operation functions e Setting of function block ITEM data including System Common block settings e Software wiring of analog signals e Displaying or printing the arbitrary text tags attached to block connection diagrams and ladder diagrams e Displaying connection maps showing the I O relationships of a function block e Editing user link tables e Creating sequence tables e Description of Step Ladder Program block commands e Setting of tags for CX Process Monitor on block designated as the source in the Send to Computer block contacts and analog signals e Backing up function block data from RAM to flash memory or restoring function block data from flash
281. folder SETUP ERE The following screen will appear FinsGateway SerialUnit Embedded Edition m W elcome to the FinsGateway Setup program This program will install FinsG ateway on your computer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law 1 3 Click the Next Button The User Registration Dialog Box will appear User registration Enter your and Organization Mame OMAON Organization 4 Input the user name and the organization name and click the OK Button The following Confirmation Dialog Box will appear i You entered your name or organization as follows Name OMRON Organization CSC Is it sure 59 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 5 Click the Yes Button The following Choose Destination Location Dialog Box will appear Choose Destination Location Setup will install FinsGateway in the following folder To install ta this folder click Mest Ta install ta a different
282. folder 5 Check the installation folder and click the Next Button Installation of the program will start The following dialog box will appear when the installation has been completed Setup Complete Setup has finished installing FinsGateway Update on your computer No will restart my computer later rou will need reboot your computer before these changes take effect T 6 Click the Finish Button Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 Installing FinsGateway Version 2003 1 2 3 1 Double click setup exe in the Fgw2003 folder in the CD ROM The following screen will appear OMRON FinsGateway Yersion 2003 Embedded Edition InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition The InstallShield Wizard will install OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition on your computer To continue click Next 2 Click the Next Button to display the following screen OMRON FinsGateway Yersion 2003 Embedded Edition InstallShield Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name and the name of the company for which you work User Name Company Name 3 Input the user name and company name and then click the Next Button 63 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 4 Select the communications drivers that are required to run the CX Process Tool OMRON
283. folder click Browse and select another folder can choose nat to install FinsGateway by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder C Program Files OMAON SFingS T Browse Cancel 6 Click the Yes Button The following Select Program Folder Dialog Box will appear 5 elect Program Folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below ou may type new folder name select ane from the existing Folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders Existing Folders Accessories ATI Driver Files lt Back Cancel 7 Check the installation folder and click the Next Button Installation of the program will start The following dialog box will appear when the installation has been completed Setup Complete Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before vou can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer No will restart my computer later Remove all media from drives then click Finish ta complete setup T 8 Click the Finish Button 60 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 Installing FinsGateway Version 3 Update 3 12 1 2 3 1 Using Windows Explorer or any other appropriate method open the Fgwv3 FgwUpdate folder in the CD ROM and double click the following icon Few Updates 2 The following screen will appear FinsG ateway Update Setup
284. fset 155 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Contents Setting range for ITEMs User link table tags OPC Server direct access tags Read write R Read RW Read write W R Read W Write R Read RW Read write W Write Write Read and write are from the viewpoint of the SCADA soft ware If the tag is set for read ing from the CPU Unit to the Loop Controller it will be write data from the SCADA software If the tag is set for writing to the CPU Unit from the Loop Controller it will be read data from the SCADA software Upper limit for range 32000 to 32000 conversion Lower limit for range 32000 to 32000 conversion Expanded scaling 0 Disabled Same as HMI interface tags setting See note 3 1 Enabled Note 1 Data attributes and contact alarm tags are used mainly by the OPC Server 2 The offset is stored when there are both write and read ITEM numbers in the Loop Controller If the CPU Unit s I O memory address in the same for both reading and writing the offset will be O If they are different the value of the write address minus the read address will be stored 3 Expanded scaling data can be exported only when using CX Process Tool version 4 0 or higher LCU LCB Properties and The relationship between LCU LCB properties and CSV tag files for the SYS CSV Tag Files for the MAC OPC Server is shown in the following table SYSMAC OPC Server LCU LCB property CSV tag file column Contact alarm
285. function block connections in the block diagram selected in the Project Workspace area on the left are displayed e n Edit Step Ladder Diagram Mode the ladder diagram for the Step Ladder Program Block selected in the Project Workspace area on the left is displayed e n Edit Sequence Table Mode the sequence table for the Sequence Table Block selected in the Project Workspace area on the left is displayed Folders selected from the Project Workspace area are opened and function blocks selected from the Project Workspace area are all highlighted 69 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Menu bar Toolbar Olele AA mls 88 sk Node01 1 5 3 0 Block Diagram 1 1 Operation via Menu and Toolbars Functions such as basic Windows operations creating function blocks and transfer operations are available in the menu bar and the toolbar Names of project folder and active function block file A f D CX Process Tool Equipment NodeO1 File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate Validate Action Window Help Annotation User set comments j Equipment Project folder 4 Node function block folder LCU LCB Project Workspace Area Hierarchy The folder type of the function 4 blocks is displayed The folder that open here is the one presently selected The block addresses and names of function blo
286. function blocks added from only from the toolbar in the block diagram display menus 24 Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions Section 1 5 1 5 Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions 1 5 1 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 1 20 Note The following function blocks can be used only when Loop Control Unit CS1W LCO01 Ver 1 20 and onwards and CX Process Tool Ver 1 20 and on wards are used e The following function blocks can be registered on CX Process Tool when Loop Control Unit Ver 1 0 and CX Process Tool Ver1 20 or onwards are used If the data of these function blocks is downloaded to the Loop Control Unit by LCU element when these function blocks are registered on CX Pro cess Tool however an error occurs and the download is canceled Other function blocks also are not downloaded The following function blocks cannot be registered on CX Process Tool when Loop Control Unit Ver 1 20 and onwards and CX Process Tool Ver 1 00 are used For this reason these function blocks cannot also be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit If the following function blocks already exist on the Loop Control Unit and are uploaded to CX Process Tool only the following function blocks are not uploaded When a new upload is performed these blocks be come empty 2 position ON OFF Block Model 001 3 position ON OFF Block Model 002 Blended PID Block Model 013 3 input Selector Block M
287. fy the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The ladder diagrams in active function block files will start printing 3 11 5 Printing Cross references Printing an Active i e Currently Open Cross reference 1 2 3 1 Display the cross references With the mnemonic code displayed select the Refresh Button click the OK Button and then select LCU LCB Next select Execution and Cross reference 2 Right click the cross reference window and then select Print Cross Refer ence from the pop up window The Print Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing 220 Printing Section 3 11 Printing Example Contact Address Block Address Mnemonic Row No Command Output Comment 001014 400 3 OR H High alarm output 001019 400 2 LOAD PVE PV error indication 001026 400 4 AND NOT R L Remote Local switch 001086 400 5 QUT A M Auto Manual switch Printing for an LCU LCB Element 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element from the Project Workspace and then select Print and Cross reference from the File Menu 2 One cross reference will be printed per page You can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The cross references in the LCU LCB element will start printing Printing for a Node 3 LCU E
288. g Section 3 11 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing Printing the Sequence Tables for an LCU LCB Element 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element on the Project Workspace and select Print Sequence Control from the File Menu 2 Select All to print all of the sequence tables for the LCU LCB element Se lect Select Area to specify the sequence tables to print and then input the numbers for the first and last sequence tables to print The numbers corre spond to the order that the block diagrams were registered in The starting page can also be specified 3 Click the OK Button The specified sequence tables will be printed Printing Sequence Tables for a Node for up to LCU Elements and 1 LCBI 1 Element 1 2 3 1 Select an active node file in the function block navigator select Print Se quence Control from the File Menu 2 If desired specify the starting page and select the display setting for each page 3 Click the OK Button The specified sequence tables in the active node file will be printed 3 11 11 Printing User Link Tables Printing an Open User Link Table 1 2 3 1 Display the user link table 2 Right click on the user link table and select Print from the pop up menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing Printing User Link Tables for a Node for up to
289. g to a Memory Card When CX Process Tool Ver 4 0 or higher is used block diagram data tags comments and annotations that do not directly affect control can be stored i e transferred in flash memory in the Loop Control Board or on a flash Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit This enables function block data including tags comments annotations and connection data from the Loop Controller to be uploaded recovered The following data can be transferred and recovered using flash memory This data is treated as additional data that does not directly affect control of the Loop Controller Block diagram Block diagram line data annotation data CSV tags Tag names tag comments scaling upper lower limits decimal positions and units User Link Table Tag names and comments Step ladder pL contact comments STEP BR BS JUMP OT TN DU annotation data Sequence table du comment conditions actions element comments timers counters The type of flash memory supported depends on the Loop Control Board ver sion The following are the types of flash memory for the transfer destination which depend on the combination of the Loop Control Board version and the CX Process version CX Process Ver 5 0 CX Process Ver 4C LCB Ver 3 0 Inner flash memory Memory Card See note 1 See note 2 LCB Ver 2 0 or earlier Memory card Memory Card See note 2 See note 2 1 Transfer cannot be performed to the
290. gs from the FinsGateway the COM1 port and port of Menu Click the Add Button and make the network settings the personal computer in Host so that the COM1 and COM2 ports have different network Link communications are the addresses same ERROR Peripheral bus or Host Link Select Change PLC from the Setting Menu and check the CODE communications cannot be network type COM port and other settings Correct any 0A1B implemented by the CX Server settings that are wrong The network address is wrong Select the Project Workspace Select Network Settings from the Settings Menu and set the correct network address The FinsGateway routing tables Create the correct routing tables incorrect ERROR The node address is wrong Select the Project Workspace select Network Settings CODE from the Settings Menu and set the correct node address 0A1B ERROR The unit address is wrong Select the LCU LCB element select Network Settings CODE from the Settings Menu and set the correct unit address 0A08 The FinsGateway ew settings are illegal e g the settings are for SYSMAC WAY If the Host Link is used select Activate Serial Port Driver from the File Menu and initialize the serial port For FinsGateway manual control select Service Communications Settings from the FinsGateway Menu and set the protocol to SYSMAC WAY CV The designated COM port is Designate a COM port that is not being used being used by ano
291. h PY error source designation Alarm limit RSP source Local Set Point setting Set Point setting mode default PY tracking at local Remote Local switch Bumpless processing AT command AT Executing Limit cycle MV amplitude Limit cycle hysteresis AT calculation gain Judgment DEY for provisional AT AT type Deviation alarm setting Deviation alarm standby sequence Processing cycle of PID control Control action Proportional band Integral time O No action Differential time O No action 2 Double clicking on the desired setting item The corresponding dialog box will appear For example by double clicking on the operation cycle of ITEMOOA the fol lowing dialog box will appear BLKOO1 004 E x Data Name Operation cycle 0 common Data Range Data Description Integer Data 0 8 he S05 1 S26 O00 7 0 02 8 0 05 Sec r General data Das Connection data Block ITEM Number Data C Tag Name Field Terminal Seguence Control Function Block Group Block l TERM ITEM z User Link Table Entr Cancel 3 Input the value and click OK or press the Enter Key To set the next ITEM click Next To set the previous ITEM click Back Note When the computer is online you can click Download to download just the value that was set If this method is used the new value will be downloaded but the ITEM list will not be refreshed and the ITE
292. h LCB Unit version 2 00 or earlier as described later Confirm the LCB version before creating an LCB LCB LCU Name LCBO05 103 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 The flowing table lists the LCU LCB numbers and corresponding Loop Con trollers Loop Controller LCU LCB Unit version type number Loop Control 00 LCBO1 Version 1 00 CS1W LCBO1 Boards LCB or later 00 LCBO5 Version 1 00 CS1W LCBO5 or later 00 LCBO5 GTC Version 3 00 CS1W LCBO5 GTC Loop Control 01 LCO001 CS1W LCO01 02 1 1 03 LC001 Process control 00 LCBO5D Version 1 00 CS1D CPUL IL JP CPU Unit Loop Control CJ1G CPUA42P Version 2 00 CJ1G CPU42P CPU Unit or later CJ1G CPU43P Version 2 00 CJ1G CPU43P or later CJ1G CPU44P Version 2 00 CJ1G CPUAAP or later CJ1G CPU45P Version 2 00 CJ1G CPU45P or later CJ1G CPU45P Version 3 00 CJ1G CPU45P GTC GTC Note a One Loop Control Board one Loop control CPU Unit and three Loop Control Units can be registered per node b A Loop Control Board can be registered and used at the same time as a Loop Control Unit C A Loop control CPU Unit cannot be registered at the same time as a Loop Control Board at the same node d Always set the version that corresponds to the Loop Controller be ing used If the incorrect version is set by mistake use Change LC Type from the Execute Menu to change the version number For details on methods used to confirm the Loop Controller ver sion r
293. h a Controller Link Unit mounted Not supported by FinsGateway Version 2 Controller Link Driver Ethernet Network ETN UNIT Driver Connecting through the Ethernet Board to a PLC with an Ethernet Unit mounted Note 1 Host Link communications use FINS commands enclosed in a header and terminator data i e SYSWAY CV for FinsGateway Host Link communica tions SYSMAC WAY is set for the PLC 2 FinsGateway Version 2003 only Connecting via Serial Communications The personal computer uses the FinsGateway Serial Unit Driver to connect to Host Link SYSMAC the PLC s peripheral or RS 232C port via Host Link communications WAY 32 Connecting to the PLC Section 1 6 Peripheral Bus The personal computer uses the FinsGateway Version 2003 Serial Unit Driver to connect to the PLC s peripheral or RS 232C port via the peripheral bus Connections to the Peripheral Connections to the RS 232C port of the CPU Port of the CPU Unit Unit or Serial Communications Board or Unit CX Process CX Process Tool Loop Control Unit Loop Control Unit LEM PCT or CS1 CPU Unit um CS1 CPU Unit compatible Peripheral compatible 9 pin male port 9 pin male HS 232C Port 7 CS1W CN226 or CS1W CN626 XW2Z 200S CV Connecting Cable Connecting Cable Note The FinsGateway Serial Unit Driver must be installed to enable connecting the PLC via Host Link communications Connecting through a Controller Link Support
294. hange flag minimum block address with an execution error execution error code of each block ad dress block address with a database error battery error and ITEM data for System Common Block Control items Maximum load rate and resetting operation cycle automat ic change flag Monitor Run Status MEM CX Process Tool Monitoring load rate Resetting operation and execution errors cycle automatic change flag Loop Controller System Common Block Note Do not apply function block data to practical use unless the suitability of the data for the system is fully checked with the CX Process Tool including a check on the load rate by selecting Operation and Monitor Run Status from the Execute Menu For details on the load rate refer to the operation manual for the Loop Controller Take the following steps to monitor the run status of System Common Block of the Loop Controller Select Operation and Monitor Run Status from the Execute Menu The follow ing dialog box will appear Monitor Hun Status 00 LCBO 003 Execution erar display 0 15 Stopped 0 O16 Hat start 1 t Cold start 0 O18 Stark mode 1 133 Function Block Changed flag 0 43 Hot start flag 0 O44 Cold start flag 0 047 Processing time load rate 0 049 processing time load rate 1 Reset 050 EM Bank No 0 HMI I F Function Operation cycle 4 Reception disable switch 0 057 Send disable switch 0 081 Min block addr
295. hanged and select Wireless Debug from the pop up window 3 The following dialog box will be displayed 001 Basic PID Wireless Debug Setting _ ITEM PV P input Value 0 00 Apply Cancel 4 Select the Calibration Option for debugging settings in the dialog box 5 The ITEMs that can be input and the values are determined by each function block Input the values according to the following table 275 Operation Check Section 4 6 ITEMs That Can Be Input in Calibration Mode Block model ITEM Possible ITEM Maximum function block number setting setting 001 2 position 007 PV PV input 115 00 96 15 00 ON OFF 002 3 position 007 PV PV input 115 00 96 15 00 96 ON OFF 011 Basic PID 007 PV PVinpu 115 00 2 15 00 012 Advanced 007 PV PVinput 115 00 15 00 013 Blended P1 input 9999 014 Batch Flowrate P1 input 9999 Capture 031 Indication and V PV input 115 00 96 15 00 Setting 032 Indication and 007 PV PV input 115 00 96 15 00 96 Operation 033 Ratio Setting PV PV input 115 00 15 00 034 Indicator PV PV input 115 00 15 00 6 Click the OK or Apply Button e f the OK button is clicked the settings will be reflected and the dialog box will close e f the Apply Button is clicked the settings will be reflected but the dialog box will not close 7 The function blocks on the block diagrams will be disp
296. haracters None Tag type Analog 1 Contact Data attribute See note 1 1 Integer U Unit 0 Contact Contact 1 byte data U UINT I INT Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point position for scaling Unit Data range upper limit Data range lower limit 5000 to 99999 5000 to 99999 Example for DP position of 1 500 0 to 9999 9 Example for DP position of 1 550 0 to 9999 9 5000 to 99999 5000 to 99999 Example for DP position of 1 500 0 to 9999 9 Example for DP position of 1 550 0 to 9999 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 Max 8 characters Unusable characters None Max 8 characters Unusable characters None 340680 to 330779 65535 Fixed 5000 to 99999 When scaling 320 data with an upper limit of 99999 and a lower limit of 5000 340680 to 330779 32768 Fixed 5000 to 99999 When scaling 320 data with an upper limit of 99999 and a lower limit of 5000 Network address to 127 Node address 1 to 32 Unit address 16 to 31 225 16 to 31 225 I O memory area 0 CIO 1 W 2 3 D 4 5 E1 6 15 EB 16 EC Always 99 I O memory address 0 to 65535 DENEN Bit position 0 to 15 Function block model O to 999 Block address 0 to 999 0 to 999 0 to 999 _1 _1 1 ITEM number 0 to 999 0 to 999 Offset write data 32767 0 Same address for read and write Not Read address of
297. hat is being held ON Use OUT_H with an N specification Even when this is done however the signal will not turn OFF until the condition for OUT_F is no longer met for both a Y and N specification The following procedure must be performed in order to use timers and counters When editing the sequence table Element must be selected in the Signal Dia log Box to display the elements set with this procedure and enable using them 1 2 3 202 1 Right click the sequence table and select View Mode Element from the pop up menu to switch to Element Edit Mode Creating Sequence Tables Section 3 8 2 Select a row and select Data Edit Element from the menus The Initial Data Configuration Dialog Box will be displayed Element Initial Data Setup C Counter Set Value Pre Alarm value Unit 1 0 01 2 O leec 3 sec 4 min T H System element 0000 Registered Block address r0 Cancel 3 Values are set for the timers and counters The settings are shown in the following table Element type Set value Pre alarm System Registered value element block address number 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 Automatically Sequence TIM 000 100 s set table address Counter to 32767 to 32767 CNT 001 200 counts 3 8 8 Expanding the Sequence Table Right click and select Expand Vertical or Expand Horizontal from the pop up menu When a sequence table is expanded the sequence table
298. he Insert Row Button 5 Input the instructions Printing function blocks block diagrams etc 1 Select Print from the File Menu then select each data type 1 8 2 Online Operations Connecting via serial communications Activate and select the folder of the function block file Select Network Settings from the Settings Menu Input the network address Set the node address to 01 Select the LCU LCB element by default set to LC001 1 Select Network Settings from the Settings Menu Input the unit address Select Activate Serial Port Driver from the File Menu Click the OK Button Downloading function block data A Activate the folder of the function block file and select the LCU LCB element default LCO01 1 Select Transfer to LC Selected from the Execution Menu When the version is different from the Loop Controller element version a warning dialog will be displayed Click the OK Button and continue Click the OK Button If a step ladder program is included click the OK Button for Convert Ladder To Mnemonics per LCU LCB element Click the OK Button Set the objective item and start downloading the data Downloading each ITEM s data Select Monitor ITEM List from the Execution Menu to Transferring to LC display the ITEM list or double click the function block registered on the Project Workspace Screen Double click each ITEM Set the desired value and click the Transfer to LC Button 46 Operations Se
299. he LCU element Direct FinsGateway To make initial settings for direct FinsGateway online connections take the fol Online Connections lowing steps Refer to the FinsGateway Operation Manual for details 1 2 3 1 Serial Settings Make necessary settings such as personal computer communications port node address and protocol serial communications mode settings 246 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 Select FinsGateway Settings from the FinsGateway Menu The following dialog box will appear OMRON FinsGateway Settings File Network EventMemory View Tool Help ToolBar FY Basic DocoMemo Info Networks Networks and Units Drivers Memories ER EventMemories E Event Conditions FINS Data Areas i Services 4 CPU UNIT ws FgwSocketProxy v5 MapAgent gt NameSpaceServer gt SerialUnit UNITO ws ETN UNIT Network and Unit Settings E Networks Properties M Local Network 1 COMT1 serial unit EH Units Delete Network COMI serial unit 24 Add Remote 310A Select Network Driver from the directory tree on the left side of the window and double click SerialUnit in the compatible drivers listed on the right side of the window Click the Node Tab to display the following dialog box 1 Serial Unit Properties
300. he Loop Control Board Loop Control Board Product nameplate 2 Unit version ic Example for unit version 1 5 CS1W LQBO1 LOOP CONTROL BOA Lot No 031025 OMRON Corporation MADE iN JAPAN The CX Process Tool can be used to confirm the unit versions of Loop Control Boards in the Monitor Run Status Window After connecting the CX Process Tool online select Operation Monitor Run Status from the Execute Menu Confirm the unit version in ITEMO99 MPU FROM version display under from the System Common Block Block Model 000 in the Monitor Run Status Win dow WEM Dsamame Dua 099 MPU FROM version indication 1 50 gt Version V1 50 and onwards must be indicated Functional Element Name and Version Code for Process control CPU Units and Loop control CPU Units The functional element name and functional element version code for Process control CPU Units and Loop control CPU Units are provided on the nameplate as shown in the following diagrams viii Process control CPU Units Note CPU Unit elements for which no version code is provided are pre Ver 2 0 CPU Units Functional element name for Process control CPU Unit CPU Unit element Product nameplate CS1D CPU67P PROCESS CPU UNIT Nameplate on left side of Unit Lot No 031001 0000 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Functional element Functional element Functional element na
301. he RS View32 RS View Database Import and Export Wizard Specify the tag names from RS View32 and read write the Loop Controller s data or the CPU Unit s I O memory 154 Using SCADA Software Seclion 3 4 Contents of SCADA Tag Files Including OPC Server Direct Access Tags The contents of the CSV tag file is listed in the following table The file is a tab de limited text file in the same order as the table and it can be read with spread sheet software A CSV tag file can be imported to an OPC server tag names and tag ITEMS can be specified from RS View or other SCADA software on the OPC server and then the data can be written to or read from the Loop Controller Setting range for ITEMs User link table tags OPC Server direct access tags 110 65555 Function block file Max 6 characters FDAC node number name LCBO5 LCB01 LCBO3 5 LCBO3 LCBO5D LC0011 LC0012 LCBO5D LCU LCB element name Tag name representa tive tag LCBO5 LCBOSD LC0011 LC0012 LC0013 LC0013 16 characters max Unus Always LNK 16 characters max Unus able characters None able characters None Tag ITEM Fixed for each function block Tag name from user link table Fixed for each function block item item Tag comment 16 characters max Unus Tag comment from user link 16 characters max Unus able characters None table 23 characters max able characters None Unusable c
302. he Settings Menu to set the CSV tags Or Select the option to automatically register CSV tags when registering function blocks and edit the CSV tag file in Excel or other editor Compile the CSV tag file by selecting Create Tag File CSV Tags from the Execution Menu Select the function block and select Tag Settings CSV Tags from the Settings Menu to set the CSV tags Or Select the option to automatically register CSV tags when registering function blocks and edit the CSV tag file in Excel or other editor Compile the RS View tag file by selecting Create Tag File RS View Tags from the Execution Menu Select the sequence table block Select Edit Sequence Table from the Settings Menu Right click on the sequence table and select Edit Mode Enable 4 Double click the sequence table and input the data into the Signal Dialog Box 45 Operations Section 1 8 Inputting step ladder programs as ladder Select the Step Ladder Program Block diagrams Select Edit Ladder Program from the Settings Menu Select the icon and move it onto the ladder diagram and click the left mouse button 4 Double click the left mouse button on the ladder symbol Input the data into the Data Setting Dialog Box Inputting step ladder programs in mnemonics Select the Step Ladder Program Block Select Edit Ladder Program from the Settings Menu Select Mnemonics from the Manipulate Ladder Menu 4 Click t
303. he data Screens could not be refreshed within the specified cycle Connection specifications on block Input only of block In addition to block addresses and ITEM diagrams other than software connections addresses and ITEM numbers BBBIII the connection destination Right clicking blue ITEMs and inputting numbers BBBIII can be specified from a pull down menu when addresses using a Loop Control Board 19 Version Improvements Sectio 1 4 1 4 6 Version 3 1 The improvements made from version 3 0 to version 3 1 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Unit Board support CS1W LCO001 Loop Control Unit and CS1D CPUL IL P Process control CS1W LCBO01 05 Loop Control CPU Units in addition to Boards CS1W LCO001 Loop Control Unit and CS1W LCBO01 05 Loop Control Boards Data conversion Conversion from LCU element to LCB Conversion of data created for the element data CS1W LCBO5 to CS1D CPULJLJP Process control CPU Unit in addition to conversion from LCU element to LCB element data CSV tag settings Manually only making settings Automatically creating CSV tag individually in the CSV Tag Settings settings when registering function Dialog Box blocks CSV tag setting function and editing in Excel or other editor before loading to the project in addition to manual setting Backup during operation Not supported Supported 1 4 7 Version 3 2 The improvements made from version 3 1 to version
304. he following dialog box will ap pear with the network address and node address already set Setup network address LOU 1 LCODT 1 Metwork address Made address Unit address 16 31 1 Input the unit address between 16 and 31 in decimal into the Unit Address Field The unit address to be input is between 16 and 31 10 and 1F Hex In other words add 16 10 Hex to the unit number between and 15 0 to F Hex set with the rotary switches on the front panel of the Loop Control Unit as a CPU Bus Unit 2 Click the OK Button In addition to manually setting the addresses as described above they can also be set automatically by searching for Loop Controllers connected to networks of the PLC connected to the CX Process Tool Select the LCU element and then select Find LCU LCB from the File Menu This can be performed even before initializing serial communications Refer to Automatically Setting Addresses see below for details Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 If Ethernet is used it is necessary to start up the FinsGateway communications Starting Up Communications Service service manually Select FinsGateway Settings from the FinsGateway Menu Automatically Setting Addresses In addition to manually setting the network node and unit addresses they can also be set automatically by searching for Loop Control Units connected to net works of the PLC connected to the CX Process Tool Use the
305. he function block that performs the pseudo input from the 4 6 4 block diagram and then select Wireless Debug from the right click menu 47 SECTION 2 Preparations to Create Function Blocks This section describes installing the CX Process and provides an overview of the user interface 2 1 Installing and Uninstalling the Software 50 25151 Software That Must Be Installed i 56e Re RE e ee Te nee 50 2 1 2 Preparations tor Installation aue oe e rS ex tote s 51 2 1 3 Precautions Tor Installation e teas Re de hee edes 22 2 1 4 Installing the CX Process the CX Server 32 2125 Installine PIS OM nud vue v pied rw Reade uda ee ETEN EEA 56 2 1 6 Installing FinsGateway Embedded Version 58 2 1 7 Uninstalling the CX Process 1 65 2 1 8 Wninstalhne the CX Server esos oone reade oie P S ES ES 66 2 1 9 Starting the C X Process TOOL Leuten we o itt ob tes escis 68 2 2 Overview Oft User Inle och ann Gad tri icem m ric cO adeste tis 69 2 2 l Project Workspace V o eias e Ee werd EET E EE ELE E E VS 71 22 2 WINdOW 2545 o oe parue o IUS S wives desse tds 71 2277394 MEDUS T osa ute reiner aen a ee ara tere Genet the 73 49 Installing Uni
306. he hd bere he ibd eee eae tenes 2 1 2 Relationship with CX Process Monitor 9 39 XOXcProceSS TOOL OSDECIHCALOflS sos odds oleae e e le o GE ao Rees 13 l 4 Version Improvements 15 1 5 Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions 25 16 Comrone 10 the DEC is cedent RE eae Mies ws ee 31 I 7 Basie Operate Procedures am exc pd edu Rode Oe Ba eo 36 128 3ODGFPOLOBS esrb Dod pep ai we RA EE E A aod 44 SECTION 2 Preparations to Create Function Blocks 49 2 1 Installing and Uninstalling the Software 50 2 2 Overview of User Interface ccce hs 69 SECTION 3 Creating Function Blocks e 977 Creatine Function Block po bara tee ese c ea has 99 3 2 site the CX Process Monitor oo y eo our RED bes ex WEE uem ur tex 132 3 3 Using the X Process Montor PIOS iieri tbe et dte eae Ste eae aed dd 138 Sb Using SCADA SOLWate EN og ded dero d od tos dd feld deas 141 ae 159 3 6 Creating User defined Blocks 173 3 7 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions
307. ialog Box for the When LCU or element is Information Project Workspace level selected function block group or function block is selected Function Block Displays the reference help for the selected function When a function block is selected Reference block 82 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Menus in Edit Block Diagram Mode Select the block diagram first and then select Edit Edit Block Diagram from the Settings Menu so that the CX Process Tool will enter Edit Block Diagram Mode The following menus will be displayed Main Menus ee FB Registration Bar Displays or hides the function block registration bar Scale 100 Displays the block diagram in actual size default 200 Displays the block diagram at 200 size 50 Displays the block diagram at 50 size Zoom In Zooms in to the block diagram Zooms out from the block diagram Change Mode Grid Mode Turns OFF the grid display Wide Switches the grid to a wide grip owitches the grid to a midsize grid Switches the grid to a narrow grid Narrow CSV Tag mode If CSV tags have been set the CSV tag name is displayed as the function block name when a function block is pasted in the block diagram Manipulate FBD Setting Sets the execution cycle for all function blocks in a function block Operation diagram Order 0 02 sec Download Downloads only the function blocks actually set above to the Loop Controll
308. ier 16 blocks or LC001 109 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Note The following procedures can also be used to register a function block e Register the function block using the Project Workspace tree Select the block diagram folder and then select Settings Insert Insert Function Block e Register the function block by right clicking in the block diagram Right click in the block diagram to display the pop up menu and then select Register and select the function block that is to be registered Registering Other Function Blocks Loop Controller Units Only With Loop Control Units the following block groups can be registered Send Ter minal to All Nodes Receive Terminal from All Nodes Send Terminal to Comput er CPU Unit Terminal and SCADA Interface For details on these function blocks refer to the Function Block Reference Manual Display Registered Function Blocks 1 2 3 1 Each block address registered is displayed on the tree on the Project Work space Screen GXx Process Tool Equipment A Nadal File Miew Settings Execute Help Dem S ALA ja As Si 59 Equipment 001 01 1 0 00 LOBOS 225 f y 01 System H E 02 Field Terminal 028 03 Sequence Control Ec 04 Block Diagram 1 001 Basic PID 002 Basic PID 003 Square Root 05 Block Diagram 2 9 06 Block Diagram 3 Nm 7 The block address is displayed with the block addr
309. ifi Function Displays only tags set in function blocks cation Block User Link Displays only tags set in user link tables Table Both Displays tags set in function blocks and user link tables Analog Displays tags for analog signals Contacts Displays tags for contact signals Analog Displays tags for analog signals and contact Contacts signals R W Read from Displays tags that read from the CPU Unit to the LCB Loop Controller Write to Displays tags that write from the Loop Controller to LCB the CPU Unit Read Displays both read and write tags Write Alarm Contact Displays only tags set in alarm tags All Entries Displays all Monitor Plus tags Prints Monitor Plus tags Pop up Menu on CSV Tag List Menu Displayed by Clicking Right Button When a CSV tag ist displayed List ITEMs Displays a list of function block ITEMs for which the specified CSV tags are set Connection Map Displays the connection map for the function block for which the specified CSV tags are set Check overlapping tags Checks for CSV tag names that have been used twice Prints the CSV tag list Pop up Cross reference Menu Menu Displayed by Clicking Right Button Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Print Cross reference Prints the open cross references When cross reference is displayed 95 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up Menu on Connection Map Pop up menu command Conditions for selection B
310. igits 018 021 047 061 074 083 21 Accumulated value upper 4 digits PV instantaneous value output Current SP Q Q2 Y 1 Y2 instantaneous value output Cumulative deviation output MV output 87 MV C 325 ITEM Notation in Block Diagrams Appendix B Function Function block Abbreviation ITEM Abbreviation ITEM block diagram for analog number for analog number Block input ITEMs output Model ITEMs Batch 207 P1 P1 source Q1 012 Accumulated value Flowrate designation lower 4 digits Capture Batch Flowrate Capture m RSP 021 Remote SP source Q2 013 Accumulated value 014 ae ec S designation upper 4 digits RSPU Remote SP source Instantaneous value designation output MV_ABN MV error contact Current SP output source designation lower 4 digits SPU_W Current SP output upper 4 digits Batch accumulated value lower 4 digits Batch accumulated value upper 4 digits Program output PV source Current set point designation output 2 position ON OFF 001 2 position ON OFF JJ U 008 PV ABN 018 PV error contact Deviation output source designation Remote set point source designation 3 position PV source Current set point ON OFF designation output 002 U lt PV ABN 018 PV error contact Deviation output source designation HSP 021 Remote set point source designation Fuzzy Logic 016 X1 inp
311. ignal is not registered in the reference table with the block address specified for a TBL command in the main table e Y N data is not registered in the reference table for the block address spe cified for TBL command in the main table e An output signal is registered in the reference table e he block address specified for the TBL command is not set as a reference table 3 8 11 Validating the Actions of the Sequence Table Right click and select Validate Action Start from the pop up menu The se quence table can be edited online during validation Refer to 4 6 7 Validating Sequence Table Operation for details 3 8 12 Printing the Sequence Table Right click and select Print General from the pop up menu 206 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Units Section 3 9 3 9 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Units 3 9 1 Overview Engineering units can be used to display and set the analog data handled by the CX Process Tool Data is converted to engineering units based on the CSV tag information set for the function block Note This function can be used only with Loop Control Boards Loop con trol CPU Units and Process control CPU Units It is not supported by Loop Control Units Configuration for Engineering Unit Conversion CX Process Tool The user sets the scaling information HEHEHE User Function Function Monitoring in en block ITEM 1 block ITEM 9 units
312. ile When the CX Server is set as the communications driver Loop Controller configuration file Data file of User Link Table nkTable csv CSV format Data file of Sequence Table Note The monitor tag data is saved as a monitor tag file Job information files Saving Data in the Current Project Folder Select Save from the File Menu The created Project Workspace data will be saved in the project folder specified with New in the File Menu Saving Data in a Different Project Folder 1 2 3 1 Select Save As from the File Menu 2 Specify the folder where the created Project Workspace data will be saved Click the OK Button 3 The Project Workspace data will be saved in the specified different project folder Note The Project Workspace data will be saved by default in the CX Pro cess Tool data folder Note If the computer crashes or there is a power failure the function block files ist may not be saved It is recommended to save the Project Workspace data regu larly 3 1 11 Opening a Project Workspace Use the following procedure to open an existing Project Workspace 1 2 3 1 Select Open from the File Menu The following dialog box will appear Confirm All files will be closed Are you sure to proceed 128 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 2 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will appear ES Look in data ex pce EIS Equipment Samp
313. ill be displayed LCB New Password x Mew Password 2 Enter the password 3 Click the OK Button Changing the Loop Use the following procedure to change the password set for the Loop Controller Controller Password connected online 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element e g 00 LCBO5 and then select Setting Program Protection Edit LCB Password The following dialog box will be displayed Change Password Fa Existing password Password 2 Enter the current password under Existing password and the new password for under New Password 3 Click the OK Button Note The password protection set here is also in effect for the simple backup opera tion Backing up to a Memory Card will thus be disabled although restoring data will be possible If the simple backup operation to a Memory Card is performed for a Loop Controller for which a password has been set an empty backup file will be created in the Memory Card Deleting the Loop Use the following procedure to delete the password set for the Loop Controller Controller Password connected online The password will also be cleared when the all clear operation or the LCU LCB is downloaded 315 Password Protection Section 4 12 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element e g 00 LCBO5 and then select Setting Program Protection Edit LCB Password The following dialog box will be displayed Change
314. ime that the CX Process Tool was started 3 9 5 Displaying Function Block ITEM Lists When the Engineering Unit Mode is enabled converted ITEMs in the ITEM list are displayed in blue The values are displayed as engineering units and right justified in the Data column in the ITEM list Type ITEM tag Data z Operation data gt 008 HH P 115 00 High high alarm setting 009 HSP 100 00 High alarm setting 010 L_SP 0 00 Low alarm setting 011 LL SP 15 00 Low low alarm setting 017 O AQF Alarm stop switch 023 Q SPW 0 00 Local Set Point setting 026 Sw 0 switch 35 OQ AT 0 AT command AT Executing 036 C CL_OUT 20 00 Limit cycle MY amplitude 037 CWYCL H5 0 20 Limit cycle hysteresis 038 1 00 AT calculation gain 059 AT DEV 10 00 Judgment DEY For provisional AT 040 0 AT type 041 115 00 Deviation alarm setting 053 Q DIR Direction cmnd 054 P 100 0 Proportional band 055 I 0 Integral action 056 o D Differential timefO No action 065 ALFA 0 65 2 parameter alpha 066 D BETA 1 00 2 parameter z Operation data gt 008 HH SP 149 80 C Highjhigh alarm setting 009 o HP 130 00 C High alarm setting 010 L_SP 2 00 C Low alarm setting 011 LL SP 21 80 C alarm setting 017 AOF 0 Alarm stop switch 023 SPW 2 00 Local Set Point setting 026
315. in a Step Ladder Program Block block model 301 The Edit Step Ladder Program Menu will be explained later Edit Se Edits a sequence table Block Model 302 Editing a When a sequence quence sequence table must be enabled after double clicking on table is selected Table the editing screen before this command can be used LCBO5 Or LCBO5D only When a function block is selected Deletes the selected function block Edit Step Ladder Program When a step ladder program is selected Edit User Edits a user link table When a function Link block file LCB Table element function block group ora function block file is selected 75 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 me _ selection Settings Function Cut Cuts a function block from the Project Workspace When a function continued Block Copies a function block in the Project Workspace block file is selected Increment Selects and increments the function block address by 1 If the next address is being used it is also incremented by 1 Note f the current function block file has been changed it must be saved before executing this command FBD Copy Copies the entire block diagram function block group When a block diagram function block group is selected Paste Hegisters the copied block diagram as a new block When an LCU or diagram in the selected LCU LCB element LCB element is select
316. in another file Monitors lists all of the selected function block s ITEM data It is also possible to download the data of individual ITEMs Tuning Makes online changes to settings such as the function Screen block s PID constants and SPs All Stop Stops all windows in which diagrams are being validated When the selected ITEM lists are being monitored and tuning screens are item is not the being displayed Project Workspace Backup Backup Copies the function block data in the RAM in the Loop When a Loop Data Controller to the flash memory in the Loop Controller Controller is Operation Recovery Restores the function block data in the flash memory in selected the Loop Controller to the RAM in the Loop Controller Check Version Checks whether the version of the Loop Controller When a Loop connected on line agrees with the version of the Controller is CX Process Tool and displays the result selected Delete Registered Execution Deletes the registered function block in the When a function Function Block Loop Controller while online block is selected Monitor ITEM List When the cursor is positioned on a function block that has been pasted 78 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Submenu Description Conditions for Command selection Execution Find Block Searches for registered function blocks with the block When a Loop continued Number number that has been specified and moves
317. in the Loop Controller will be saved in it Function block data in units of LCU LCB elements can be read in this method Select this method if there is no function block file as a base of the function block data in the Loop Controller Precautions and Restrictions for Loop Controller Model and Version 1 Loop Controller Boards LCBI 1 Ver 3 0 e Ver 3 0 Block diagrams are displayed when an upload is performed Data on tags comments annotations and block diagram lines transferred when download ing was performed will be restored e Ver 2 0 or Earlier Memory Card Not Installed Block diagrams are displayed when an upload is performed Block diagram line data however is not included so lines are drawn automatically Afterward manually adjust the connection lines Memory Card Installed Block diagrams are displayed when an upload is performed Data on tags comments annotations and block diagram lines transferred when download ing was performed will be restored 2 Loop Control Units LC001 257 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 258 Note 1 2 3 Note e Ver 2 0 or Later Block diagrams are displayed when an upload is performed Block diagram line data however is not included so lines are drawn automatically Afterward manually adjust the connection lines e Ver 1 5 or Earlier Connection line diagrams between function blocks are not displayed after an upload is performed
318. ines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Loop Con troller Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Loop Controller and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units Boards be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned applications Safety Precautions Check the following items before starting to run the e Do not allow the bank of the EM Area with the number specified for allocation to the HMI human machine interface data to be used by the CPU Unit or other Units for any other purpose The block allocated for the HMI is specified in ITEM 050 EM Area Bank Allocated for HMI Memory 0 to 12 of the System Common block If areas overlap the system may operate in an unexpected fashion which may result in injury e Do not allow the area to which user link table data is written to be used by the CPU Unit or other Units for any other purpose If areas overlap the system may operate in an unexpected fashion which may result in injury e Analog Input Output Units used in combination with the LCBLIL must be mou
319. ing Procedures Seclion 1 7 5 Set the software connections between function blocks with analog and ac cumulator signals using Edit Block Diagram from the Settings Menu CX Process Tool Equipment 01 Node01 Block Diagram 1 11 lol File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help lj olsa Ald i Cycle System common operation cycle Equipment NodeO1 001 011 21 028 00 1 01 225 zy 01 System 000 System Common 998 Internal Switch 9 02 Field Terminal 901 AI 4 point 0041 z Bs 902 AO 4 point DAO41 7 Ps 901 i 001 Al 4 point ADD41 Basic PID 03 Sequence Control D4 Block Diagram 1 22 001 Basic PID C 002 Basic PID 003 Square Root 28 05 Block Diagram 2 zy 06 Block Diagram 3 003 002 902 Square Root Basic PID AD 4 point DA041 x1 PV Xi E 6 Set the ITEMs in all function blocks and set user link tables or create se quence tables or step ladder programs as needed Note a User link tables are supported by LCBL 1 Js only b Sequence tables are supported by LCBO5 and LCBO5D LCB ele ments 00 LCBO5 and 00 LCBO5D only 7 Go to step 8 in one of the following sections CxX Process Tool Equipment A Mode
320. ing the Alt Left Cursor Keys The ladder diagram display can be zoomed away from press ing the Alt Right Cursor Keys 2 Symbols areas or rows that have been input can be copied cut and pasted to edit ladder diagrams Use a procedure like the following example for co pying and pasting an area a Select the area to be copied 002 086 COT2 Select this area to display it in reverse video b Click the right mouse button and select Copy from the pop up menu o v Select Draw Line Delete Line Symbols Invert Selected Annotation Paste Delete 183 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 C Select the upper left corner of the area where the data is to be pasted A black frame will be displayed Click the upper left corner of the area into which to paste the data Inserting Comments With Loop Control Unit versions 2 50 or later and LCBLI JL Js it is possible to in Annotations sert annotations user defined text into ladder diagrams in Edit Step Ladder Program Mode The annotations are a kind of symbol Up to 16 annotations can be inserted in one ladder diagram and up to 3 000 an notations can be inserted in one function block file Each annotation can be up to 200 characters long This function allows user set labels such as A M Switch or RSP LSP Switch to be inserted and displayed next to symbols such as LD or OUT The diagrams Loop Co
321. ion 131 Using the CX Process Monitor Section 3 2 3 2 Using the CX Process Monitor 3 2 1 Setting and Compiling Monitor Tags for CX Process Monitor To transfer tag data to the CX Process Monitor take the following three steps 1 2 3 1 Register the function block for data exchange Note The following function blocks can be used to exchange data Blocks Send Terminal to Computer block models 401 to 404 AO DO terminal to All Nodes block models 407 or 408 and AO DO Ter minal Settings from Computer block models 409 or 410 2 Set the tag names 3 Compile the monitor tags Registering Function Blocks for Data Exchange with CX Process Monitor To monitor function blocks contact signals or analog signals including parame ters from the CX Process Monitor register a Block Send Terminal to Computer block model 401 402 403 or 404 or AO DO Terminal to All Nodes block model 407 or 408 Function Block and designate the desired data in the function block as the source To set contact signals or analog signals including the parameter from the CX Process Monitor register a AO DO Terminal Settings from Computer block model 409 or 410 Function Block Example CPU Unit I O Memory DM Area 1 Block Send Execute Terminal to Computer Data Memory Area for 4 point Node Terminal Terminal DOM o f Area to send to Root Send designation computer AO 4 point Terminal DA041
322. ion 3 0 or later is used together with a version of CX Process Tool lower than version 5 0 For this reason these function blocks cannot be downloaded to the Loop Controller 116 Terminal AD161 AI2 Terminal PTS15 16 PDC15 Switch Instru ment Block Model 225 e The following settings cannot be used if LCBO1 LCBO5 version 3 0 or later or version 3 0 or later is used together with a version of CX Process Tool lower than version 5 0 Switch action direction command ITEM 053 RUN STOP switch ITEM 093 and MV at stop ITEM 094 in Basic PID Block Model 011 or Advanced PID Block Model 012 Note For details on which actual ITEM this restriction applies to refer to the ITEM list for the relevant function block in the Function Block Reference Manual 1 5 8 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 5 2 Function Blocks The following function blocks cannot be registered on the CX Process Tool with Earlier when LCB01 05 version 3 5 or later or version 3 5 or later is used with 30 Connecting to the PLC Section 1 6 CX Process Tool version 5 1 or earlier Therefore they cannot be down loaded to the Loop Controller Isolated Ai4 Terminal PH41U Block Model 572 Isolated Ai4 Terminal AD04U Block Model 573 Ai4 Terminal ADG41 Block Model 581 Similarly the following ITEMs can be used only when LCB01 05 version 3 5 or later LCBOS version 3 5 or later and CX Process Tool
323. ion Mode The following can be checked in a sequence table block model 302 e Current step number e Rule conditions met not met e Condition signal conditions met not met e Action signal conditions met not met Sequence Table Validation CX Process Tool The current step number condition met rules condition met signals and condition met actions are Loop Controller displayed in color n Sequence table ce f ee we ste D Entering Sequence Table Use the following procedure to enter Sequence Table Validate Action Mode Validate Action Mode 1 2 3 1 Select the sequence table block and select Edit Sequence Table from the Settings Menu The sequence table will be displayed 281 Operation Check Section 4 6 2 Select Start from the Validate Action Menu The Action Validation Screen will be displayed as shown below The cursor will change to the icon If the Loop Controller is not operating Sequence Table Monitoring Stopped will be displayed E 01 LCBO5 03 701 Sequence Table aT Execution Form Sequence Table Validating Action Every Cycle Signal j Comment IN 000 013 Run Start flag IN TIMGOO HI IN 001 086 Auto Manual switch IN 002 014 High alarm output IN 001 013 High high alarm output 3 Select Operation and then Run Stop Command from the Execute Menu and implement a
324. ions Hold 041 to 230 Arithmetic Functions Time Functions Signal Selection Switching ITEM Settings Pulse Train Operations Sequential Operations Contact Operation Terminals etc Loop Control 01 System Unit Common 02 Field Terminal 3 1 5 Making System Common Block Initial Settings The System Common Block block model 000 is used to set the specifications used by all of the function blocks Note To use a Loop Controller it is necessary to make the following initial function block settings 106 3 1 Section LTEM bata beta Creating Function Block rs common operation cycle s Tem one 0to3 1 0 HOT In the time 1 Hot 2 Cold 3 CPU e LCU numbers Loop Control Unit only Basic 1 Expansion 1 2 Expansion 2 0 to 32767 in one word First address in the DM Area for node terminals Loop Control Unit only The same address must be used for LCU number 0 1 increments and 2 1 2 3 1 Double click 000 System Common under the System Common Block fold er The following dialog box will appear in the right pane Node00 LCBOS V3 5 01 000 System Common loj x ITEM Type ITEMtag Initial setting data gt COMMENT CNT TM INIT 5T HOT TIM BANK Data Name Comment System common operation cycle Start mode time to enable Hot start EM Bank No HMI I F Function Operation cycle HMI I F Function disable switch Function Blo
325. irection Set Cannot be for each function block SP setting method set compensation method etc Operation data Operation parameters Example PID Block SP Set in special Set for each function block alarm settings PID cases constants etc Note Initial settings S and operation data classifications are displayed on ITEM Set ting Screens of the CX Protocol Tool For details on the ITEMs set in each func tion block refer to the Function Block Reference Manual Example ITEM type ITEM Contents R Read W Write R W Read write R W disabled tw CX Process Tool operation monitor Operation monitor read and write S Initial setting O Operation data CX Process CX Process Tool Monitor Operation S AW _ 012 Hysteresis set value R W S Parameter Local SP set value R W 024 SP set method Initial setting R W S 0 Local 1 Remote Local Note Analog values are normally set with the CX Process Monitor They can be set with the CX Process Tool provided that they are in percentage increments be tween 0 and 100 Scaling engineering units cannot be set with the CX Pro cess Tool 12 CX Process Tool Specifications Section 1 3 1 3 Tool Specifications CX Process Tool Specifications e ooo o o p Applicable Units Boards Loop Control Units Loop Control Boards Process control CPU Units Loop control CPU Units Applicable IBM PC AT or
326. irtual Machine Additions Size 970KB N Add Remove Windows Components n Set Program Access and Defaults 2 Select CX Server Driver Management Tool from the dialog box 3 Click the Change Remove Button Note Always close the Control Panel before uninstalling the CX Server Driver Man agement Tool from Windows 98 or Windows NT 4 0 The CX Server Driver Man agement Tool cannot be uninstalled while the Control Panel is open 4 A confirmation dialog box will be displayed Click the Yes Button Confirm Uninstall X Are you sure you want to completely remove CX Server Driver Management Tool and all of its Features i Cancel The CX Server Driver Management Tool will be uninstalled 67 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 5 When the uninstallation has been completed the following dialog box will be displayed Click the Finish Button The Add Hemove Programs Dialog Box will be displayed again CX Server Driver Management Tool InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on CX Server Driver Management T aol 6 In the same way select CX Server from the Add Remove Programs Dialog Box click the Change Remove Button and uninstall the CX Server follow ing the messages that appear on the screen 7 Reboot the computer 2 1 9 Starting the CX Process Tool 1 Select Program OMRON CX One CX Pr
327. it version for the product model CPU Units with Pre installed Loop Controllers do not have a unit version for the prod uct model Notation in this Manual This manual uses the following notation e Loop Controller is used as a generic term to refer to the Loop Controllers in general e LCBI J l is used to refer to specific Loop Controller functional elements For example the Loop Controller function element in a C81W LCBO5 Loop Con trol Board is the LCBO5 so is used to refer to the Loop Controller func tional element The Loop Controller function element in a CJ1G CPUAAP Loop control CPU Unit is the LCBOS so LCBO3 is used to refer to the Loop Controller functional element e Model numbers are used to refer to specific Loop Controller models In the CX Process Tool Operation Manual for version 3 2 or earlier functional element names LCBL JL are given as Loop Control Board In the CX Process Tool Operation Manual for version 4 0 or higher simply LCBL JL I is used vii Unit Version Notation on Products Loop Control Boards A unit version has been introduced to manage CPU Units Special Units and Inner Boards in the CS CJ Series according to differences in functionality accompanying upgrades This system applies to Units manufactured since Oc tober 1 2003 The unit version code is provided on the nameplate of the product for which unit versions are being managed as shown below for t
328. itags Connection Map Displays detailed information on the When a line of tag data is selected software links between two function blocks Prints the user n tabe 87 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Edit Sequence Table Mode Menus If a function block file in a sequence table is double clicked to enter sequence table mode the following menus will be displayed between the Operation Menu and the Window Menu Main Menus Scale 100 00 Displays the sequence table at 100 Displays the sequence table at 200 Displays the sequence table at 50 Increases the size of the sequence table display Zoom Zoom Out AlttLeft Alt Left Decreases the size of the sequence table display Edits a signal When a signal is selected in Edit Mode Comment Edits a comment When a comment is selected in Edit Mode Logical Ye Sets a value to Yes When a value is Data No Sets a value to No selected in Edit Mode Block Sets an entire row or column to Yes When a row or column Set is selected in Edit Sets an entire row or column to No Mode Element Edits an element when elements are displayed When a row or column is selected in Edit Mode and elements are displayed 88 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Mem Command Operation Column Insert Row Inserts one signal row When row signal How value is selected in Edit Mode Delete Row Deletes one signal row When
329. ither the backup data in the Memory Card is corrupted or CODE corrupted the Memory Card is damaged Create the backup files 250F again or use a new Memory Card The Memory Card cannot be Another application is accessing the Memory Card Wait accessed for the Memory Card to be released and then try again Backup during operation was Transfer the data again after the backup operation has started when data was being been completed transferred Built in flash memory is being Built in flash memory is being initialized Wait for a little initialized while for the initialization of built in flash memory to be completed and then try transferring the data again If you still cannot transfer the data the hardware may be damaged Contact your OMRON representative 320 Error Codes Error code Probable cause Fins CX Gateway Server A hot start or cold start was attempted immediately after the Loop Controller performed a direct recovery operation Power was turned OFF when data was being transferred Section 5 2 Possible remedy Cycle the power supply to the Loop Controller or restart the Unit before sending the Operation Command Power was turned OFF when data was being transferred Turn ON the power supply and repeat the transfer operation from the beginning 321 Appendix A Table of LC Type Changes Tables 1 and 2 below show project combinations before and after the changes Table 1 Conversion to LCB Pr
330. its ITEMO30 Preset Value ITEMO61 and Batch Accumulated Value Upper 4 Digits ITEMOG5 e Time Units ITEMO13 in Rate of change Limiter Speed Response Block Model 143 e Reference Input Disable Switch ITEMO20 in Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 e Output Type ITEMOO6 in Contact Distributor Block Model 201 e Individual I O Range Settings in the following Blocks Al Terminal from CPU Unit Block Model 453 AO Terminal from CPU Unit Block Model 454 Al4 Terminal Block Model 561 Pl4 Terminal Block Model 562 and AI8 Terminal Block Model 564 e Receive Stop Switch ITEM225 in the following Blocks DI Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 455 and Al Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 457 e Send Stop Switch ITEM225 in the following Blocks DO Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 456 and AO Termi nal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 458 Note 1 For details on which actual ITEM this restriction applies to refer to the ITEM list for the relevant function block in the Function Block Reference Manual 2 The version of the Loop Control Unit can be verified in the Monitor Run Sta tus Screen Execution Operation Monitor Run Status on CX Process Tool When the above function blocks are used check in the Check System Op eration screen on CX Process Tool beforehand that the content of ITEM 099 onwards in the System Common block Block Model 000 is as follows WEM Daaname
331. k alarm 000 085 Min block addr Low alarm 000 086 Min block addr Hiah alarm 000 087 Min block addr Highihiah alarm 000 091 Min block addr error 000 092 Min block addr error 000 093 Min block addr Execution error 000 Detailed Dis 094 Min block addr Database error 000 Detailed Dis 095 Min link Table error ID 0 120 Backup start cmnd while running 0 Refresh Execute Cancel Method 3 Batch Registration on the User Link Table Edit Screen With CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher multiple tags with the same at tributes can be registered at the same time with the tag name to which serial numbers are attached Consecutive I O memory addresses in the CPU Unit will be automatically allocated to the tags Up to 2 400 tags can be regis tered as a batch The default is for 16 tags The numbers added to the tag name will begin at 0001 for the number of tags required The following example shows registering 16 tags as a batch with the tag name temperature setting starting from DM 00100 1 Select Setting Edit User Link Table 2 Right click on the User Link Table Edit Screen and select Block Set from the pop up menu 3 The following User Link Table Batch Registration Dialog Box will be dis played Set the number of tags to register to 16 the tag name to temper ature setting the memory type to DM and the memory address to 100 163 User Link Tables Section
332. k 01 Change Confirm Units 5 4 0000 Rack 02 Unit Comment Select Start Special Application SYSMAC BLIS Master Unk Setup Select Start with Settings Inherited Save Parameters Load Parameters Start Special Application Ghi Gopy Paste Delete 37 Basic Operating Procedures Seclion 1 7 2 The CX Process Tool will start and a new project will be created The Num ber Model setting e g 00 LCBO5 will be automatically selected based the Loop Control Board Unit model in the I O tables The node is inserted automatically The Insert LCB LCU Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool CXPrc050128113903 File Settings Execute Hep Dae e mmaa 224 050128113903 AA Node unregistered The Number Model e g 00 LCBO5 is set automatically based on the Unit Board model in the I O Table Window Inset LCB LCU LC Type LCB LCU C Loop CPU Unit Pracess CPU Unit Information I LERNTE Number Model 00 LCB05 7 Unit Ver Title LCB LCU Name LCB05 Ready Zz 3 Set the System Common Block 4 Register the function block Note 1 For details on setting the System Common Block refer to 3 1 5 Making Sys tem Common Block Initial Settings 2 For details on registering function blocks refer to 3 1 6 Registering Function Blocks 38 Basic Operat
333. k Model 209 e Individual analog signals from LCB element to computer Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Input Selection block Block Model 162 e Individual analog signals from computer to LCB element Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Constant Generator block Block Model 166 10 Generate the CX Process Monitor Plus tag file Execute Create Tag File Monitor Plus Tag 40 Basic Operating Procedures Seclion 1 7 11 Start the CX Process Monitor Plus and click the Start Button Note For all Loop Controllers the following function blocks must be created and connected separately to enable monitoring and setting individual contact signals and individual analog signals i e other than function block data e o monitor and set individual contact signals contact signals must be input output using the Contact Distributor block Block Model 201 and Internal Switch block Block Model 209 e o monitor individual analog signals analog signals must be output from the Input Selection block Block Model 162 e o set individual analog signals analog signals must be input to the Constant Generator block Block Model 166 Note 1 For details on the CX Process Monitor refer to 3 2 Using the CX Process Monitor 2 For details on the CX Process Monitor refer to 3 8 Using the CX Process Monitor Plus Using SCADA Software 8 Set the Send All Blocks or Receive
334. ke the tag When selected selects using tag name registration names and tag ITEMs when default setting ITEMs such as when specifying the send source of function blocks When not selected selects inputting numerical values BBBBIIII are in sequence Enable OPC When selected adds ITEMS other server Direct than for HMI data to the tag file as Access Tag OPC server direct access tag when outputting the tag file Communica Retry times Set the number of retries for 3 tion communications with the PLC Time out value Sets the response timeout 5 000 ms monitoring time only when FinsGateway is the communications driver 224 Setting Options CSV Tag Setting Show extended property Always enable OPC Server scaling tag option Treat User Link Table as OPC Server scaling tag Assume data range of ITEM related to MV to be 0 10096 Replace the first character of tag name with Function Block Diagram Color Function Block bitmap Step Ladder Data title display Scale Sets the display zoom for the 100 sequence table Sequence Table Edit Mode enabled when window is opened User Link Table Register Tag Name automatically when connected to Field Terminal Set default to update refresh cycle of User Link when LCU LCB element is downloaded Connection Map Always update the contents of connection map Scale Set the display zoom for function block diagrams
335. ks Data for anoth er Special Unit will be read and written if an incorrect unit number is used e Make sure the initial settings in the System Common Block in the Loop Control ler are correct Check that the DM Area words for the Node Terminal Function Block in the CPU Unit of the Loop Control Unit will not be used for any other purpose e When writing data to the I O memory in the CPU Unit with function blocks e g using Send All Blocks Expanded DO AO Terminal to CPU Unit or DO AO Ter minal to CPU Unit for a Loop Control Unit and using user link tables and the HMI function for an LCBL JL be sure that the words written to in the I O memory are not being used for any other purpose If I O memory words are allocated to more than one purpose the PLC system may act unexpectedly and cause injury Take the following steps to execute run stop commands 1 2 3 1 Select Operation and Run Stop Command from the Execute Menu The following dialog box will appear Hun 5Stop command 00 LCBOT Hun Stopped Hot Start Start from 5 Cold Start Start from back up data Execute Refresh Cancel 2 Select Hot Start to hot start the Loop Control Unit Board Select Cold Start to cold start the Loop Control Unit Board Run Stop Command 11 Section 44 3 Click the Execute Button As shown below HOT START or COLD START will appear in the Run Status Field Hun 5Stop command 00 LCBO
336. layed as in the follow ing figure A CAL icon will be displayed in the upper right corner ITEMs set as input values will be outlined 0011 Basic Exiting Calibration Mode Use the following procedure to exit calibration mode T 2 d 1 Confirm the operation of block diagrams 2 Right click a function block for which the Calibration Mode is to be exited Right click and select Wireless Debug from the pop up window 3 A dialog box will be displayed Select the None Option for debugging set tings 4 Click the OK or Apply Button 4 6 5 Forced Changes to Analog Output Signals From the above Validate Action Screen analog output signal values can be changed forcibly after sending the stop block operation command to the function block Take the following steps 276 Operation Check Section 4 6 1 2 3 1 Double click the function block Example The following Send Dialog Box will appear 2 Click the Stop Block Operation Button 3 Change the analog output signal value 4 Click the Execute Button The function block in the block diagram will display the following changes e Stopped will appear on upper side of the function block e The SP has been forcibly changed to 30 00 Therefore 30 00 will appear below the SP Note The new value must be within the permissible range of the ITEM otherwise an error will result and the CX Process Tool will end the 277 Operation Check Sectio
337. lder 2 2 The following dialog box will be displayed New Project Name x New Project Name Cancel Enter the project name and click the OK Button The new Project Workspace and a project folder with the project name will be created The project name set in the New Project Name Dialog Box will appear as the Project Workspace name on the right of the top folder on the Project Work space Window The name will appear in the title bar as well Note 1 The selection of New from the File menu does not just create new Project Workspace but also creates a new project folder If a project of the same name already exists a dialog box will appear with a message stating the existence of the specified project folder name and you will be asked if the operation should be aborted The following dialog box will appear Select the LCU LCB number input the title name of the LCU LCB element and click the OK Button The LCU LCB element will contain the data for a single Loop Controller The default name LC Type LCB LCU Number Model LCBO5 will appear The title name of the LCU LCB element can be input within 26 characters 2 N Inset LCB LCU X r LC Type 1 LCB LCU Loop CPU Unit Process CPU Unit Information Number Model 00 1 05 Unit Ver v2 00 Title FEDT Note If LCB Unit version 3 00 or later is selected it will not be possible to convert the data for use wit
338. le S ample2 Files af type Multi Node File mul Cancel 3 Select the multi node file mul In the following example equipment is selected Open EE Look in E Equipment A c eMe File name Equipment Files af type File mul Cancel 4 Click the Open Button All the related files in the project folder will be loaded to the Project Work space 3 1 12 Editing Projects Changing the LC Type To convert the number model and unit version to a different number model and unit version select Execution Change LC Type For combinations of possible changes refer to Appendix A Table of LC Type Changes Note If LCB Unit version 3 00 or later is selected it will not be possible to convert the data for use with LCB Unit version 2 00 or earlier as described later Confirm the LCB version before creating an LCB Note The communications settings return to the default values after changing the model Creating Comments for Projects and Function Block Files e You can create a user comment for the Project Workspace project folder Right click the Project Workspace folder then select System Job Informa 129 Section 3 1 Creating Function Block tion from the pop up menu The following Register System Job Information Dialog Box will appear Input the comment and click the OK Button Register system job information Revision date 2002 TE 7 S
339. le is being compiled click Next Node in the Compile Monitor Tags Dialog Box and then repeat step 2 above 5 After the compilation click Exit in the Compile Monitor Tags Dialog Box Note To check monitor tag duplication click the Check Overlapping Button in the Compile Monitor Tags Dialog Box The following Result Screen will appear ja Check Tag Error result Ma Result 1 There is no Tag overlapping gt Note 1 It is necessary to install the CX Process Monitor the same personal com puter before creating monitor tag files 2 On completion of the above compilation a monitor tag file with a fixed file name for monitor tag data for the CPU Unit will be created in the following folder omron CX Process Process Monitor db The underlined part is the folder of CX Process Monitor File names mtagmst and mtagsubmst 3 Compile the monitor tag file again in any of the following cases e The function blocks for data exchange with the CX Process Monitor are changed i e the source of the Block Send Terminal to Computer is changed e The monitor tags are changed e The network address node address or unit address is changed 3 2 2 Validate the Monitor Tag List You can display lists of the monitor tags for the LCU LCB elements function block files or Project Workspace 136 Using the CX Process Monitor Section 3 2 Note The data is displayed after the settings have been made You can dis play th
340. lements and 1 LCBI 1 Element 1 2 3 1 Selectthe active function block file from the Project Workspace and then select Print and Cross Reference from the File Menu 2 One cross reference will be printed per page You can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The cross references in active function block file will start printing 3 11 6 Printing Monitor Tag Lists Loop Control Units Only Printing an Active i e Currently Open Monitor Tag List 1 2 3 1 Display the monitor tag lists Select Execution and then Monitor Tag List 2 Right click the Monitor Tag List Window and then select Print Monitor Tag List from the pop up menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing Printing for an LCU LCB Element 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element from the Project Workspace and then select Print and Monitor Tag List from the File Menu 2 You can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The ladder diagrams in the LCU LCB element will start printing Printing for a Node 3 LCU LCB Elements Maximum 1 2 3 1 Select the active function block file from the Project Workspace and then select Print and Monitor Tag List from the File Menu 2 You
341. ler Link is used manually set the above network address and node ad dress using the FinsGateway manual setting If the manual settings are not made or different addresses are set no online connections will be possible After the above settings select the LCU element LC001 1 to LC001 3 and se lect Network Settings from the Settings Menu The following dialog box will ap pear with the network address and node address already set Setup network address LOU 01 16001 1 Network address foot Mode address o Unit address E 6 31 CEREREM 1 Input the unit address between 16 and 31 into the Unit Address Field The unit address is between 16 and 31 10 and 1F Hex In other words add 16 10 Hex to the unit number between and 15 0 to F Hex set on the rotary switches on the front panel of the Loop Control Unit as a CPU Bus Unit 2 Click the OK Button In addition to manually setting the addresses as described above they can also be set automatically by searching for Loop Controllers connected to networks of the PLC connected to the CX Process Tool Select the LCU element and then select Find LCU LCB from the File Menu This can be performed even before initializing serial communications Refer to Automatically Setting Addresses page 245 for details If the Controller Link is used it is necessary to start the FinsGateway commu nications service manually Select FinsGateway Settings from the FinsGate way
342. licked the results of the error check will be displayed when the file is compiled To add user link table tags to the CSV tag file for LCBI I Js select Add User Link Table Information 2 Click the OK Button The execution results will be displayed in the Output Window Error Display Check Tag Error result Ma Result Max 1000 tems to show 1 000 06 16 Tag which exceeds the number of blacks of the registration by the send and the receive block is registered 2 000 06 16 Same memory area ig used by sending and receiving Block 3 000 06 225 At Black address000 CS Tag is not defined 4 000 225 0043 duplicated tag name duplicated pair 000 06 17 001 1 dA il The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation x Continue compile operation x Click the Cancel Button and correct the error For example if the mes sage says a CSV tag is not registered for a certain block address regis ter the CSV tag If the OK Button is pressed even though there is an error the same dialog box as for when no error occurs will be displayed Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 The following window will be displayed if there are no errors Save As Ed Ed Save in sample ni LnkT able csv a sample css File name Save type csv File Cancel 3 Set the folder and name for the CSV tag file and click the Save Button
343. lidated Model 302 New function blocks Sequence Table Block Model 302 and Ao Terminal PMVO2 Block Model 565 Supported by the CS1W LCBO5 Loop Control Board only Function block registration methods Registering function In addition to the V2 50 method function blocks blocks with the Function can also be specified and pasted directly on the Block Navigator and block diagrams Function blocks can be then pasting them specified after right clicking on the block diagram Connection maps Not supported Supported A diagram of the I O relationships for one block can be displayed after selecting the block Conversion of LCU LCB element data Not supported CS1W LCBO 1 Loop Control Board data can be between Loop Controller models converted to C81W LCBO05 Loop Control Board data CS1W LCO001 Loop Control Unit data can be converted to CS1W LCBO1 CS1W LCB05 Loop Control Board data Downloading block diagram information Not supported When downloading individual function blocks layout information for the block from the block diagram can also be downloaded Controlling CPU Unit operation Not supported If the CX Server is specified as the communications driver tables can be created the PLC Setup can be set and the CPU Unit s operating mode can be controlled Data monitoring refresh cycle for PVs 1 s only Either 1 s or 200 ms can be selected A red SPs alarms and other data on Tuning warning display will appear when t
344. llShield 53 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 Select the destination location and click the Next Button By default the CX Process Tool will be installed in the following location C Program Files OMRON CX One CX Process TooN 6 The Setup Type Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard 1 x Setup Type Select the setup type to install Please select a setup type 79 All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space tof C Custom Select which program features you want installed Recommended for Lo advanced users InstallShield lt Back Cancel Select the Complete or Custom Option and click the Next Button 7 The Select Features Dialog Box will be displayed if Custom was selected CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard Select Features Select the features setup will install mf Select the features you want to install and deselect the features you do not want to install ae m Description z CX Server CX Process Main PLET ools 241 30 MB of space required on the C drive 13352 17 MB of space available on the C drive Installshield lt Back Cancel Note The above dialog box will not be displayed if Complete is selected Proceed to step 8 Select the features to be installed and click the Next Button Options CX Process T
345. lled auto tuning AT For details of the AT function refer to the section on Basic PID 011 in the Function Block Reference Manual for the Loop Controller Loop Control Units W375 15 W407 AT can be set in the same way as the other settings as shown below 1 2 3 1 If the value for AT displayed in the upper left region of the Tuning Screen is 0 then AT is not being executed 2 Click AT The Change Data Dialog Box shown below will be displayed Change data 1 Execute AT 0 Cancel Old data 0 New data 3 To execute AT input 1 in the New Data Field 4 Click the OK Button AT will be executed see note The value for AT dis played in the upper left region of the Tuning Screen will change to 1 5 When the PID constants have been calculated and stored and AT has been completed the value for AT displayed in the upper left region of the Tuning Screen will return to O Note Execution of AT can be cancelled from the above dialog box by inputting O in the New Data Field and clicking the OK Button The value for AT displayed in the upper left region of the Tuning Screen will return to O Changing P I and D The following example shows how to change P the proportional band 1 2 3 1 Click Proportional Band P displayed in the upper center of the screen The Change Data Dialog Box will be displayed Change data Ed P Band Old data 100 0 New data Cancel 2 Click the
346. lock to be pasted in the left pane the Project Workspace 5 Right click the location at which the block will be pasted in the right pane and select Paste Function Block from the pop up window The function block diagram will be pasted as shown in the following figure CX Process Tool DeviceA Node00 E Bl File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help pew 90 Sele alsa 88 2 NodeO0 1 5 3 0 Block Diagram 1 1 za EN CS1G H CPU42 Cycle System common operation cycle C 00 LCBOS v3 0 225 01 System C3 02 Field Terminal n 901 uS 001 901 AI 4 point 0041 MES 15 902 AO 4 point DA041 Al 4 point 041 Basic PID Yi eS AJ ABN 1 03 Sequence Control Lj 04 Block Diagram 1 001 Basic PID 2 22 002 Basic PID EL J a 003 Square Root DE J F AN 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 m 9 1 06 Block Diagram 3 E a lt 003 902 Square Root Basic PID AQ 4 point 0041 Y1 B 5E _ LCBOS 3 0 Net 0 Node 0 Changing Function Block Positions Left click the block The hand icon i e mouse cursor will form a gripped hand Drag the gripped hand icon to the specified
347. ls on model numbers see 1 6 4 Connecting Cables Using CX Server Communications protocol with PLC Host Link or Peripheral Bus The compatible connecting cables are the same as the ones shown above for the FinsGateway connection Connection via Using FinsGateway Install the driver in a computer equipped with a Controller Link Controller Link CLK PCI Driver Support Board PCI slot to support communications between the computer and PLCs equipped with a Controller Link Unit Using FinsGateway Install the driver in a computer equipped with a Controller Link Controller Link Support Board ISA slot to support communications between Driver or CX Server the computer and PLCs equipped with a Controller Link Unit Connection via Using FinsGateway Install the driver in a computer equipped with an Ethernet to Ethernet ETN UNIT Driver or support communications between the computer and PLCs CX Server equipped with an Ethernet Unit 13 CX Process Tool Specifications Section 1 3 tem Specification Files that are created The following files are created in the project folder e Multi node files mul for Project Workspace Created by user e Function block files ist consisting of initial set data and operation data Created by the system e Block diagram information files mtbd Created by the system e Mnemonics ladder diagram information files mtld Created by the system e Monitor tag
348. ly Downloading Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element LCBO1 5 5 LC001 1 to L C001 3 or function block and select Transfer to LC Selected from the Execute Menu The following dialog box will appear unless the data in function blocks are to be downloaded All Clear 00 LEBUT Clear all registered function blocks before downloading i Cancel 253 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 2 Click the OK Button to overwrite the function block file in the destination Loop Controller The following dialog box will appear unless the data in func tion blocks are to be downloaded 2 Clear exsisting data Are sure Cancel 3 The following dialog box will appear Select the field e Initial setting data S Initial settings for each function block and step ladder programs e Operation data O Operating parameters for each function block This cannot be selected for LCU LCB element downloads e Initial setting data and operation data S and All the above items The data in an LCU LCB element in the function block file ist and mnemonic data LCB Download All Blocks Ea Start downloading System will be stopped Sending Status r d Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 PC gt LCB Start Cancel w Update User Link Table refresh cycle v LCB back up indication after download v D
349. ly save CSV tag settings in this file when function blocks are registered The tag name will be Tag block address the scaling upper limit will be 1 000 and the scaling lower limit will be O If this file is edited with Excel or another editor and overwritten the new settings will be read when the project is opened A CSV tag file can contain CSV tag data for up to 32 CPU Units i e up to 96 Loop Control Units and 32 LCBLI 1L 5 CSV tag data consists of comma delimited test data containing tag names num bers tag comments block addresses tag ITEMs and allocated I O memory ad dresses in CPU Unit The CSV tag file can be read from SCADA software via an OMRON OPC Server to specify block addresses and ITEM numbers in the function block data of the Loop Controller Settings Tag Setting CSV Tag is used to set CSV tags for each function block and Execute Create Tag File CSV Tag is used to allocate I O memory ad dresses in the CPU Unit and compile a CSV tag file 1 CSV tag files are not downloaded uploaded or compared 2 Basically speaking CSV tag files are imported to SCADA software through an OMRON OPC server An RS View tag file can contain CSV tag data for up to 32 CPU Units i e up to 96 Loop Control Units and 32 LCBI 1L Js for direct importing into RS View 32 Any file name can be specified The RS View tag file can be directly imported using the RS View import utility This file is created together with the S
350. ly when a table is being validated Expand Vertical Expands the number of conditional operations Edit Mode in a sequence table Horizontal Expands the number of rules in a sequence table Reference Setting Main Table Sets the selected sequence table as the main table Reference Sets the selected sequence table as the Table reference table Execute Form Every Cycle Sets the sequence table to be executed every cycle Start by S1 Sets the sequence table to be started by S1 Start Only First Sets the sequence table to be executed on the Cycle first cycle Not Execute Set the sequence table so that it s not started View Point Nav Enable Displays intersection points Options igation Vertical Show Displays vertical lines Line Edit Edit Block Item Displays and edits a list of ITEMs for the When a signal is selected function blocks that are the source and destination for the selected signal User Link Table Displays and edits user link table for the function blocks that are the source and When a signal is selected destination for the selected signal Find Sequence Table Block Moves the cursor to the function block that corresponds to the currently open sequence table in the Project Workspace Scale 100 Displays the connection diagram at 100 200 Displays the connection diagram at 200 Displays the connection diagram at 50 Zoom In Alt Increases the size of the connection diagram Right display
351. m INe DS Values of inputs IN 7 um 1to8 zd 28900 12345678 soo Upper limit of range Bar display of inputs 1 to 8 s Lower limit of range Tm 12616 X Values of outputs 1 and2 A 0072 32000 x Bar Display of Inputs 1 to 8 These bars show values of inputs 1 to 8 within their range lower limit to upper limit The bars are displayed in differ ent colors to distinguish the bars Bar display for reference input value Run Command Display Button Stop Command STOP PAUSE Display Button a PV Bar Display This bar shows the PV range lower limit to upper limit Green Status normal Red Deviation Alarm DHH DH DL or DLL occurred Yellow MV Limit High Low Blue Alarm OFF Light blue Function block calculations stopped Segment Program 2 157 Tag name __ Sea PG2 Segment PG2 __ Reference input 1 value display Y1 57 37 NI Program output numerical value Position of program Move Next Wait output value display E Command Button Red during WAIT T Move to Next Step CNN Command Button Time Axis Hold Ene Cancel Button Time Axis Hold Button esp s Step number executing 301 Tuning Section 4 7 4 7 5 Operation Procedures Auto tuning AT It is possible to automatically calculate and store the PID constants used for Ba sic PID 011 or Advanced PID 012 This function is ca
352. management is being performed on one OPC Server To use this option any RS View tag file output on the local computer must be transferred to the remote server A file ona client cannot be complied by the remote server Refer to the SYSMAC OPC Server Operation Manual for information on designating remote servers Note Specify the data settings for tag com pilation the OPC tag file name and the file name for creating the RS View CSV tag file using absolute paths on the remote server When specifying a SCADA tag file Taglist csv for compilation select this option and specify the SCADA tag file If this option is selected The OPC Server group name will be the same as the CSV tag file tag name representative tags and the OPC Server tag name will be the same as the CSV tag file ITEM tag name If this option is not selected The OPC Server tag name will be the same as the CSV tag file tag name representative tags and the ITEM name will be added after an underscore Select this option to add the symbol information for the symbols for all local symbol tables in the current CXP project for CX Programmer running on the same computer Specify the location for automatic generation of the OPC tag settings file sbd the OPC Server binary file Specify the output folder and file name for the RS View tag file Use the file specified here to import the CX Process Tool tags to the RS View 32 tag data base Use the Database Import a
353. me for version code for the version code for Loop Controller element CPU Unit element Loop Controller ele ment LOOP CONTROL BOARD Lot No 031025 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Functional element version code for Loop Controller element Loop control CPU Units Loop control CPU Unit Unit model number Product model and functional element name Product nameplate Functional element we omnon CJ1 G CPU44P version code for LOOP CPU UNIT CPU unit element Functional element version code for 3 0 LCB Ver 2 0 640713 Loop Controller OMRON MADE IN JAPAN element Recommended location for attaching version label Lot No Confirming CPU Unit Element Versions with Support Software CX Programmer version 4 0 can be used to confirm the unit version using either of the following two methods e Using the PLC Information e Using the Unit Manufacturing Information This method can also be used for Special Units and CPU Bus Units Note CX Programmer version 3 3 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions PLC Information 1 2 3 1 If you know the device type and CPU type select them in the Change PLC dialog box go online and select PLC Edit Information from the menus If you do not know the device type and CPU type but are connected directly to the CPU Unit on a serial line select PLC Auto Online to go online and then select PLC Edit
354. memory to RAM e Converting LCU LCB element data between different models of Loop Controller Online operation functions Downloading of function block data download upload to and from Loop Controllers Comparing between node function block files including mnemonics and Loop Controllers Run stop command for Loop Controllers all function blocks System monitor run status Monitoring manipulation of System Common block Block Model 000 including monitoring of load rate of function blocks in each operation cycle group e Loop Controller monitor run status Confirmation of function block wiring operation in cluding operation stop stop cancel on each function block confirmation of Step Lad der Program operation Changing SPs and tuning parameters such as PID constants in function blocks Control Blocks e Initializing RAM in the Loop Controller e Backing up function block data from RAM to flash memory in the Loop Controller block and restoring the data to RAM e Creating tables online only e Setting the PLC Setup e Changing the CPU Unit s operating mode Note The Windows Vista 64 bit version and Windows XP x64 Edition are not sup ported 14 Version Improvements Section 1 4 1 4 Version Improvements 1 4 1 Version 1 20 The improvements made from version 1 00 to version 1 20 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table tem Ver100 Ver 120 Maximum number of function data nodes 1 node 31
355. menu or select Execution Transfer to LC Selected from the Main Menu Automatic Registration of Step Data Blocks Step data blocks are automatically registered according to the following rules depending on the number of steps to be used e Step data blocks are registered in the function block group in which Segment Program 3 Block Model 158 is registered e Step data blocks are registered in descending order from the highest available function block address LCBO1 CJ1G CPU42P 50 49 48 331 Setting Segment Programs Appendix C CS1W LCBO05 500 499 498 CJ1G CPUA3 44 45P 300 299 298 e When the maximum number of steps to be used is increased rule 2 is followed When the number is decreased step data blocks are removed in ascending order from the lowest function block address Setting Bank Data To edit bank data press the Bank Setting Button in the Segment Program 3 Edit Screen The following Edit Bank Parameters Window will be displayed For details on editing refer to Edit Window Functions olx NEN D MH Extra Datal Extra Extra D ata3 Extra 4 1E 1006 0 D 10500 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 21 1000 0 D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 3 1000 0 D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 4 1000 0 D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 5 1000 0 D 10500 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 B 1000 0 D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1000 0 D 10500 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 8 1000 0 D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 g 1000 0 D 105 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0
356. mmended that function files are saved regular ly Do not connect pin 6 5 V power supply line of the RS 232C port on the CPU Unit to any external device except the CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Adapter or NT ALOO1 RS 232C RS 422A Adapter Doing so may damage the external device or CPU Unit SECTION 1 Introduction This section introduces the operations of the CX Process Tool and connections to the PLC D OPO Cees TOOL hosts A PRODR db Ard ed Ge Aris 2 RERUM 2 1 1 2 Project Workspace bes 3 1 1 3 Files Created with CX Process 1 3 1 1 4 Relationships between Tag Files 1 1 5 Operating Conditions of CX Process Tool 8 1 2 Relationship with CX Process Monitor 9 1 2 1 Overview of the CX Process Monitor and CX Process Monitor Plus 9 1 2 2 Settings Required on the CX Process Tool 9 1 3 CX Process Tool Specifications oe we eri Ged hoe ed Robe denos 13 b4 Version Improvements a eek oe wed Seek deans So 15 lat vernon A een duri carm hark be 15 F42 Verion adstat ead we op ee EGO dec MS 16 Versio Sosa ti ek plea a see e RUN RR EE ie rd 17 Ee C PERR
357. mmu nications Driver to Start Display from the File Menu Restart the CX Pro cess Tool and select FinsGateway from the above dialog box 3 For details on changing the communications driver when creating a project refer to 3 1 12 Editing Projects Starting the CX Process Tool from the I O Tables The CX Process Tool can be started from the I O tables when the CX Process Tool has been installed together with the CX Programmer from the CX One Starting from the I O tables provides the following advantages e The I O tables can be controlled as a single PLC System e The communications settings made with the CX Programmer can be inher ited so there is no need to make the settings again for the CX Process Tool Note With this start method CX Server is automatically used as the communications driver 1 2 3 1 Right click the Loop Control Board or Unit in the I O Table Window opened from the CX Programmer that was installed from the CX One and select Start Special Application Start with Settings Inherited 100 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Name in Unit Selection Dialog Loop Control Board or Loop CJIGH Loop Controller CS1G H CS1H H CPULIL CS1W LCBO1 Loop Control Board CS1W LCBO5 Loop Control Board CS1H H CPU65 67 CS1D LCBOBD Loop Control Board CS1G H CS1H H CS1W LCO01 Loop Control Unit CS1G CS1H Example Right click the Loop Control Board e g CS1W LCBO5 PLC IO Table Ne
358. mory Card Insert a Memory Card Memory Card containing backup files ERROR ERROR The backup data in the Memory Setthe backup data in the Memory Card to read write The CODE CODE Card is set to read only path name of the files is as follows 2101 2101 lt memory_card gt LCBDATA CFBackUp dat ERROR ERROR The number of files in the Delete files from the Memory Card CODE CODE Memory Card has reached the 2103 2103 limit There are no backup files in the There are old backup files in the Memory Card in the Memory Card active CPU Unit when duplex Memory Card operation is being used for Duplex Process control CPU Units CS1D CPU6L JP Delete the old backup files from the Memory Card Not all ITEMs can be written while operation is suspended LCBO5D only The backup clear A backup clear all recover or download cannot be all recovery or download performed during CPU Unit duplex initialization processing operation was attempted during Perform the backup clear all recovery or download after CPU Unit duplex initialization the CPU Unit duplex initialization processing has been processing completed There is no Memory Card inserted Insert the Memory Card properly When using duplex Memory Card operation for Duplex Process control CPU Units CS1D CPUG6L JP place the same backup files in the Memory Cards for both the active and standby CPU Units ERROR CODE 250F ERROR The data in the Memory Card is E
359. mory Card backup is not required when the Memory Card is installed disable the option to transfer data from the Memory Card 2 Use an OMRON Memory Card Operations may be unstable if a non OMRON Memory Card compact flash memory is used File memory Memory Memory capacity type Memory Card Flash 15 Mbytes HMC EF172 memory 30 Mbytes HMC EF372 lt a 64 Mbytes HMC EF672 Note 1 A Memory Card can be written up to approximately 100 000 times Each write operation to the Memory Card must be counted regardless of the size of the write Be particularly careful not to exceed the life of the Memory Card when writing to it from the ladder program 311 Transferring Tag and Comment Data Section 4 9 2 The HMC APO001 Memory Card Adapter is shown below For details on the Memory Card refer to the SYSMAC CS series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 Note 1 Never turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BUSY indicator is lit The Memory Card may become unusable if this is done 2 Never remove the Memory Card from the CPU Unit when the BUSY indica tor is lit Press the Memory Card power OFF button and wait for the Card may become unusable if this is not done 312 Clear Section 4 10 4 10 Clear All This section provides information on how to clear all the function block data and error log data from the Loop Controller Take the following steps to clear all the data 1 2 3 1 Sele
360. mouse or the keyboard Hed Cycle is not within specified value 1 s or 200 ms CX Process Tool Tuning screen stop block 0 Alarm HH 115 00 P Band P 100 0 MH 105 00 stop alarm D Alarm H 100 00 1 time 1 Ds ML 5 00 d Tag name Alarm L 0 00 D time D Os Alarm LL 15 00 Manual Pointer 0 00 l PV Set operation or alarm to 11500 Units 1 to stop their operation l l T SP Trend data gathering and display Units starts when the Screen is displayed Upper limit of range Lower limit of range bom L J yY Select these buttons to display the dialog boxes for changing the settings Face plate control for the selected function block See 4 7 4 Face Plate Controls for details e he face plate control for the selected function block will be displayed on the right side of the window The trend chart for the function block s SP PV and MV values will be displayed on the left side of the window e The face plate control will display the Scaling range upper limit and lower lim it Decimal point position and Units that were set in the Tuning Screen Config uration Dialog Box e The trend chart displays the SP and PV values after scaling the Y axis values but the MV chart is displayed in full scale with a lower limit of 0 and upper limit of 100 e The function block s tag name set in the Tuning Screen Settings Dialog
361. n BLOCK Inputs a BLOCK SET instruction SET BLOCK Inputs a BLOCK RESET instruction RESET JUMP Inputs a JUMP instruction STEP Inputs a STEP TIMER instruction TIMER ALARM Inputs a ALARM TIMER instruction TIMER Annota Inputs a comment tion Selected Edit Same as selecting Selected Annotation Annotation Edit from the Manipulate Ladder Menu Bring to Front Displays the selected annotation in front of other annotations Send to Back Displays the selected annotation behind other annotations When an annotation is selected Send Behind Symbols Makes the selected annotation and Lines transparent Changes the selected annotation s font size Cut Cuts a selected symbol area or line When a symbol area or row is and places it in the special copy buffer selected for CS Process Tool i e not on the clipboard Copy Copies a selected symbol area or line When a symbol area or row is and places it in the special copy buffer selected for CS Process Tool i e not on the clipboard Paste Pastes the symbol area or line from When an area that can be pasted to is the special copy buffer for CS Process selected Tool i e not from the clipboard 93 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Deletes an instruction When an instruction symbol is selected Invert Same as selecting Invert NOT from When a reversible symbol is selected the Manipulate Ladde
362. n Blocks cannot be registered in the CX Process Monitor on a Tuning Screen AO or DO to Computer or AO or DO Terminal to All Nodes Block Models 401 402 or 407 408 Select the AO or DO to Computer or AO or DO Terminal to All Nodes and then select Tag Setting Monitor Tag from the Settings Menu The following Monitor Tags dialog box will appear Set the tag name and tag comment for the analog input ITEM or contact input ITEM Input the scale range high limit and range low limit decimal position and unit data items and then click the OK Button The following symbols are used in the fields RH Range high limit RL Range low limit DP Decimal position UNIT Unit 133 Using the CX Process Monitor Section 3 2 Note 134 Example for Analog Inputs Monitor Tag LEU Ma 1 LEU Comment LCO01 1 Block Address FO Function Block model 402 Function Black name to Computer RL DP 00 Analog Input 01 Analog Input 02 Input 3 Analog Input 04 Analog Input 5 Analog Input 06 Analog Input OF Analog Input JB Analog Input 09 Analog Input 10 Analog Input 11 Analog Input 12 Analog Input 13 Analog Input 14 Analog Input 15 Analog Input gt Cancel AO or DO Terminal Settings from Computer Block Models 409 410 Select AO or DO Terminal Settings from Computer and then select Tag Setting Monitor Tag from the Settings Menu The following Monitor Tags dialog will ap pear Se
363. n 4 6 Validate Action Mode Refer to the data range of each ITEM in the Function Block Reference Manual 4 6 6 Ladder Diagram Operation Check The following description provides information on how to check the operation of ladder diagrams for the Loop Controller in Validate Action Mode The following data of step ladders block model 301 will be displayed or set e Display of the status of contact ITEM e Force set or reset of contact ITEM e Stop block operation Cancel stop of function blocks incorporating contact ITEMs Ladder Diagram Operation Check CX Process Tool Display of status of Forced setting or contact signals forced resetting of contact signals Loop Controller ERES Ladder diagram Changing to Ladder Take the following steps to change the CX Process Tool to Validate Action Diagram Validate Action Mode Mode 1 2 3 1 Select the block diagram folder and select Edit Step Ladder Program from the Settings Menu The ladder diagram will appear 2 Select Start from the Validate Action Menu The following screen will appear and the cursor will change to the icon Displaying Contact ITEM The status of the ITEM will be displayed by 1 or O below the contact Status Note For a normally closed contact will be displayed if the ITEM is 0 When the contact is closed 1 will be displayed 278 Operation Check Section 4 6 Forced setting or Forced resetting of Contact ITEMs 1
364. n Black Group Joon All Black lTEM Joon Mat set System Common ITEM 007 FAIL CPU Llinit Fatal error User Link Table Entry E Tag name display Input the block address and ITEM number Here select ITEM 026 at block address 001 and click the OK Button Note In the ladder diagram will appear between the block address and ITEM number 001 02 6 To input an output instruction such as OUT for example click the instruction on the right edge i e the Manipulate Ladder position and input the instruction in a method similar to the one used for input instructions Note You cannot use Internal Switch as an operand for an output instruc tion such as OUT 7 Connect the right edge of the input instruction written at the condition posi tion to the output instruction written at the operation position To draw a vertical or horizontal line click the f icon and move the cursor to the start point Click the start point with the left mouse button drag the mouse and release the button at the end point To delete lines drawn in the above steps click the x icon and move the cursor to the start point Click at the start point drag the mouse and release the button at the end point 182 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 Ladder Example X z 2 8 J Note 1 The ladder diagram display can be zoomed into by press
365. n OFF pin 4 or the PRPHL for a CS1D Duplex System of the DIP Switch when using the peripheral port 249 Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 Initial Settings in CX Process Tool 1 2 3 Setting Unit Addresses Loop Control Units Only 250 Note e Turn ON pin 5 or the COMM pin for a CS1D Duplex System of the DIP Switch when using the RS 232C port Also set the appropriate word in the PLC Setup Programming Console address 160 to 0400 Hex After completing the steps described above take the following steps in the CX Process Tool 1 Select Change PLC from the Settings Menu 2 The Change PLC Dialog Box will be displayed Select Toolbus Peripheral Bus as the network type 3 If necessary the Network Settings Dialog Box can be displayed by clicking the Settings S Button next to the network type The port name COM port number can be selected in the Driver Tab When CX Server has been selected as the communications driver set the node address to a non zero value in the Network Settings Dialog Box before compiling the Monitor tag file or CSV tag file Select Change PLC from the Settings Menu to display the dialog box If the computer is connected online return the node address setting to O The unit address setting for the Peripheral Bus connection is the same as the unit address setting for the serial connection Refer to Setting Unit Addresses on page 249 for details Downloading
366. n block automatically In the above example Square Root Block ITEM 007 will store the following block address of the destination and ITEM number E Model LOBOS 04 003 Square Root B x ITEM Type ITEM tag Data lt Initial setting dat COMMENT Rooter Comment 5 MODEL 131 Modeksquare Root 5 TMEX System operation Operation cycle common 2 SCAN 2000 Operation order 5 901 022 M1 source designation lt Operation data gt k 1 000 Gain o 0 00 Input low end cutout setting 117 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Other Editing Functions Selecting Lines Deleting Lines Copying Block Diagrams 118 For example for the Basic PID Block the PV destination block address and ITEM will be stored E Modell LOBOS 04001 Basic PID nm x ITEM Type Daa Dat Name amp Initial setting dat 5 COMMENT Basic PID Comment 5 MODEL 011 Model Basic PID 5 CNT TMEX System operation Operation cycle O cammon a SGAN NO 2000 Operation order 5 PV AD 901 021 PY source designation a SP 00 Hysteresis setting 5 PVE AD 000 000 PV error source designation 5 0 Alarm limit 5 0 000 000 RSP source e Selecting One Line The line will be highlighted in red when it is right clicked Use this procedure mainly for deleting lines e Selecting All Lines Connected to an
367. nable reusing the user defined block 3 6 2 How User defined Blocks Work Configuration User defined blocks consist of the following 1 2 3 1 A group of function blocks the algorithm indicated in dotted lines in the dia gram 2 A virtual block that functions as the input interface block to handle input data for the above group of blocks 173 Creating User defined Blocks Section 3 6 3 A virtual block that functions as the output interface block to handle output data for the above group of blocks 3 Output interface block 2 Input interface block 1 Algorithm registered as one group DESI E EU EE External l External inputs to i outputs from user defined input Output user defined block interface pintenace block l l l III Note The only external I O for a user defined block are the analog I O con nected to the input and output interfaces Reading and writing ITEMs in the function blocks within the user defined block is performed in the same way as for any other function block Function Blocks Not The following function blocks cannot be used in user defined blocks Supported in User defined Blocks Field Terminals e User link tables e Sequence tables e Step ladders Create these function blocks outside of the user defined blocks The CX Process Tool version 4 0 or higher is required to register step ladder blocks in user defined blocks All other function
368. nction block is selected Settings Menu Paste Same as selecting Function Block Paste from the When a function block is selected Settings Menu Increment Same as selecting Function Block Increment Block When a function block is selected Block Address from the Settings Menu Address FBD Cop Copy Same as selecting FBD Copy from the Settings Menu When a block diagram is selected _ a block When a block diagram is selected _ is selected Same as selecting FBD Paste from the Settings Menu When an LCU or LCB element is selected Create Same as selecting User defined Block Create from the When a function block diagram is Settings Menu selected Helease Same as selecting User defined Block Remove from When a user defined block is the Settings Menu selected Import Same as selecting User defined Block Import from the When an LCU or LCB element is Settings Menu selected Export Same as selecting User defined Block Export from the When a function block diagram is Settings Menu selected 80 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up menu Description Conditions for selection command Monitor ITEM List Same as selecting Monitor ITEM List from the When the cursor is positioned on a Execution Menu function block that has been Tuning Same as selecting Monitor Tuning Screen from the pasted Screen Execution Menu Transfer to LC Same as selecting Download from the Execution Menu When an LCU or LCB element is selecte
369. nd 001 STEP 00 d Click the Operand Field If it is a contact ITEM input the operand i e block address and ITEM number in six digits Example 001013 Note In the ladder diagram will appear between the block address and ITEM number In mnemonics do not insert between the block ad dress and ITEM number when inputting data LCBO1 701 Mnemonics Command Operand 001 STEP 00 2 LOAD 001013 e Click a blank area or press the Return Key so that the highlighted portion will return to normal LCBO1 701 Mnemonics f Click Insert Row The next row will be highlighted as shown below LCBO1 701 Mnemonics Command perand Name 001 STEP 00 002 LOAD 001013 g Input the remaining instructions h Click the OK Button If nothing can be input press the Esc Key Note To delete a row highlight the row and click Delete Row 189 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 Mnemonic Input Example 701 Mnemonics Command Operand 00 LOAD 001013 OUT 100011 LOAD 100011 ENSE ERSEERSSERSEEESEEESEERSEEESER ERE RRERERERERERERERERRESRREERREERREENRESRRERERSRRRS HERR LLL HRS HERR I Insert Row Delete Row Refresh Content of code has changed LK Cancel Converting Mnemonics Use the following procedure to convert a step ladder progr
370. nd Edit Step Ladder Program 2 Right click the ladder diagram window and then select Print Ladder Dia gram from the pop up menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Set the number of copies to be printed and then click the OK Button to start printing Note If there is more than one ladder diagram click the Print Button for each ladder diagram Printing Example 00 1 DEPT gt al S 001 019 001 026 001 0865 2 gt 2 s 0T 001 014 Printing for an LCU LCB Element 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element from the Project Workspace and then select Print and Ladder Diagram from the File Menu 2 To print all the ladder diagrams within the LCU LCB element select the All check box To select specific ladder diagrams for printing select the Select Area check box and specify the start ladder diagram and the end ladder dia gram Start End correspond to the start and end ladder diagram numbers registered in ascending order You can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The ladder diagrams in the LCU LCB element will start printing Printing for a Node 3 LCU Elements and 1 LCBI Element 1 2 3 1 Select the active function block files from the Project Workspace and then select Print and Ladder Diagram from the File Menu 2 You can also speci
371. nd Export Wizard to execute the import operation Specify the node name set for the OPC Server in the RS View 32 project Specify the type of file to output Tag Tag data only Tag Min Max unit Tag data plus additional information See note Note The additional information includes scaling information scaling upper lower limits and decimal point position units and data range upper lower limits calculated using scaling information Specify the group level If a level is not specified all tags will be output Tags in groups beyond the specified group level will not be output Specify process when array data is being output Select this option to convert integer data on the OPC Server to the default data type real on the RS View 32 Select this option to disable data in the OPC Server between 115 and 100 and between 15 and 0 This option treats data in the range 115 to 100 as 100 and data in the range 15 to 096 as 0 For example the data range for PID function block item HH is 15 00 to 4115 00 but data in the range 100 to 115 and 15 to 0 will be ignored and only data between 0 and 100 will be used 4 The following dialog box will appear if tag file was compiled correctly Cort ir tri X 7 Finished compiling CSV Tae 5 Click the OK Button 153 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Note OPC server direct access tags can also be added to the RS View tag file The pro
372. necting Cable XW2Z 2008 CV Connecting Cable Note The Peripheral Bus connection cannot be used with a Serial Communications Board or Unit 1 6 4 Connecting Cables The following table lists the Connecting Cables that can be used for Peripheral Bus and Host Link connections All of the cables connect to a male 9 pin D Sub serial port on an IBM PC AT or compatible computer UP nications Mode CPU Unit Built in peripheral port Host Link Toolbus Female 9 pin D SUB Host Link Anti static connector tions Board or Unit Male 9 pin D SUB SYSMAC WAY Note Touch a grounded metal to discharge all static electricity from your body before connecting any of the above cable connectors to the RS 232C port of the PLC The XW2Z LJLIL S CV Cable uses the anti static XM2S 0911 E Connector Hood For safety sake however discharge all static electricity from your body before touching the connector The following components are used to connect RS 232C cable to the peripheral port Connect to a male 9 pin D Sub serial port on an IBM PC AT or compatible computer Port location Serial Commu Length nications Mode CPU Unit Built in peripheral port Host Link CS1W CN118 O 1m The XW2Z L IL ILJS SYSMAC WAY XW2Z 200S CV_ 20 5 is an anti static or Peripheral Bus connector Toolbus ee CN118 XW2Z 5 V The following components are available for connecting the CQM1
373. nel Extention Setting OK X cancel Upper 10500 MY reversing Lower 500 3 Select the MV tight shut Check Box and enter the upper and lower limits See note Note The tight shut upper limit is always 320 0096 and the lower limit is 320 0096 MV Reversing MV reversing settings are made in user link tables for output attributes L2 9 1 Select the entry for the output attribute Right click and select Edit Exten sion from the pop up window 2 The Extension Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Extention Setting CPL OUT 1 X Channel Setting f Set ta all channel cancel Extention Setting Mv tight shut Upper 10000 Lower 0 3 Select the MV Reversing Check Box The MV tight shut and MV reversing functions can be set from the following field terminals The extension settings will be made automatically for the entries for user link table entries generated by the connection lines to each field terminal Applicable field terminal Tight shut upper limit Tight shut lower limit Isolated AO 4 point 115 0026 20 00 terminal 1 Isolated AO 4 point 115 0096 15 00 terminal PMVO2 Procedure for Settings from Field Terminals 1 2 3 1 Register the field terminal 2 Connect lines to function blocks 169 User Link Tables Section 3 5 3 Open the ITEM List Window for the field terminal right click the ITEM List
374. net Explorer 0831167 Size 15 7 Microsoft Data Access Components KB870669 7 OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition Size 56 7MB N 61 Outlook Express 0823353 Windows ji Virtual Machine Additions Size 970KB Components Windows 2000 Hotfix 823182 in Windows 2000 Hotfix 823559 ji Windows 2000 Hotfix KB824105 Set Program Access Windows 2000 Hotfix KB825119 Defaults Windows 2000 Hotfix 826232 Windows 2000 Hotfix 828035 Windows 2000 Hotfix KB828741 2000 51 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 Note Do not uninstall the CX Server Driver Management Tool or the CX Server from the control panel Doing so may make it impossible to use certain Units 2 1 3 Precautions for Installation e Close all programs running on Windows before starting the installation proce dure e Do not stop the setup process in the middle Copied files may remain in the installation folder e Do not turn OFF or reset the computer in the middle of the installation process Computer data may become corrupted e On Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP or Vista the administrator or a user with admin istrator rights must perform the installation Other users will not have sufficient write permission and access errors will occur Note Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher must be installed in advance to use the C
375. nformation on error codes generated during online opera tion of the CX Process Tool along with probable causes of the errors and reme dies to be taken Error Codes An error code FINS response code appears under each error message as shown below The cause of the error can be determined from the error code Example Clear all 01 1 001 1 1 ERROR OCCURRED WHILE CLEARING ERROR CODE Error code FINS response code d Cancel Faied to read information of registered function block ERROR fs Ya Error code FINS response code ET Initial setting data C Operation data O Initial setting data Operation data Fo m Receiving Status 318 Error Codes Section 5 2 5 2 Error Codes Probable cause Possible remedy Fins Gateway E The Loop Controller was Try the operation again after the backup has been accessed during a batch backup completed The Loop Controller was Wait for the direct recovery operation to finish and then accessed during the direct repeat the required operation recovery operation The FinsGateway has not started If the Host Link is used select Activate Serial Port Driver from the File Menu and initialize the serial port up yet For FinsGateway manual control select Service Manager from the FinsGateway Menu and start the communications service The network address settings of Select Fins Network Settin
376. ng All Blocks x LCB LCU 01 Transfer completed Target ITEM f a Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 Sending Status PC gt LCU HESHHEHSEEBHHEBBHSEHBHEBEH Option lt lt SUSIAN 5 The box will be closed automatically when processing is completed Note 1 After the data in an LCU LCB element in the function block file is down loaded the Loop Controller will stop operating The Loop Controller will not stop operating if function blocks are downloaded To start the Loop Control ler again select Operation and Run Stop Command from the Execute Menu Then select Hot Start or Cold Start from the Run Stop Command Dialog Box or turn the PLC OFF and ON When the PLC is turned OFF and 255 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 Transferring ITEMs ON the hot or cold start function will be controlled by the start mode of ITEMO18 of the System Common Block The Loop Controller will stop oper ating after the data in an LCU LCB element in the function block file is down loaded The Loop Controller will not stop operating if function blocks are downloaded The following dialog box to confirm the start of operation will be displayed after downloading Execute the operation command as required 22 Change the running mode of Loop Controller OK Other Methods for Starting Operation e Turn the CPU Unit s power supply OFF and then ON A hot or cold start will be performe
377. ng Monitor Tuning When the cursor is positioned on a Screen from the Execution Menu function block that has been pasted Start Starts the validation of open block diagrams Stop Stops the validation of open block diagrams Delete Line Deletes software connection line When the cursor is on a line between function blocks when the line itself has been selected displayed in red Release Selection Clears the selection of lines selected by clicking the left mouse button on function blocks or ITEMs displayed in pink Delete selected lines Deletes all the lines that have been When the cursor is positioned on a selected by clicking the left mouse button function block that has been pasted or on function blocks or ITEMs displayed in when an ITEM has been selected pink displayed in pink 84 Overview of User Interface Seclion 2 2 Pop up menu command Conditions for selection tions Selected Edits the selected annotation When an annotation is selected oe Deletes the selected annotation Bring to Displays the selected annotation in front Front of other annotations Send to Displays the selected annotation behind Back other annotations Send Behind Blocks and Lines Changes the selected annotation s font size Makes the selected annotation transparent Edit Edit Block ITEMs Displays ITEMs window When the cursor is positioned on a function block that has been pasted Edit User Link Table Edits
378. nications Drivers The following procedures can be used to change the communications driver for a created project Enabling the Driver Selection Window 1 2 3 130 1 Start the CX Process Monitor Creating Function Block Section 3 1 2 Select File Show Driver Select Dialog Show Changing from CX Server to FinsGateway 1 2 3 1 Open the project for which the communications driver is to be changed and select a node from the project tree 2 Select Settings Change PLC from the menu or right click and select Change PLC from the pop up menu 3 The Change PLC Dialog Box will be displayed Press the Setting Button for the network type 4 The Network Setting Window will be displayed If the node number is O input a value other than and then press the OK Button Note The number 0 cannot be used with FinsGateway so input a value of 1 or higher 5 Save the project 6 Restart the CX Process Tool and select FinsGateway as the communica tions driver 7 Open the saved project Changing from FinsGateway to CX Server 1 2 3 1 Select CX Server as the communications driver and start the CX Process Tool 2 Open the project for which the communications driver is to be changed 3 A message will be displayed saying that the CX Server project file does not exist or is corrupted and asking if a new cdm file should be created Press the OK Button 4 Save the project This completes the operat
379. nodes max CPU Racks that can be created File creation Function files ist and Multi node files mul and related files node related files function files ist etc See note Location of created files Limited to the project folder in CX Process data Project tree In order Project Work In order Project Workspace node function file space LCU LCB ele LCU LCB element function block group ment function block function block group function block Conditions in which monitor tag Not possible with Possible with Windows 95 98 compilation is possible Windows 95 98 Function blocks that can be created Not compatible with Compatible with creation of the following new Loop Control Unit Ver Ver 1 20 Loop Control Unit function block 1 20 2 position ON OFF Block Model 001 3 position ON OFF Block Model 002 Blended PID Block Model 013 3 input Selector Block Model 163 3 output Selector Block Model 164 Batch Data Collector Block Model 174 DI Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 455 DO Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 456 Al Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 457 AO Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 458 Printing units Block diagrams 1 block diagram 1 or all registered block diagrams Step ladder diagrams 1 step ladder diagram 1 or all registered step ladder diagrams Downloading separate function blocks Not possible you must Possible while Loop Control Unit is operating stop
380. not be checked The operation of the function block data is checked according to the block ad dress and ITEM numbers If the function block file is different from the function block data in block model the operation of the function block data will still be checked as long as the function block file is the same as the function block data in block address Analog or contact signals may be forcibly changed through the monitoring con trol of function block data You must however confirm the safety of the whole system otherwise the system or machine may operated unexpectedly Do not apply function block data to practical use unless the suitability of the data for the system is fully checked with the CX Process Tool by selecting Operation and Monitor Run Status from the Execute Menu Perform the checks in the following sections to check the operation of each part of the system Operation Check Section 4 6 4 6 1 Monitoring ITEM Data for Selected Function Blocks The ITEM data for a specified function block can be read from a Loop Controller and displayed 1 2 3 1 Select a function block that has been pasted 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select Monitor ITEM List The following dialog box will be display and the ITEM data can be monitored Ed Model LCBOT 001 Basic PID ITEM List Monttoring tag Data Type TEv ag paa gt _5 Stop
381. ns can be selected and moved 335 Setting Segment Programs Appendix C Transfer to LC Used to transfer the data in selected cells to the Loop Controller e Multiple cells or columns can be selected and transferred Note Be sure to check the safety of all equipment before making a transfer while the Loop Controller is operating 336 Appendix D Sequence Table Design Sheet A sequence table design sheet is provided below It can be copied for use when making sequence table program settings 337 Sequence Table Design Sheet Appendix D Sequence Table Design Sheet Date DiegamNo Programmer Project system comments o Rcg ee EC E ER mI LIEB E E ee eee eee eee pw e o p e e Conditions e e e gt e o A un A A lt A a g NINJ gt N 5 N c o ojo c o e A e o oa amp R 0o e o A o EET ESAE ee
382. nstalling the Software Section 2 1 2 1 Installing and Uninstalling the Software 2 1 1 Software That Must Be Installed The following software must be installed on the same computer to use the CX Process Tool 1 2 3 1 CX Process Tool 2 CX Server the communications driver or FinsGateway Embedded Ver sion 3 or higher Types of CX Programmer The CX Process Tool is available both on an independent CD ROM and on the CX One FA Integrated Tool Package The contents of the CX Process Tool are the same in either case The installation procedure for the independent CD ROM is provided here Refer to the CX One Ver 2 0 Setup Manual W463 provided with the CX One for the installation procedure for the CX One Gat No Mode Wanuaname Contes _ CXONE ALLILIC E CX One Ver 2 0 An overview of the V2 ALLILID EV2 Setup Manual CX One FA Integrated Tool Package and the CX One installation procedure Selecting Communications Drivers Select the communications driver to be installed CX Server or FinsGateway The following table shows the selection criteria Yes Supported No Not supported e Communications Method Communica Communications method tions driver Toolbus Duplex Ethernet at Simultaneous online personal computer serial connection with CX Programmer FinsGateway FinsGateway Yes Yes Ver 2003 e Compatible Applications Communica Application tions driver CX Process
383. nted correctly and the unit number set on the front panel of the Analog Input Output Unit must match the unit number set on the Field Terminal block If the unit numbers do not match input output read write is performed on the data of another Special Unit i e the one whose unit number is set on the Field Terminal block e The defaults of the System Common block on the LCBI must be set correct ly Safety Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING Caution N Caution Check the following items before starting Loop Controller operation Do not allow the area to which user link table data is written to overlap with any other area used by the CPU Unit or other Units If areas overlap the system may operate in an unexpected manner which may result in injury When using a user link table to write bit data to memory in the CPU Unit Never allow ladder programming or communications processes in the CPU Unit to write to any bits in the words in which bits are written from a user link table Depending on the timing any attempts to write to these words from ladder pro gramming or communications processes may be ignored Example If tag A in a user link table writes to bit 00 of W000 and an OUT instruction in the ladder pro gram in the CPU Unit write to bit 01 of WOOO the write from the ladder program may be ignored Analog I O Units used in combination with the Loop Controller must be moun
384. ntroller with annotations can also be printed out to create complete sche matics showing the program sequence For details on downloading annotation data refer to 4 9 Transferring Tag and Comment Data on page 309 Use the following procedure to insert annotations 12 9 5 1 Click the Annotation icon and move to the location where the annotation will be inserted As symbols annotations can be inserted at symbol positions The new annotation will contain the default text Comment Data as shown in the following diagram 002 086 7 Data 2 Click the Annotation icon Note f this icon is not clicked a new annotation will be inserted each time that the mouse is clicked in the ladder diagram 184 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 3 To edit the text in the annotation double click the annotation The following diagram shows the appearance of the annotation when it can be edited 002 086 Comment Data 4 Input the text In this example A M Switch has been input Press the En ter Key to create a new line 002 086 Switch he 5 To stop editing the annotation click on something other than the annotation The annotation will contain the new text 002 096 B Switch Note a To change the size of the font in the annotation select the annota tion click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select Selected Annotation Font Size The default font size is 12 poin
385. o a unique unit number 3 Connect the Programming Device Note With CS1D CPU Units using the CS1D CPUL I P connect to the active CPU Unit 4 Turn ON the PLC 41 Basic Operating Procedures Seclion 1 7 5 Create the I O tables with the Programming Device 6 Set the PLC Setup serial communications port settings with the Program ming Device if needed 7 Set the allocated DM area of the Analog Unit with the Programming De vice Step 5 Transfer Created The following steps are used when connected to the PLC via Host Link commu Function Block Data to nications Loop Controller 1 2 3 1 Turn OFF the PLC 2 Set the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit Set pin 4 to ON to use the peripheral port and set pin 5 to OFF to use the RS 232C port With a CS1D Duplex System set the DIP switch on the front panel of the Duplex Unit Turn ON PRPHL to use the peripheral port or turn ON COMM to use the RS 232C port 3 Connect the CPU Unit to the personal computer CX Process Tool Turn ON the PLC 5 If FinsGateway is being used With the CX Process Tool set the network address to between and 127 the node address to 01 and the unit address to the unit number plus 10 hex adecimal input in decimal using Network Settings from the Settings Menu See section 4 2 2 6 If FinsGateway is being used Connect the CX Process Tool via Host Link communications using Acti vate Serial Port Driver from the
386. o percentage 96 data is performed automatically when data is trans ferred Conversion Errors The main analog data is processed as percentage data in the Loop Controller The maximum resolution for this data is 64 000 Depending on the scaling set 207 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Units Section 3 9 tings conversion errors may occur during engineering unit conversion If a con version error occurs with the CX Process Tool the following warning will be dis played when the value is input When a conversion error occurs the scaled val ue closest to the input value is automatically calculated CX Process Tool AN Rounding error occurred Input value willbe converted Never show this dialog Conversion Error Warning Display With the CX Process Tool an engineering unit that is input is converted to a per centage value The converted value is converted back to the engineering unit reverse conversion and the two values are compared If there is a differ ence a warning is displayed The main cause of errors is rounding errors that occur in division during scaling Conversion Error Example When the following settings are made for the CSV tag Scaling upper limit 8 500 Scaling lower limit 2 000 DP position 1 Unit C An input value of 32 0C becomes 2 209 52 when converted to percentage 96 data The rounded off value of 2 210 then becomes 32 05 C when converted back to the engineering unit Th
387. ocess Tool CX Process Tool from the Windows Start Menu The following dialog box will appear to select the communications driver 1 2 3 Select communication driver fram below Communication driver oF FinsGateway C CXx Server Never show this message Cancel 68 Overview of User Interface Seclion 2 2 2 Select either FinsGateway or CX Server as the communications driver and click the OK Button The following screen will appear CX Process Too File View Settings Execute Help Dy a Rel Sh E 3 Project Workspace 3 Refer to 3 1 Creating Function Block to continue Note The CX Process Tool will not start with FinsGateway as the selected commu nications driver unless the FinsGateway Embedded Version 3 or higher has been installed in the computer CX Process Tool cannot be started using CX Server if CX Server is not installed 2 2 Overview of User Interface Note The CX Process Tool consists of the following three basic panes windows Project Workspace Displays a data hierarchy tree Output Window Displays execution results and error information such as comparisons tag error checks and program transfers Contents Window Displays the following contents e n Edit Block ITEM Mode the contents of ITEMs in function blocks selected in the Project Workspace area on the left are displayed e n Edit Block Diagram Mode
388. ock diagram is selected Memory Transfers function block connection diagrams tags When a Loop Card comments and annotations to a Memory Card Controller is selected Tag Data Transfers block diagram data tags comments and When a Loop annotation data to a Memory Card Controller is LCBO1 LCBO5 LCBO05 GTC version 3 0 or higher selected Transfer Previous Uploads function block data from the specified Loop When a Loop from LC Controller connected online to replace the data in the Loop Controller function Controller in the current function block file or the current block or function function block block diagram is selected Newly uploads function block data from the specified Loop When a Loop Controller connected online to be read to the Loop Controller is Controller in the current function block file or the current selected function block Operation Run Stop Starts or stops the Loop Controller including hot or cold When the selected Com starts item is not the mand Project Workspace Monitor Executes monitor control of the System Common block E the function block Run ile otatus Clear All Clears function block data from the Loop Controller Compare with LC Compares the data in the current function block file and When the selected the data in the Loop Controller connected online or data in item is not the a file Also compares the data in the current function block Project Workspace file and the data
389. ock model 301 is set to 1 the program will not be assembled and disassembled automatically and it cannot be assembled and disassembled manually In this case the created step ladder program cannot be downloaded to the Loop Controller although mnemonic programs can be download and uploaded 3 1 Ladder Diagrams 180 Note 1 2 3 Take the following steps to create a step ladder program in a ladder diagram 1 When creating a ladder diagram ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag of the step ladder program block model 301 must be set to O e f ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag is set to the CX Process Tool Version 2 50 or higher will automatically assemble the program convert ladder diagram to mnemonic when it is downloaded and disassemble the pro gram convert mnemonic to ladder diagram when it is uploaded It will also be possible to manually assemble disassemble the program e f ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag is set to 1 the program will not be as sembled and disassembled automatically and it cannot be assembled and disassembled manually In this case the created step ladder program cannot be downloaded to the Loop Controller although mnemonic pro grams can be download and uploaded 2 When ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag is set to O always convert the mne monic code before downloading the step ladder program block created in the ladder diagram to the Loop Controller If the mnemonic code is not con verted the mnemonic code ST
390. odel 163 3 output Selector Block Model 164 Batch Data Collector Block Model 174 DI Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 455 DO Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 456 Al Terminal from Expanded CPU Unit Block Model 457 AO Terminal from Expand ed CPU Unit Block Model 458 The version of the Loop Control Unit can be verified in the Monitor Run Status Screen Execution Operation Monitor run status on CX Process Tool When the above function blocks are used check in the Check System Operation screen on CX Process Tool beforehand that the content of ITEM 099 onwards in the System Common block Block Model 000 is as follows WEM Dsamame 099 MPU FROM version indication 41 20 gt Version V1 20 and onwards must be indicated 1 5 2 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 1 50 The following function blocks described in this manual can be used only when Loop Control Unit C81W LCO01 Ver 1 50 and onwards and CX Process Tool Ver 1 50 and onwards are used e The following function blocks can be registered on CX Process Tool when ver sions of Loop Control Unit earlier than Ver 1 50 Ver 1 0I or Ver 1 20 and CX Process Tool Ver1 50 or onwards are used However if the data of these func tion blocks is downloaded to the Loop Control Unit by LCU element data for one Loop Control Unit when these function blocks are registered on CX Pro cess Tool an error occurs and only
391. ogram pattern data Center and right columns Descriptions of the parameters stored in each address are displayed Check Memory Area Button Used to display Loop Controller memory maps When program pattern data is allo cated memory can be checked to ensure that no addresses are duplicated For details refer to 3 10 Displaying Loop Controller Memory Maps Executing Auto tuning in a Tuning Window Use the following procedure to specify a PID bank and execute the Auto tuning AT command 1 With the Segment Program 3 Tuning Window displayed click the AT Button 5 Tool Tuning screen Bank No Destination bank number stop black 0 the selected bank number Ret 0 Bank Ma 000 000 Execute AT Button AT Button The button for executing AT Destination bank No The bank number where the AT execution results are to be stored Selected bank number The bank number specified in the step being executed 2 The Execute AT Dialog Box will be displayed Execute AT Target Bank Ma CO Current Bank AT Start Cancel 3 In the Target Bank No field input the bank number where the AT execution results are to be stored If 0 is input the AT execution results will be stored at the current bank i e the bank number specified in the step currently being executed 4 Click the AT Start Button The AT Start Button will be changed into the Stop AT Button To cancel the auto tun
392. oject After change ao T TT T T T e o e O e tn tn tn tn tn e Q tn tn O O 2 zi 2 2 change version CB 10 J JA ja ja 0 Jx x x JA ja A O fa A A X X X topos 115 x x O tesori 20 ja ja tesos 20 ja x x ja cg 20 x x x x x tesos 209 x x x x x x oO 0 050 10 x ja Lopos eTC 30 x x x x x A a Ix JA O 38 x x x x x x _ CJIGCPU42P 20 ja A ja ja CJIGCPU42P 30 x x x x x O ja X X CJ1G CPU43P 20 x O A A ja ja CJ1G CPU43P 3 0 x x x O x ja CHG CPUMP 20 a A A ja CHG CPUMP 3 0 x x x x CJ1G CPU45P 20 x x x A JA A fa CHG CPU45P 30 x x x x x CJ1G CPU45P 3 0 x x A A x GTC CJIGCPU42P 35 x x x x x CJIGCPUd3P 35 x x x x x x X X X x x x X OX X x x x x X X X x x id A CJ1G CPU
393. oller The following data on the function blocks excluding step ladder programs will be displayed or set e Display of analog signal values e Forced change of analog output signals e Stop block operation Cancel stop command for each function block 271 Operation Check Section 4 6 Operation Check of Block Diagrams MEL CX Process Tool Display of analog Forced change of analog signal values output signals Loop Controller Stop block operation command Block connection Changing to Block Diagram Validate Action Mode Take the following steps to change the CX Process Tool to Validate Action Mode 1 2 3 1 Select the block diagram folder and select Edit Block Diagram from the Settings Menu The block diagram will appear 2 Select Start from the Validate Action Menu The following screen will appear and the cursor will change to the 3s icon E NodeO1 Block Diagram 1 Cycle System common operation cycle Stopped amp eee ee E 1 000 0 00 901 CPU memory 3 001 Stopped Al point 0041 Basic PID 1 E SP 000 0 00 2 ABN 10 0 10 00 RSP 10 0 00 0 00 n AD MV AEN D ee ee
394. ommand selection File New Creates a Project Workspace and project Open Opens a multi node file in the current project folder All related files are opened automatically Closes the current Project Workspace Save Saves the current Project Workspace and overwrites the previous one in the project folder Saves the current Project Workspace in a different project folder Add IST File Imports a function block file ist created in version 1 00 into the current Project Note f the active function block file has been changed it must be saved before executing the above Sort Sorts function block files in order of node numbers Auto If checking is enabled function block files are read in order of node numbers when Aad IST File or Open is selected Page Block Used to select one of the following page formats when Settings Diagram printing block diagrams A4 landscape A4 portrait A3 landscape portrait The printing size must also however be matched to the setting Print Function Prints a list of registered function blocks and a list of all Block ITEMs Block Prints block diagrams Diagram Prints cross references Se Prints sequence tables quence Control Prints all of the above Monitor Prints the monitor tag list Tag List CSV Tag Prints a list of CSV tags List Monitor Prints a list of CX Process Monitor Plus tags Plus Tag List User Link Prints user link tables table Connec Prints
395. ommunications load causes timeouts in crease this time The maximum time is 60 000 ms 3 12 4 CSV Tag Setting Tab Page Use this tab page to make the settings for exporting expanded scaling data for SYSMAC OPC Server version 2 6 Using expanded scaling data enables scal ing in engineering units using a OPC Server When this is done scaling settings in the SCADA software are not required For details refer to Expanded Scaling 228 Setting Options Section 3 12 Data for SYSMAC OPC Server Version 2 6 CX Process Tool Version 4 0 or Higher Only on page 142 General Communication CSW Tag Setting Function Black Diagram Step Le Show extended property Slave enable Sener scaling tag option Treate User Link Table as OPC Server scaling tag Assume scale of ITEM related to MV to be 0 1 00 Replace the first character of tag name with Cancel Show extended property Select this option to output OPC engineering tags This function enables scaling to be performed using the OPC Server Always enable OPC Server scaling tag option Select this option to make outputting OPC engineering tags the default setting Treat User Link Table as OPC Server scaling tag Select this option to output engineering tags for the CSV tags in the user link table When this option is selected OPC server engineering tags can also be output to CSV tag entries in the user link table Assume Data Range of ITEM
396. on blocks ex cept for Contact Distributor 201 and default registration TR internal switches External Controller Terminal Blocks External Controller Termi nal Blocks cannot be used with the CS1D LCBO5D With CX Process Tool software version 3 1 or higher either of the following two methods can be used to set CSV tags Method b is possible only for version 3 0 and lower a Setting the tags individually using the CSV Settings Dialog Box cc b Editing with Excel after automatic registration After the CSV tags have been set using either of the above methods com pile the CSV tag files for SCADA software and use those files with SCADA software PTs etc Setting Tags Individually Using the CSV Settings Dialog Box Use the procedure shown in the following flow diagram 1 Set the CSV tags Select the control blocks operation blocks etc and then Settings Tag Setting CSV Tags 2 When the node function block is saved File Save the CSV tag setting file csv Automatic compiling of is automatically compiled CSV tag setting file 3 Compile the CSV tag fle csv Compiling the CSV tag file 1 2 3 1 Select the block for which CSV tags are to be set and then select Tag Set ting CSV Tags from the Settings Menu The following dialog box will ap pear L5V Tag Configuration Function Block Model 011 Basic FID Block Address 001 Tag Comment Scaling Upper Limit 0
397. on signals for the main table For details on the table reference function refer to the Loop Control Boards Operation Manual Cat No W406 Creating the Reference Table Use the following procedure to create the reference table 1 Register a sequence table 2 Double click the sequence table that is to be the reference table in the Work space tree The Sequence Table Window will open 3 Right click in the Sequence Table Window and select Reference Setting Reference Table from the pop up menu or select Operation Reference Setting Reference Table from the main menus Using the Reference Table in the Main Table Use the following procedure to set the main table to access input signals from the reference table 1 Display the Signal Dialog Box in the main table 2 Select the Input Tab and select TBL as the command type 3 Set the reference table as the source Clearing the Reference Table Setting Use the following procedure to clear the reference table setting by setting the table as a main table 1 Double click the reference table in the Workspace The reference table will open 2 Right click in the Sequence Table Window and select Reference Setting Main Table from the pop up menu or select Operation Reference Table Main Table from the main menus 3 8 10 Checking for Errors in the Sequence Table Note Right click and select Check Errors from the pop up menu The sequence table can be downloaded to th
398. onnection diagrams Block connection diagrams can be copied and registered cannot be copied to new Loop Control Unit nodes Editing ladder diagrams Cut copy and paste not Cutting copying and pasting are possible for symbols supported areas and lines Not supported The previously executed operation can be undone Compiling CSV tags for Not supported CSV tags can be set for function blocks and CSV tags can SCADA software be compiled saved and displayed accordingly Function block data Not supported Function blocks in RAM in the Loop Control Unit can be backup and recovery backed up in flash memory in the Loop Control Unit or the data in flash memory can be restored to RAM ITEM List Monitoring Not supported ITEM data for a specified function block can be monitored in a list Find Loop Control Unit Not supported Loop Control Units on networks connected to the PLC to which the CX Process Tool is connected can be found and addresses can be set in node function block files Download upload and Block diagram information files Block diagram information files extension mtbd can be compare extension mtbd cannot be uploaded or downloaded uploaded or downloaded 17 Version Improvements Section 1 4 1 4 4 Version 2 50 The improvements made from version 2 00 to version 2 50 of the CX Process Tool are listed in the following table Ver200 Ver 250 New function blocks Does not support Loop Fuzzy Logic
399. ontrol action gt Initial setting data 124 C Co C C C C C C CO C CO C CO C CO C ecoocoocococozoocco MIE AD MV RTM MV REV MVE AD lt Operation data gt SP H SP L SP LL SP AOF SP w Sw AT CYCL_OUT CYCL HS AT GIN Out of range processing Output retrace time for PY error Inversion of host indicated MY MV error source designation High high alarm setting High alarm setting Low alarm setting Low low alarm setting Alarm stop switch Local Set Point setting Remote Local switch AT command AT Executing Limit cycle MV amplitude Limit cycle hysteresis AT calculation gain Operation data Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Note ITEMSs are displayed by default in the order of S and then It is pos sible to display ITEMs in ascending order by clicking on ITEM The following display will appear B3 01 LCBO1 04 001 Basic PID OL x ITEM Type ITEM tag Daa DataName COMMENT Basic PID M DEL 011 CNT TMEX 2000 000 000 115 00 100 00 0 00 15 00 1 00 0 000 000 0 000 000 0 00 Q QO Q o Cc O O O O O O O C Q X O O O O C0 C0 Comment Model Basic PID System common Operation cycle O common Operation order PY source designation High high alarm setting High alarm setting Low alarm setting Low low alarm setting Hysteresis setting Alarm stop switc
400. ool CX Server PLCTools Note Only the CX Server can be installed at the same time as the CX Process Tool To use FinsGateway as the communications server refer to 2 1 5 Installing Fins Gateway 54 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 8 The Select Program Folder Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard x Select Program Folder Select the location where setup is to create new shortcuts E E Setup will add program shortcuts to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the Existing Folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder OMRONSCX One Existing Folders Startup InstallShield lt Back Cancel Specify the location to add a shortcut the program folder of the Windows Start Menu and click the Next Button 9 The Ready to Install the Program Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program A _ The wizard is ready to begin installation Y Ji Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard InstallShield Click the Install Button The Installer will start the installation To check the installation settings click the Back Button To cancel installation click the Cancel Button
401. ory in CPU Unit Timer counter reset start operation start stop and pause commands Table Command STEP sequence table block adaress step number Setting of a specific step in another sequence table RUN sequence table block address Starting another sequence table STOP sequence table block address Stopping another sequence table 200 Settings on CX Process Tool screen Output tab destination specification Block ITEM Output tab destination specification Tag name Output tab destination specification User link table Output tab destination specification Element action destination Table Command Tab command classification STEP block address step number Table Command Tab command classification RUN block address Table Command Tab command classification STOP block address Setting method Select the block ITEM and select the ITEM number from the detailed information Select the ITEM tag and select the tag ITEM from the detailed information Select the block ITEM and select the ITEM number from the detailed information Select the area type and select the link table tag name from the detailed information Block address and step number Block address Block address The following contact signals can be used for sequence table outputs For block address 001 and ITEM 086 001 086 For the A M switch for the Master01 CSV tag Mas
402. ot displayed by default if the CX Process Tool was installed from the CX One 2 The above dialog box will be displayed when the CX Process Tool is started while File Show Drive Select Dialog Display is selected It will not be displayed if File Show Drive Select Dialog Hide is selected To change the communications driver select File Show Drive Select Dialog Dis play and then start the CX Process by selecting Start Only from the Start Menu or I O tables If the CX Process was installed as part of the CX One not independently the above dialog box will not be displayed i e File Show Drive Select Dialog Hide will be selected and the CX Server will automatically be used as the communications driver To switch to the Fins Gateway select File Show Drive Select Dialog Display and then select FinsGateway at startup Using FinsGateway Select FinsGateway as the communications driver Using CX Server Select CX Server as the communications driver 1 6 3 Using FinsGateway Hegardless of the connection method use FinsGateway embedded as the communications driver Communications network FinsGateway Contents communications driver Serial Host Link Network Serial Unit Driver Connecting to the PLC s peripheral or RS 232C communications See note 1 port via Host Link Peripheral bus See note 2 Controller Link Network CLK PCI slot Driver Connecting through the Controller Link Support Board to a PLC wit
403. ote 5 can be written during sequence table validation to check the operation of the sequence table As shown below change the value of the ITEM serving as 282 Operation Check Section 4 6 the signal in the function block ITEM list and then download the data The results will be reflected in the sequence table Execution Form 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 03 10 11 12 13 Sequence Table BLKOO1 ITEMOS86 j 001 IN 000 019 002 IN TIMOOO HI Data Name Auto Manual switch 003 IN 001 086 Data Range Logical Value 0 1 IN 002 014 IN 001 013 Data Description D Manual 1 amp uto Change the value from the ITEM list for the function block and click the Data Transfer to LC Button General data 0 0 0 0 LL SP e01 LCBO5 Block Diag 017 AQF 023 0 SP Ww e System common 026 54 035 0 002 036 CYCL OUT Function Black Group 037 0 CYCL HS Basic PID 038 0 AT GIN Bu sp 039 AT DEV Ez az 2 040 0 AT 041 0 DVASP z RSP My C 054 P AD 055 0 MV ABN gt 056 D D 065 0 ALFA O66 0 076 0 MH LMT OF 0 ML LMT 086 Back Next 083 0 MV 08 0 Came 0 Edit Sequence Tables Online CX Process Tool Version 3 2 or Higher N Caution N Caution Note N
404. ote When downloading a sequence table for the LCBO5 unit Ver 1 5 or later that has been edited online with the CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher confirm that the system will operate normally with the edited sequence If the sequence is not suitable for operation unexpected operation may result Confirm in advance the conditions at any node for which the sequence table is being edited over a Controller Link or Ethernet network Not doing so may result in unexpected operation A sequence table can be edited online while the Loop Controller is running see note and while the sequence table is active without stopping step progression To do this the CX Process Tool must be version 3 2 or higher and the LCBO5 version 1 5 or later must be used Use the normal downloading procedure when the Loop Controller is stopped The following items can be edited online e Signals can be changed added or deleted for conditions and actions e Y N specifications for rules can be changed added or deleted e Steps can be changed added or deleted e HEN sections can be changed added or deleted Rules and the number of conditions cannot be expanded Procedure for Online Editing The sequence table is edited on the Action Validation Screen and then down loaded This procedure is performed while the Loop Controller is running 283 Operation Check Section 4 6 1 2 3 1 Go online and select Start from the Validate Action Menu Al
405. oup 4 A dialog box for automatically setting CSV tags will be displayed Select Yes to automatically perform settings for function blocks created by cop ing a block diagram The following restrictions apply when copying block diagrams e Parameters will also be copied e Only the blocks that are pasted to the block diagram will be copied Function blocks that are registered to function block group trees and not pasted to block diagrams will not be copied e Block diagrams cannot be pasted to other nodes The copy buffer will be cleared if the active node is switched e Block diagrams cannot be pasted to other LCU LCB elements e g pasting an LCB block diagram to an LCU block diagram Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Registering User Link Table Blocks Settings for Data Exchange with CPU Unit Not Possible for Loop Control Unit With a Loop Control Board Process control CPU Unit or Loop control CPU Unit a user link table can be registered by pasting it on the block diagram This enables easily setting software connections for data exchange between the Board and memory in the CPU Unit Refer to 3 5 User Link Tables for details on user link tables 1 2 3 1 Paste the user link table on the block diagram as described below Input user link tables and output user link tables are pasted separately e Input User Link Tables Reading data from the CPU Unit to the Loop Con troller Right click on the block diagram
406. owing dialog box will be displayed H Hodell LCB CS Tag List Oy x jie Tenner Comment Nat Nolo Block Tape NNNM ETT ESTE Unit OTHER 1 1 ES 001 O11 Basic FID 10000 Step 4 Creating SCADA Software RS View Tag Files Compiling Compile the CSV tag file or the RS View tag file using the following procedure after setting the CSV tags Note When CX Server has been selected as the communications driver set the node address to a non zero value in the Change PLC Dialog Box before compiling the CSV tag file Select Change PLC from the Settings Menu to display the dialog box If the computer is connected online return the node address setting to O The following conditions must be met to compile the SCADA or RS View tag file 1 CSV tags must be set for Control Operation except internal switches and External Controller Terminal Blocks and both Send All Blocks 462 and Re 149 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Creating SCADA Tag Files 150 ceive All Blocks 461 must be registered for Loop Control Units and 2 CSV tags must be set for any Expanded CPU Unit Terminal function blocks for Loop Con trol Units 1 Select Compile CSV Tags from the Execution Menu The following dia log box will be displayed Tag Compile Compile CS Check errors Add User Link Table information Cancel If Check Errors is selected and the OK Button is c
407. owing function blocks must be created and connected separately to enable monitoring and setting individual contact signals and individual analog signals i e other than function block data 11 Relationship with CX Process Monitor Section 1 2 e To monitor and set individual contact signals contact signals must be input output using the Contact Distributor block Block Model 201 and Internal Switch block Block Model 209 e To monitor individual analog signals analog signals must be output from the Input Selection block Block Model 162 e To set individual analog signals analog signals must be input to the Constant Generator block Block Model 166 Generate CX Process Generate the CX Process Plus tag file using Execute Create Tag File Moni Monitor Plus Tag File tor Plus Tag Download Function Download the function blocks Block Data to Loop Controller Compile the Monitor Tag Start the CX Process Monitor Plus and click the Start Button or the Setup But Files ton The monitor tag files mtagmst and mtagsubmst will be automatically gen erated based on the CX Process Monitor Plus tag file monitor csv Setting Initial Data ITEMs The CX Process Tool is normally used to set initial data S and the CX Process Monitor is normally used to set operation data Data Type ITEM Example PID Block CX Process CX Process classification Tool Monitor Initial settings S Initial setting parameter Forward Reverse d
408. ownload data to Memory Card With an LCBLI J checkmark selection boxes will be displayed in the dialog box Turn these selections ON or OFF and then click the Start Button Checkmark selection Update User Link If this item is check marked the refresh cycles for the tags in Table Refresh Cycle the user link table will be changed to the operating cycle for the function block to which the software connection is made Transfer FBD This item is valid only when downloading by function block Information FBD information is automatically downloaded when an LCU LCB element is downloaded If this item is selected the layout information for the selected function block diagram will be downloaded If this item is not selected the layout information will not be downloaded Backup LCB Data to If this item is check marked the data that is downloaded will FROM also be backed up in flash memory in the Loop Controller If this item is not selected the data will not be backed up Transfer data to If this item is check marked connection data tags Memory Card comments and annotations that are downloaded will also be backed up to the Memory Card If this item is not selected the data will not be backed up Note This item is automatically selected when a Memory Card is installed in the CPU Unit Supported for LCBLIL Ver 2 00 or earlier only 254 Downloading Uploading and Comparing Data Section 4 3 Note lf an error occur
409. ox 3 Click the Change Remove Button The CX Process Tool will be uninstalled ER Add Remove Programs lal x 185 Currently installed programs Sort by Name M Change or E Adobe Download Manager 1 2 Remove Only Remove Programs ES Adobe Reader 6 0 1 Size 44 1MB CX Process Tool Ver 4 00 5 175MB Click here for support information Last Used On To change this program or remove it from your Change Remove New computer click Change Remove Change Remove Programs e Cx Programmer v5 0 EX 5 Size 8 56MB Add Remove id CX Server Driver Management Tool Size 8 56MB Windows Components Internet Explorer 0831167 Size 15 7MB Microsoft Data Access Components 870669 iS 7 OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition Size 56 7MB Set Program Outlook Express Q823353 Access and virtual Machine Additions Es A Defaults ji Windows 2000 Hotfix KB823182 Windows 2000 Hotfix KB823559 Windows 2000 Hotfix KB824105 If CX Server PLC Tools is installed then uninstall it ER Add Remove Programs E nml xl 1 Name P Currently installed programs Sort by Name M V inci or CX Server PLC Tools Size 11 5 8 emove Programs Used rarely Last Used On 1 20 2005 To change this program or remove it From your computer click Change Remove Change Remove eee Inter
410. p Ladder Program menu 2 Checks the operation The following can be performed Select Start from the Validate of function block for function blocks excluding step Action Menu with the block connections for a Loop ladder programs diagram displayed Controller Block Diagram Validate Action Mode Displaying analog output signal Double click each function block values and operate in the Execute Dialog Forcibly changing analog output Box signals Independently stopping block operation or canceling the stop block operation command for a function block Pseudo inputting present values Wireless Debug Setting Calibration Mode 3 Checks the operation The following can be performed Select Start from the Validate of the ladder diagram in for a step ladder program block Action Menu with the ladder the Loop Controller model 301 diagram displayed Ladder Diagram Validate Action Mode ITEMs and operate in the Execute Dialog Contact ITEM Box force setting resetting Independently stopping block operation or canceling the stop block operation command for a function block incorporating contact ITEMs Note t is possible to force set or force reset the contact ITEMs of registered function blocks 4 Validates the The following can be checked ina Select Start from the Validate operation of a sequence sequence table block model 302 Action Menu with the sequence table Sequence Table table displayed
411. peration of transferring Are you sure ee 4 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will appear x Start transfering m Target ITEM C Initial setting data 5 C Operation data 0 Initial setting data Operation data 5 0 Receiving Status LCB gt PC Start Cancel 5 Click the Start Button Note If the data of the existing file currently opened with the CX Process Tool does not match the function block data in the Loop Controller in the following item a or b the data currently opened will be illegal a Registered function block block address vs block model b Block diagram information If the file does not match the data in item c below and ITEM200 the Mnemonics Flag is set to 1 the mnemonics to be read will not match the ladder diagram c Step ladder program in mnemonics 6 The uploading of the previous data will start A dialog box will appear while the data is uploaded 7 The box will be closed automatically when processing is completed It is possible to compare the data in the currently active function block file and the data in the Loop Controller connected online The data can be in units of LCU LCB elements sequence control folders in the function block group or function blocks It is also possible to compare the data in the currently active function block file with the data in other files The data can be compared in units of files LCU
412. puter and other factors will affect it Use this setting as a guideline only e With CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher operation can be set so that data logging for specific ITEMs such as the PV SP and MV is started when a Tuning Screen is opened and then the logged data is saved in an CSV file when the Tuning Screen is closed The data logging cycle is the same as the data monitoring cycle either 200 ms or 1 s Tuning Section 4 7 e Select the Save Trend Data to log data and save it in a CSV file The default location for the CSV file is in the current directory with a file name of CSVTagNamelnFunctionBlock PresentTime csv The present time is in the form YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Click the Browse Button to change the storage location 3 The Tuning Screen will be displayed The following settings can be dis played and set Block name model Signal source Function Block or ITEM Target function block Control Block Basic PID 011 Advanced PID 012 Batch flowrate capture 014 Indication and Setting 031 Indication and Operation 032 Ratio Setting 033 Indicator 034 blended PID 013 2 position ON OFF 001 3 position ON OFF 002 Segment Program 2 157 Display SP PV and MV trends Example Setting values for P D and MV limit High Low High High Alarm High Alarm Low Basic or Advanced PID Alarm Low Low Alarm and Deviation Alarm Alarm OFF switch Stop block operation command SP PV MV and A M stat
413. r User s Manual Product Wanuainame Contents Installation and operation procedures for the CX Process Tool Provides an overview of the CX One and describes the installation procedures for CX One software Refer to this manual when installing the CX Integrator from the CX One Installation and operation procedures for the CX Process Monitor Installation and operation procedures for the CX Process Monitor Plus Installation and operation procedures for the Loop Control Unit except for function blocks Installation and operation procedures for the Loop Control Boards except for function blocks Detailed information on function blocks for Loop Control Units Detailed information on function blocks for Loop Control Boards Provides information required when using the gradient temperature control functions For information not related to the gradient temperature control functions please refer to the Loop Control Board Operation Manual Cat No W406 For details on procedures for installing the CX Process Tool from the CX One FA Integrated Tool Pack age refer to the CX One Ver 2 0 Setup Manual provided with CX One Mode Wanuainame Comens W463 CXONE ALLILIC EV CX One Ver 2 0 Installation and overview of 2 ALL L D EV2 Setup Manual CX One FA Integrated Tool Package XVI Section 1 introduces the operations of the CX Process Tool and connections to the PLC
414. r Menu Insert Row Same as selecting Insert Row from the Manipulate Ladder Menu Delete Row Same as selecting Delete Row from the Manipulate Ladder Menu Start Starts checking the operation of open ladder diagrams Stop Stops checking the operation of open ladder diagrams Edit Edit Function Block Displays the list of ITEMs window for ITEM the open step ladder blocks User Link Table Same as Settings User Link Table C Find Target Block When a ladder diagram has been specified and is being executed moves the cursor to the relevant step ladder block in Project Workspace Select 100 200 or 50 to display the diagram at 100 200 or 50 Press the Alt Key and the Left Right Arrow Key to enlarge reduce the diagram Undo Same as selecting Undo from the After executing an operation Manipulate Ladder Menu Connection Map Displays a connection map that visually When an LCU or LCB element is represents the input source and output selected destination of the selected signal Show Memory Map The status showing how the Loop When an LCU or LCB element is Controller is using CPU Unit memory selected can be displayed as a list Print Ladder Diagram Prints the open ladder diagrams fe Pop up Project Workspace Menu Menu Displayed by Clicking Right Button Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Initialize Workspace Display Restores the Project Workspace display to its When Project Workspace is initial value i e the displ
415. r details and install the newest version If the program is not correctly displayed or does not operate correctly when using Windows NT 4 0 then update the ComCtl32 dll file This is not necessary when using Windows 2000 or XP Use 401comupd exe to update the ComCtl32 dll file The 401comupd exe file is an update program provided by Microsoft Corporation If the HTML Help runtime component is not already installed or if the version is old the FinsGateway installation will display a warning to update it Update the HTML Help runtime component as follows 1 Execute the following program from the CD ROM CD ROM drive gt Fgwv3 Update hhupd exe 2 Update the HTML Help runtime component according to the instructions displayed on the screen 3 The program will suggest a system restart when it finishes Do not proceed to the next step without restarting the computer If the instal 57 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 lation is continued without restarting the computer the FinsGateway will not operate properly 2 1 6 Installing FinsGateway Embedded Version The CX Process Tool cannot be used if it is installed alone Either the FinsGate way Embedded Version or CX Server must be installed on the same computer as the communications driver The CX Process Tool comes with FinsGateway Embedded Version 3 and 2003 Install either version FinsGateway Runtime Version can also be used If the Runtime Version has be
416. rams refer to 3 1 8 Editing Block Diagrams 2 For details on editing function block ITEMS refer to 3 1 9 Editing Function Block ITEMS Using CX Process Monitor Supported Only for Loop Control nits 8 Set the function block for data exchange with CX Process Monitor i e the Block Send Terminal to Computer Function Blocks 9 Create the monitor tag file using Tag Settings Monitor Tag from the Set tings Menu 10 Create the monitor tag file using Create Tag File Monitor Tag from the Execution Menu 39 Basic Operating Procedures Seclion 1 7 Note Install the CX Process Monitor on the same personal computer be fore creating monitor tag files Using CX Process Monitor Plus The procedure depends on whether a Loop Control Unit or Loop Control Board LCBI Js is being used Loop Control Units 8 Register and connect the function blocks to exchange data with the CX Pro cess Monitor Plus Items to Registrations and Loop Control Unit monitor connections Function Only register the Send All Blocks block Block Model 462 and block data function blocks Receive All Blocks m Block Model Contact Register and connect Contact Distributor Block Model 201 or signals the function blocks Internal Switch Block Model 209 Analog Register and connect Input Selector block Block Model 162 and signals the function blocks Constant Generator block Block Model 166 9 Set CSV tags and tags for the CX Process Monitor Pl
417. ration CB LCB elements must be transferred when entries are added or deleted e An Arrange Number operation is required for entries when LCB LCB elements are trans ferred to the Loop Controller e Selected entries cannot be transferred or deleted during operation e LCB LCB elements must be transferred when entries are added and deleted e Selected entries cannot be transferred or deleted during operation elements must be transferred when entries are added and deleted Expansion Functions for CX Process Tool Ver 5 0 or Higher Expansion function must be set when using user link table expansion functions supported by LCBL JL Ver 3 0 or later Select the entry in the user link table for which the expansion functions are to be set Editing can be performed by right clicking and selecting Edit Extension from the pop up window For informa tion on each function refer to the Loop Control Boards Operation Manual Cat No W406 The following functions can be set as expansion functions for LCBI 3 0 MV Tight Shut MV tight shut settings are made in user link tables for output attributes 1 2 3 1 Right click the entry for the output attribute i e Wr and select Edit Ex tension from the pop up window 168 User Link Tables Section 3 5 2 The Extension Dialog Box will be displayed Extention Setting CPL OUT 1 Chanel Setting cwm Set to all chan
418. red and to set analog out puts to either the minimum value or maximum value use the output hold function of the Analog Output Unit or Analog I O Unit Before turning ON the power to the PLC make sure that the facilities are safe The analog output values and contact outputs from the Loop Controller are up dated when the power to the PLC is turned ON regardless of the operating mode of the CPU Unit including in the PROGRAM mode Internally the analog out put values and contact outputs are sent from the CPU Unit to Basic I O Units and Analog Output Units Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines mo mentary power interruptions or other causes Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following e Changing the operating mode of the PLC including the setting of the startup operating mode e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value or any set value in memory Be sure that all mounting screws terminal screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the user manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction xxvii Application Precautions 4 xxviii N Caution A N Caution In the event of system or power failure CX Process function files extension 15 may not be saved It is reco
419. reen Execute Run Monitor run status on CX Process Tool When the above function blocks are used check in the Check System Op 27 Function Blocks ITEMs Incompatible with Earlier Versions Section 1 5 eration screen on CX Process Tool beforehand that the content of ITEM 099 onwards in the System Common block Block Model 000 is as follows WEM Dsamame Data _ 099 MPU FROM version indication gt Version V2 00 and onwards must be indicated 1 5 4 Incompatibility with Versions Earlier than Version 2 50 Function Blocks Incompatible with Earlier Versions 28 The following function blocks be used only with version 2 50 or later versions of the CS1W LC001 Loop Control Unit and version 2 50 or higher versions of the CX Process Tool Fuzzy Logic Block Model 016 Range Conversion Block Model 127 Hamped Switch Block Model 167 Level Check Block Model 210 Al4 Terminals from DRT1 AD04 Unit Block Model 588 and AO2 Terminals from DRT1 DAO 2 Unit Block Model 589 e f an earlier version of the Loop Control Unit is used with CX Process Tool ver sion 2 50 or higher these function blocks can be registered but the data for the function blocks won t be downloaded to the Loop Control Unit when LCU ele ment data is downloaded The supported function blocks will be downloaded normally e f Loop Control Unit version 2 50 or later is used with a lower version of the CX Process
420. rouped by type in function block groups in the Project Workspace tree Select function block groups according to the application and register the function blocks The types of function blocks are described below System Common Block The System Common Blocks is used to make common settings for Loop Con trollers There is one System Common Block registered for each Unit and it can not be deleted from the Workspace tree Control Blocks Control Blocks are used to control the operation of Loop Controllers They can be registered in the Block Diagram function block groups Field Terminal Blocks Field Terminal Blocks are used to exchange data with I O Units mounted to the PLC They can be registered in the Field Terminal function block group Note Data is not exchanged with CX Programmer I O tables Even when starting the CX Process Tool with inherited settings parameter in formation set in the tables will not be inherited by ITEMS in Field Terminal Blocks Sequence Control Blocks Sequence Control Blocks are used for sequence control in Loop Controllers Step ladder programs and sequence tables are used Sequence Control Blocks can be registered in the Sequence Control function block group For details re fer to 3 8 Creating Sequence Tables 105 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 User Link Table Blocks User Link Tables link Loop Controllers and PLC memory They can be registered as function blocks only in block diagrams
421. rship Function can be checked for each label NL NS ZR PS and PL of inputs 1 to 8 Tuning Section 4 7 1 2 3 1 Click on Check MF Button in the upper left corner of the Tuning Screen The Input Selection Dialog Box will be displayed Input select x Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 5 Input Input Input 8 2 Select an input Input 1 to 8 and click the OK Button The following Confirm MF Dialog will be displayed Each label NL NS ZH PS and PL will be displayed in a different color and the graph will show the output levels Y axis corresponding to the input values X axis 32000 Input select 305 Backup and Recovery Section 4 8 4 8 Backup and Recovery The function block data in RAM in the Loop Controller can be backed up in flash memory in the Loop Controller and the data in flash memory can be restored to RAM CX Process Tool Loop Controller Command Backup Flash Recovery memory Note With the LCBO2 05 unit Ver 1 50 or later the LCBO5D data can be backed up while continuing operation With other models stop Loop Controller operation before performing backup 4 8 1 Backup Procedure Backing Up Data Directly to Flash Memory Using Menus 1 2 3 1 Select LCU LCB element 2 Select Backup Data Operation Backup from the Execute Menu Backing Up LCU LCB Element or Function Block Data to Flash Memory after Download 1 2 3 1 Select an LCU LCB
422. s Item name displayed at pencil position Example PV source designation 001 Basic PID m E IP source designation Eze a RSP AD b The Grid Mode can also be selected to position lines on a grid Grid Mode can be turned ON and OFF during either Block Con nection Mode or Move Block Mode To delete a line select the line to be deleted click the right mouse button the line will be displayed in red and select Delete Line from the pop up menu A red frame is not displayed on an ITEM specified as the starting point of a connection with CX Process Tool Software version 2 50 and higher Up to three rows of six function blocks can be allocated to a single block diagram To connect more function blocks select the LCU LCB folder select Insert and add the new function blocks To connect two function blocks in different block diagrams place a function block with the same block address in each diagram Note A total of only 18 function blocks can be pasted into a block diagram in Fixed Location Mode 3 x 6 18 blocks To connect more function blocks select the LCU LCB folder Loop Controller and select Setting Insert Insert Block Diagram to add a new block diagram To make software connections between block diagrams paste a function block with the same block address in each block diagram 6 Data on the result of software connection is registered with the ITEM of each functio
423. s the following dialog box will appear and downloading will not be possible 01 LCODI 1 ERROR OCCURRED WHILE CLEARING ERROR CODE 0503 d Cancel The error message will appear with an error code or communications time out notice The probable cause can be determined from the error code Probable cause 0503 Serial communications have not been initialized 0202 Unit address setting error The unit address is not for a Loop Controller No I O tables have been created 0401 Node address setting error i e the address set is not 01 for Host Link communications 0101 The baud rate in the Controller Link does not match 110C The number of step ladder program instructions per LCU LCB element exceeds 4 000 Even though ITEM 059 in the Loop Controller s System Common block block model 000 is set to O to enable using the HMI the EM Area bank specified in ITEM 050 EM Area bank to allocate to HMI cannot be used because the specified bank does not exist in the CPU Unit or the specified bank has been converted to file memory Communications The CPU Unit is not in Host Link serial communications mode time out or the CPU Unit s communications conditions are wrong DIP switch settings or PLC Setup settings are wrong 4 Click the Start Button A bar will appear and show the progress of data downloading The following dialog box will appear on completion of data downloading LC001 transferi
424. s A Output value B Used to set the output value as B The value will be displayed in engineering units if the Engineering Unit Mode is set Wait width Used to set the wait width The value will be displayed in engineering units if the Engineering Unit Mode is set Max wait time Used to set the maximum wait time Time unit Used to set the time unit to seconds minutes or hours 330 Setting Segment Programs Appendix C Bank No Displays the bank number to be used Maximum number of steps used Max Step Number Used to set the maximum number of steps to be used The default setting is 10 Maximum number of banks used Max Bank Used to set the maximum number of banks to be used The default setting is O Bank Setting Button Used to edit bank data Program Pattern Data Address Setting Button Used to set the beginning address in the program pattern data Initial output value Used to set the BO value The value will be displayed in engineering units if the Engineering Unit Mode is set Unit The unit will be displayed if the Engineering Unit Mode is set Setting Step Data otep data is edited using the Segment Program 3 Edit Window For details on editing refer to Edit Window Func tions Setting the Maximum Number of Steps to Be Used The maximum number of steps to be used refers to the number of steps to be used in a single program Segment Program 3 stores in step data blocks the data to be used in the program
425. s Tool and CX Process Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus must be installed on the same computer CX Process Tool Section 1 1 1 1 2 Project Workspace Project Workspace can be used to access the data created in memory with the CX Process Tool Data can be created for up to 32 CPU Units and 96 Loop Con trol Units 3 Loop Control Units each for 32 CPU Units 32 LCBLILIs 1 each for 32 CPU Units The data has the following configuration Function Block Groups LCU LCB Elements System common one for each Loop y Function Block File Controller Field terminals Blocks for Each Node ist 00 LCBO3 J C Node01 ist 00 LCBO1 00 LCBO5 Basic PID 4 00 LCBOS5D Block diagrams Project Workspace lt 01 LC001 02 1 1 Node32 ist C 03 LCO001 M Project file mul Project Workspace data is stored in one folder called the project folder Project folders are created for the following commands e File New When a new project is created the project name will be used as the folder name e File Save As When a project is saved under a new name the new project name will be used as the folder name 1 1 3 Files Created with CX Process Tool The CX Process Tool creates a folder with the project name in the data folder under the default installation folder for the CX Process Tool and then creates the following files inside the project folder Project File mul The project
426. s are displayed as right justified engineering units shown with the units included in the same positions as in the ITEM list ITEM Setting Dialog Box for Segment Program 2 and Segment Program 3 Blocks 210 Displaying and Setting in Engineering Units Section 3 9 The ITEM setting dialog boxes for Segment Program 2 and Segment Program 3 blocks can be set using an engineering unit display Note For details on ITEM settings for Segment Program 2 and Segment Program 3 blocks refer to Appendix C Setting Segment Programs 211 Displaying Loop Controller Memory Maps Section 3 10 3 10 Displaying Loop Controller Memory Maps 3 10 1 Overview Note Loop Controller Control Blocks etc System Common Block Model Block Block Model 001 Control Blocks 500 User Link Table Tag C Field Block Terminal 212 When using CX Process Tool version 4 0 or higher a list can be displayed show ing the areas of the CPU Unit s I O memory that are being used by the Loop Con troller The list is displayed for each area type in address order The following areas can be displayed and the status can be confirmed by the color of the ad dress cell e When HMI I F Area is allocated Send Area Loop Controller CPU Blue Receive Area CPU Loop Controller Pink e When analog or contact signals are allocated in the addresses of the User Link Table Green e When analog or contact signals are
427. s not installed in the CPU Unit tag comment annotation and block diagram line data will not be transferred To transfer this data to a Memory Card refer to 4 9 Transferring Tag and Comment Data When LCBI JL Ver 3 0 or higher is used tag comment and annotation data can be stored in the Loop Controller without a Memory Card 2 Loop Control Units LC001 e Ver 2 0 or Later Block diagram information can be transferred partially only the layout data for the function blocks Data on lines between function blocks created in block diagrams cannot be transferred e Ver 1 5 or Earlier Block connection line data is not transferred Consequently the block diagram will not be displayed when an upload is performed Precautions for Use of Step Ladder Program Blocks e Step ladder programs created as ladder diagrams will not be transferred when ITEM 200 mnemonic flag for the step ladder block is 1 Always change ITEM 200 mnemonic flag to O convert into mnemonic code assemble and then perform the transfer e To perform an assembly operation for LCU LCB elements select Execute Assemble For step ladder programs select Operation Assembly Mnemonic code can be transferred when ITEM 200 mnemonic flag is 1 e f a download is executed when ITEM 200 mnemonic flag is 0 assembly i e conversion from ladder diagram to mnemonic code will be automatically per formed and mnemonic code will be downloaded automatic assemb
428. s selecting Tag Setting Monitor Tag from the When a Block Send Terminal to Seiting Settings Menu Computer or Area to Send to All Nodes is selected CSV Tag Same as selecting Tag Setting CSV Tag from the When a function block is selected Settings Menu Monitor Same as selecting Tag Setting Monitor Plus Tag from When Send All Blocks Receive Plus Tag the Settings Menu All Blocks Contact Distributor Internal Switch Input Selector or Constant Generator block is selected Network Settings Same as selecting Network Settings from the Settings When a function block file or Menu LCU LCB element is selected Change PLC Same as selecting Change PLC from the Settings Menu When a function block file is selected Insert Same as selecting Insert Node from the Settings Menu When the Project Workspace is selected Same as selecting Insert LCU LCB from the Settings When a function block file is Menu selected Same as selecting Insert Block Diagram from the When an LCU or LCB element is Settings Menu selected Same as selecting Insert Function Block from the When a function block group is Settings Menu selected Delete Same as selecting Delete from the Settings Menu When a function block file or LCU LCB element or block diagram or function block is selected Function Cut Same as selecting Function Block Cut from the When a function block is selected Block Settings Menu Copy Same as selecting Function Block Copy from the When a fu
429. sGateway ah C Cx Server Never show this message Cancel Using FinsGateway Select FinsGateway as the communications driver Using CX Server Select CX Server as the communications driver 1 The above dialog box will be displayed when the CX Process Tool is started while File Show Drive Select Dialog Display is selected It will not be displayed if File Show Drive Select Dialog Hide is selected To change the communications driver select File Show Drive Select Dialog Dis play and then start the CX Process by selecting Start Only from the Start Menu or I O tables If the CX Process was installed as part of the CX One not independently the above dialog box will not be displayed i e File Show Drive Select Dialog Hide will be selected and the CX Server will automatically be used as the communications driver To switch to the Fins Gateway select File Show Drive Select Dialog Display and then select FinsGateway at startup Projects created with CX Server selected as the communications driver are not completely compatible with projects created with FinsGateway selected as the communications driver The following points are incompatible be tween the projects created with different communications drivers e When CX Server is selected as the communications driver and the com puter is connected directly to the PLC node address set to 0 it won t be possible to select FinsGateway and open
430. set the CX Pro cess Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus will not be able to go online with the PLC 1 2 2 Settings Required on the CX Process Tool The CX Process Monitor and CX Process Monitor Plus use tag names set on the CX Process Tool to read and write data in Loop Control Units through func 9 Relationship with CX Process Monitor Section 1 2 CX Process Monitor Set Network Address Node Address and Unit Address Register Function Blocks for Data Exchange Set Tag Names Create a Monitor Tag File for CX Process Monitor Download Function Block Data to Loop Control Unit CX Process Monitor Plus Set Network Address Node Address and Unit Address Register and Connect Function Blocks To Exchange Data with CX Process Monitor Plus tion blocks for data exchange with the monitor software Before using the CX Process Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus the following settings must be made with the CX Process Tool The CX Process Monitor uses the network address node address and unit ad dress set using the CX Process Tool Setting Network Settings or Setting Change PLC for communications with the PLC The communications settings for the CX Process Monitor Plus are thus made from the CX Process Tool Create a Send Terminal to Computer Function Block or certain other function blocks with a block model between 401 and 404 with the CX Process Tool to specify the function block the analog sign
431. splayed Address with lowest digit O Detail Displays the details for the selected address in Detail View Memory map of LCB 01 00 1 CBO05 V2 1 X Select the memory area to Channel 250 amp displayed CIO W 0 j 1 2 3 4 5 46 98 99 x Indicates the lowest DM EM bank No 0 to 12 W250 digit as O to 9 IL W300 is used for the User Link Table W280 So it is displayed in green T W302 is displayed in aqua indicating an overlap CPU Loop Controller only of two more read links in the User Link Table Overlap Recv Area Click this field to switch the displayed area The range currently being displayed is indicated within YE a green frame w380 W301 is displayed in red indicating an overlap w390 Loop Controller CPU of two or more links in cluding write links in the User Link Table VET Memory Map legend Indicates the colors of the used areas wasn E User Link Table m HMI I F Send Area HMI I F Recv Area Field Terminal S3 Overlap Overap Recv Area 213 Displaying Loop Controller Memory Maps Section 3 10 Example 2 HMI I F Area Display EO gt Channel 00000 laja al 9 0 00000 0 00010 cs 0 00020 LESE ERES hie E0 00030 SS Sa eS See E0 00040 i Gt
432. ss 004 item 009 is different 1 000 2 000 B LCU No 00 The value of block address 004 item 010 is different 20 00 0 00 7 Block address 701 of LCB LCU NumberO0Condition signal registration is different 07 line Registered Mot registered 8 Block address 701 of LCB LCLI Number OCondition signal registration is different 10 line Mot registered Registered 9 Block address 701 of 1 Number00Condition signal registration is different 11 line Registered Not registered 10 Block address 701 of 1 Number00Condition signal registration is different 13 line Registered Not registered 11 Block address 701 of LCB LCU Number OOperation signal registration is different 06 line Registered Mot registered 12 Block address 701 of LCB LCU NumberDO M input data is different for condition area 12 line 5 Column WN Y 13 Finished verification 263 Run Stop Command 1111 Section 44 4 4 Run Stop Command Run stop commands can be sent from the CX Process Tool to a Loop Controller connected remotely Run Stop Commands 264 CX Process Tool Monitoring the Run Stop operation status Loop Controller Caution Check the following items before operating the Loop Controller e Make sure the Analog I O Units used with the Loop Controller are properly mounted e Make sure the unit numbers on the front panel of the Analog I O Units coincide with the unit numbers set in the Field Terminal Function Bloc
433. ster tags for user link tables as required Loop Control Units Send All Blocks 462 and Receive All Blocks 461 function blocks must be registered together Expanded CPU Unit Terminal and CPU Unit Terminal function blocks can be registered as required for ITEMs not handled by Send All Blocks 462 and Receive All Blocks 461 function blocks To set CSV tags for an ITEM that cannot be set with the CSV tag settings regis ter the Expanded CPU Unit Terminal or CPU Unit Terminal function blocks and input output the ITEM Note With Loop Control Units a CSV tag file cannot be compiled unless both Send All Blocks 462 and Receive All Blocks 461 function blocks are registered For LCBI J set System Common Block 000 ITEM 059 HMI Function Disable Switch ITEM 050 EM Area Bank Allocated for HMI Function and ITEM 051 Operation Cycle for HMI Function To set CSV tags for any other ITEM register the tags in the user link table and input output the ITEM Step 2 Setting CSV Tags Set the CSV tags for each function block as described below CSV tags can be set for the following function blocks e Loop Control Units Control blocks operation blocks except for Contact Distributor 201 and default registration TR internal switches External Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 Controller Terminal Blocks CPU Unit Terminal Blocks and Expanded CPU Unit Terminal Blocks I System Common Blocks control blocks operati
434. stination function block The following Send Dialog Box will appear 3 Check the input value in the dialog box In the above example the grayed out value on the right of the PV source designation reads 0 00 2 Input value If the above item 1 matches item 2 in value the connections are correct Stop Block Operation From the above Validate Action Screen the stop block operation command can Command for each be sent to each function block Function Block Take the following steps to execute the stop block operation command 1 2 3 1 Double click the function block Example The following Send Dialog Box will appear 274 Operation Check Section 4 6 2 Click the Stop Block Operation Button The operation of the function block will stop and Stopped will appear at the top of the function block 4 6 4 Wireless Debugging Ver 3 0 or Later Only The function for online debugging of created function blocks is referred to as the wireless debugging Calibration Mode The present values for the control block can be force set as pseudo input values from the Monitor Run Status Window The mode that performs pseudo input us ing the wireless debugging function is called the Calibration Mode Starting Calibration Mode Use the following procedure to set pseudo values 1 2 3 1 Confirm the operation of block diagrams 2 Right click a function block for which the present values are to be c
435. symbol table L Imported Program 3 Local symbol table Use the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Start the CX Programmer 2 Select Import CX Programmer Symbols from the Settings Menu The fol lowing dialog box will be displayed Import CX Programmer Symbols V arable information will be imported on User Link Table fram the project of L Pragrammer under starting Cancel 3 Click the OK Button The local symbol table from the CX Programmer will be imported to the user link table in the CX Process Tool as shown below e Example CX Programmer Symbol Table HewPLCI NewPrograml Symbols Im x DCN e vate e ia i amp L1 BOOL 1 02 Wark Alarm Lamp AL BOOL 1 03 Work Alarm Lampe AMS Ww BOOL 0 01 Work Auta M anual 5547 AUTO BOOL Work Auto Operating LIMITI BOOL 0 04 Werk Limit S1 input LIMIT2 BOOL 0 05 Work Limit 52 input BOOL 0 03 Wok Manual Operating PRESS_ERA BOOL 0 03 Work Press input error BOOL Work Rotate count error START BOOL 0 03 Work System run signal 165 User Link Tables Section 3 5 e Imported User Link Table Hodell LCB User link Table ALI Alarm Lamp 2 00 sec Constant 0002 2 Alarm Lampe 2 00 sec CIO 00001 Constant Hd 0003 AMS Auto Manual Sw 0 2 00 sec CIO 00000 Constant Hd 0004 AUTO Auto Operating 2 00 Constant Hd 0005 LIMIT1
436. system common operating cycle 0 01 s 0 02 s 0 05 s 0 10 s 0 20 s 0 50 s 1 00 s or 2 00 s If the user link table is pasted in a block diagram to make software connections and the function block data is downloaded to the Loop Control Board with the Update User Link Table Refresh Cycle selection selected in the CX Process Tool the setting made here will be ignored and data refreshing with the CPU Unit will be performed on the operating cycle of the function blocks that are the destination of the software connections 16 characters max any text string 23 characters max any text string Specify Link Mode Constant On change External sync Link Memory Area in I O memory of CPU Unit CIO W DM or EMO Memory See note 2 Memory The address of the word in I O memory to be allocated Address Analog or contact Bit 00 to 15 Position R W RD To Loop Controller Wr From Loop Controller Range Conversion ON OFF 0 value and 100 value Contact Synchro ITEM specified function block address and ITEM number Synchro nous Sig nization nal Read from ITEM Write ON OFF to ITEM Specify a read ITEM and or WRITE item function block address and ITEM number Pulse Output Select to specify a one shot pulse output when the signal See note 1 changes from OFF to ON Turns ON the output only once during the refresh cycle for user link tables and writes to the I O memory of the CPU Unit Enabled only when A D is a
437. t Edit Data Element Esas i No 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 OF Sequence Table Online editting Execution Form mew 08 Signal y Comment sw N Y IN CNTOO1 HI X0 BMP NodeO1 001 01 C3 00 LCBOS v1 5 225 C 01 System 1 02 Field Terminal 03 Sequence Control 701 Sequence Table 702 Sequence Table 2 04 Block Diagram 1 1 05 Block Diagram 2 1 06 Block Diagram 3 001 2 position ON OFF 002 2 position ON OFF Ready NUM 289 Operation Check Section 4 6 2 The Element Initial Data Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Change the set value or pre alarm value in this dialog box Element Initial Data Setup E X Element type Timer PN Change the set value or pre alarm value Set Value Pre Alarm value Unit 1 0 01 2 3 1sec X sec 4 min Comment a System element 0002 Registered Block address 70 Set and Send Delete Cancel 3 After changing the set value or pre alarm value click the Set and Transfer Button As shown below the set value of the element will change during op eration Action Validation on Element Screen CX Process Tool BMP Node01 LCBO5 1 5 03 702 Sequence Table 11 e 8 File View Settings Execute Scale DataEdit Operation Validate
438. t Create from the Options Menu 4 11 2 Setting the PLC Setup 1 2 3 1 Select PLC Info PLC Setting from the Settings Menu 2 Set the PLC Setup and then select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menus to transfer the PLC Setup to the CPU Unit 4 11 3 Changing the Operating Mode of the CPU Unit 1 2 3 1 Go online and select PLC Operating Mode from the Execution Menu The Change CPU Mode Dialog Box will be displayed Change CPU Mode ro Node00 CS1G H CPU42 Program Current Mode Monitor C Run 2 Select the operating mode PROGRAM MONITOR or RUN in the Mode Field and then click the Send Button 314 Password Protection Section 4 12 4 12 Password Protection Password protection can be set in the Loop Controller when using LCBO1 LCBO3 LCBO5 LCBO5D Setting a password enables uploading operations to be restricted No restrictions are placed on downloading 4 12 1 Online Operations for Loop Controller Setting Passwords in Use the following procedure to set a password in the Loop Controller connected Loop Controller online Note Once a password is set it must be input under Program Protection Input Password before function block data in the Loop Controller can be uploaded 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element e g 00 LCBO5 and then select Setting Program Protection Edit LCB Password The following dialog box w
439. t may no longer be possible to use certain Units Do not uninstall the CX Server Driver Management Tool or the CX Server from the control panel 2 Do not uninstall the CX Server if there are Programming Devices Such as the CX Programmer that use it as the communications driver If the CX Server is uninstalled it will no longer be possible to use these other pro grams 66 Installing and Uninstalling the Software Section 2 1 3 Do not uninstall the CX Server while other programs that use it as the com munications driver are running on the computer e g the CX Motion The CX Server may not uninstall properly if other programs are using it 4 Always uninstall the CX Server Driver Management Tool before uninstalling the CX Server If the CX Server is uninstalled first it may no longer be pos sible to uninstall the CX Server Driver Management Tool properly 1 2 3 1 Select Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs or Settings Control Panel Add Remove Applications from the Windows Start Menu Add Remove Programs 3 o x EL or Currently installed programs Sort by Mame M Change or EX CX Server Size 9 28MB B Remove Programs Click here For support information To change this program or remove it From your Change Remove computer click Change Remove Add New ids CX Server Driver Management Tool Size 9 28MB Programs 7 OMRON FinsGateway Version 2003 Embedded Edition Size 50 2MB V
440. t the tag name and tag comment for the analog input ITEM or contact input ITEM Input the scale range high limit and range low limit decimal posi tion and unit data items and then click the OK Button The following symbols are used in the field RH Range High Limit RL Range Low Limit DP Decimal position UNIT Unit Example for Contact Inputs Monitor Tag Ma 1 LEU Comment LCDOT 1 Black Address 550 Function Block model 409 Function Block DO Settings from Computer 000 Contact Input 001 Contact Input O02 Contact Input 003 Contact Input 004 Contact Input 005 Contact Input O06 Contact Input 007 Contact Input O08 Contact Input 009 Contact Input 010 Contact Input Contact Input Contact Input Cancel Input All Using the CX Process Monitor Section 3 2 1 2 3 1 Select the number ITEM and double click the Tag Name Field The following Input Data Dialog Box will appear x Input Data TagName 1 Tag Comment Cancel 2 Input the tag name along with a tag comment if necessary and click the Button Note 1 Itis imperative to input tag names The CX Process Monitor identifies the data using the tag names Maximum number of Illegal characters characters 8 standard size characters _ 16 standard size characters __ Note It is possible to input the tag name automatically through the system by clicking Input All
441. t when the execution condition is OFF Use RESET to turn OFF a bit that has been turned ON with SET RESET turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is 1 ON and does not affect the status of the operand bit when the execution condition is OFF Use SET to turn OFF a bit that has been turned ON with RE SET Outputs 1 ON for one operation cycle only when the execution condition goes to 1 ON from OFF DIFD 4 DIFD Write des tination block ad dress ITEM number STEP STEP Step number m BLOCK BLOCK Block ad SET CET SET dress step number Block ad dress Block ad dress step number Outputs 1 ON for one operation cycle only when the execution condition goes to 0 OFF from 1 ON STEP declares the step number and has no O O input conditions is a direction connection to the bus Any numbers in the range OO to 99 are used as the step number and are placed in ascending order 1 Logic sequence The step number is fixed at 00 and is functional at all times Declaration of step number 00 can be omitted 2 Step sequence When the step number is within the range 01 to 99 only one of the steps is functional When the program is started step number 01 is functional When the input conditions turn ON operation of the specified step number of the Step Ladder Program block at the specified block address 400 to 499 is started Run stop command
442. table Finds tags that match or contain the specified text Perfect matches or considering case can be set before searching Transfer Selected Entries Downloads the selected tags in the user When a line of tag data is selected to LC link table to the Loop Controller All Entries Downloads all tags in the user link table to the Loop Controller 86 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Filter Analog Displays analog signal tags Contact Displays contact signal tags Displays both analog and contact signal tags Read Write Read Displays tags that read from the CPU Unit from to the Loop Controller LCB Write to Displays tags that write from the Loop LCB Controller to the CPU Unit Read Displays tags that both read and write Write Memory ClO Displays tags allocated in the CIO Area of Area the CPU Unit W Displays tags allocated in the Work Area of the CPU Unit H Displays tags allocated in the Holding Area of the CPU Unit Displays tags allocated in the DM Area of the CPU Unit EM Displays tags allocated in the EM Area of the CPU Unit All Displays tags allocated in all of the areas in the CPU Unit Field Terminal Displays tags for field terminals Field Terminal Block Selected if a filter display is used for a user link table containing expansion settings CSV Tag Displays entries for CX Process Monitor SS Plus No Connection Tums OFF the display ofal
443. tag Assume data range of ITEM related to MV to be 0 100 i Cancel Select the Show extended property option The meanings of the other options are as follows e Always enable OPC Server scaling tag option Select to make outputting OPC Server scaling tags the default setting e Treat User Link Table as OPC Server scaling tag Select to output scaling tags for CSV tags in the user link table When selected OPC Server scaling tags can also be output to CSV tag entries in the user link table e Assume data range of ITEM related to MV to be 0 100 Select this option to set the data range s lower limit to 0 00 and upper limit to 100 00 for the three items MV MV output value or manual MV during MAN mode MH_LMT high MV limit ML_LMT low MV limit in the OPC Server Step 2 Select OPC Server Scaling Tag Output in CSV Tag Settings Select the option for OPC Server scaling tag output in the CSV tag settings Configure Project Information x General Communication CSV Tag Setting Function Block Diagram Step Lc gt v Show extended property mO RR TD DD DEDERE Treate User Link Table as OPC Server scaling tag Assume scale of ITEM related to MV to be 0 100 Cancel Step 3 Output Tag Files Select CSV Tag or RS View Tag under Create Tag File in the Execute Menu OPC Server Direct Access When using SYSMAC OPC Server version 2 5 or higher the HMI area is not used The
444. tags Uh wi e Rue M Pre scaling upper limit Range conversion upper limit value See note Pre scaling lower limit Range conversion lower limit value See note Note Can be changed only then outputting CSV tag information is selected when reg istering user link tables For tags other than those for user link tables default values are set range conversion upper limit 10 000 lower limit O 156 Using SCADA Software Section 3 4 3 4 2 CSV Output Function for HMI Data Allocation Status Procedure Data Format Note Note With CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher the allocation status of HMI data can be output in CSV format Allocation status shows the EM Area addresses allo cated to each tag tag ITEM 1 User link table tags are not included 2 The maximum number of lines is 65 535 Select Execute Create Tag File Create HMI I F Memory Map The CSV tags will be compiled and the CSV tag file will be saved in a file of the specified name default HMI IFMap csv Analog Data tag name ITEM tag name INT or UNIT gt allocated EM bank number address comment 10 PJUINT E5 89 Basic PID tag 10 LlUINT E5 90 Basic PID tag Tag010 D UINT ES 91 Basic PID tag Normal Contact Data tag name ITEM tag name bit position BOOL allocated EM bank number address comment Tag010_R L_SW_Bit00 BOOL E5_98 Basic PID tag Tag010_A M_SW_Bit01
445. ted correctly The unit number set on the front panel of the Analog I O Unit must be the same as the unit number set on the Field Terminal Function Block If the unit numbers are not the same I O read write will be performed on the data for another Spe cial I O Unit i e the one whose unit number is set in the Field Terminal Function Block The initial settings of the System Common Block in the Loop Controller must be set correctly In particular make sure that words in the Data Memory used for the Node Terminals in the CPU Unit controlling the Loop Controller are not used for other applications on the PLC When writing data to the I O memory in the CPU Unit with function blocks e g using Send All Blocks Expanded DO AO Terminal to CPU Unit or DO AO Ter minal to CPU Unit be sure that the words written to in memory are not being used for any other purpose If memory words are allocated to more than one purpose the PLC system may act unexpectedly and cause injury Always stop the operation of the LCBI J before converting any of the EM Area to file memory If any part of the EM Area that is being used by the LCBLI J for the HMI is converted to file memory during Board operation the system may operate in an unexpected fashion which may result in injury Do not perform processing in such a way that the Loop Controller and CPU Unit write to identical memory words allocated to a contact output or analog output of
446. ter01 A_M For Value1 user link table tag LNKOO7 ValueO1 For block address 702 step 03 For block address Creating Sequence Tables Write to ITEM Notation on CX Process Tool screen SET value destination Writing a constant to a function block ITEM write parameter Writing a constant to an CSV tag and tag ITEM Contact output ITEM for control and operation blocks User link table writing a constant to memory in the CPU Unit Settings on CX Process Tool screen ITEM Write tab destination Block ITEM ITEM Write tab destination Tag name ITEM Write tab destination User link table Setting method Select the block ITEM select the ITEM number from the detailed information and input the write data 32 000 to 32 000 Select the ITEM tag select the tag ITEM from the detailed information and input the write data 32 000 to 32 000 Select the area type select the user link table tag from the detailed information and input the write data 32 000 to 32 000 Input the scaled value for the user link table Note The following output forms can be selected Section 3 8 201 Creating Sequence Tables Setting screen on CX Process Tool Output Holding Output tab command classification OUT H destination Non holding Output tab command classification OUT L destination Output tab command classification OUT P
447. tered function blocks in graphic form There are the following two types of block diagram The notation method is de termined by the Loop Controller LCBI being used Function block layout method LCBL JL Ver 3 0 or later Block diagrams can be positioned without restriction called the Free Location Mode LCB L Ver 2 0 or earlier Function blocks must be position on any of 18 fixed or LC001 locations called the Fixed Location Mode Note The Free Location Mode cannot be used on versions before version 3 0 The Fixed Location Mode cannot be used on version 3 0 or later The following example shows the actual methods for connecting function blocks The editing functions described here are pasting creating connections between ITEMs and moving blocks using the mouse Example Al 4 point Basic PID MV1 Terminal 011 AD041 586 RSP Basic PID 011 Square Root AO 4 point 131 Terminal DA041 MV2 587 111 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Using the Free Location Mode 1 2 3 1 Select the folder for block diagram 1 Select Settings Edit Edit Block Diagram or double click the folder for block diagram 1 The following win dow will be displayed CX Process Tool DeviceA E File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help Dae i 00 1 05 3 0 Blo
448. ternately right click and select Validate Action Start The display will change to Sequence Table Validating Action NodeO1 LCB05 V1 5 03 701 Sequence Table 1 Ta Rule Sequence Table Validating Action 2128 001 IN 002 High high alarm output 002 IN TagOO02 R L Sw Remote Local switch IN Not set H START Hot start IN Tag002 A M Sw Auto Manusal switch H IN LNKODO1 Run Device 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 2 Select Edit Start from the Validate Action Menu Alternately right click and select Validate Action Online Edit Start Then select Start in the Verify Window The sequence table will be automatically verified Online editing is not pos sible if the sequence table data is not the same in the CX Process Tool and in the Loop Controller If the data is the same the display will change to Se quence Table Online Editing NodeO1 LCBO5 V1 5 03 701 Sequence Table 1 E Oj x Online editing is displayed Sequence Table Online editting IN Tag002 HH IN TagO02 R L Sw IN Not set H START Hot start IN Tag002 M SW Auto Manual switch IN LNKOOO1 Run Device 284 Operation Check Section 4 6 3 Edit the sequence table NodeO1 1 5 V1 5 03 701 Sequence Table 1 If the Y N designation is changed the color Sequence
449. the Alt Left Cursor Keys OX Process Tool Equipment 1 E nj xj File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate FBD Validate Action Window Help osal L a S mle Node01 LOBOS Block Diagram 1 Equipment NodeO1 001 01 2 28 00 LOBOS 225 H 01 System H 02 Field Terminal E 03 Sequence Control 3 04 Block Diagram 1 105 Block Diagram 2 106 Block Diagram 3 2 In the Project Workspace Screen select the block to be pasted The block will be highlighted 115 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 3 Click the right mouse button at the pasting position in the right pane Select Paste Function Block from the pop up menu The function blocks will be pasted as shown below OX Process Tool Equipment 01 File View Settings Execute Scale Change Mode Manipulate Validate Action Window Help 7 Si 01 LOBOS Block Diagram 1 1 Equipment 1 001 011 Cycle System common operation cycle 6 00 LOBOS 225 01 System 901 001 H 02 Field Terminal Al 4 point ADO41 Basic PID 1 03 Sequence Control py 3 04 Block Diagram 1 1 280 05 Block Diagram 2 1 06 Block Diagram 3 PV_ABN 003 902 Square Root AD 4 point 0041 PY
450. the Loop Control Unit to download Changing block address for registered Not possible Possible you can also add 1 function blocks Note You can also import block files ist created using Ver 1 00 15 Version Improvements Section 1 4 1 4 2 Version 1 50 The improvements made from version 1 20 to version 1 50 of the CX Process Tool are as follows Ver 1 20 Ver 1 50 Function blocks that Not compatible with Compatible with the creation of following new function blocks with be created Loop Control Unit Ver the Ver 1 50 Loop Control Units Segment Program 2 Block 1 50 Model 157 Accumulated Value Input Adder Block Model 182 Accumulated Value Input Multiplier Block Model 183 Constant Comparator Block Model 202 Variable Comparator Block Model 203 Clock Pulse Block Model 207 ON OFF Valve Manipulator Block Model 221 Motor Manipulator Block Model 222 Reversible Motor Manipulator Block Model 223 Motor Opening Manipulator Block Model 224 Compatible with the following new Loop Control Unit Ver 1 50 ITEM creations AT auto tuning functions of Basic PID block Block Model 011 and Advanced PID Block Model 012 and wait function and additional steps step numbers 8 to 15 of the Ramp Program block Block Model 155 Printing functions Except for function e You can print block diagrams ladder diagrams and cross refer blocks only open block ences by LCU element or node even if they are not open
451. the Loop Controller 6 Compile the monitor tag files Set Network Address The CX Process Monitor Plus uses the network address node address and unit Node Address and Unit address set using the CX Process Tool Settings Network Settings or Set Address tings Change PLC for communications with the PLC The communications settings for the CX Process Monitor Plus and thus made from the CX Process Tool Note The CX Process Monitor and CX Process Monitor Plus use FinsGateway as the communications driver for connections with the PLC When using the CX Pro cess Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus always set FinsGateway as the com munications driver for the CX Process Tool If the CX Server is set the CX Pro cess Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus will not be able to go online with the PLC Register and Connect Function Blocks To Exchange Data with CX Process Monitor Plus Loop Control Unit Function block data to Send All Blocks block Block Model 462 and HMI settings in the System Common exchange Receive All Blocks block Block Model 461 block Block Mode 000 Contact signals to exchange Contact Distributor Block Model 201 or Internal Switch Block Model 209 Analog signals to exchange Input Selector block Block Model 162 and Constant Generator block Block Model 166 5 Eile View S the CX Process Monitor Plus 3 Project a NodeO1 001 01 01 Lo001 1 16 H 01 S
452. the grid width from Wide Middle and Narrow Grids can be displayed on block diagrams and lines can be created at the spacing for the selected grid and moved In either case the function will be the same as selecting Grid Mode from the Display Mode Menu for the block diagram display mode Tag Display Mode When this option is selected CSV tag names are displayed for the function block names of function blocks pasted on the block diagram This option is not se lected by default This option performs the same function as the Show CSV Tag Name command on the Change Mode Menu in Edit Block Diagram Mode Color Function Block bitmap When this option is selected function blocks pasted in the function block dia gram are displayed in colors according to the type of function block When this option is not selected all function blocks are displayed in gray This option is not selected by default e Adjustment blocks Green e Operation blocks Light brown e Field terminals Pink e User defined blocks Blue e Other Gray 230 Setting Options Section 3 12 Note The setting will not apply to any function block diagrams that are open when the setting is changed Close the function block diagram window and then reopen it to see the results of changing this option 3 12 6 Step Ladder Tab Page Configure Project Information Function Block Diagram Step Ladder Sequence Table User Link Table 4 Scale 1 00
453. the project later because Fins Gateway must have a node address setting of 1 or higher It is possible to open the project and use FinsGateway if the node address is changed Select CX Server open the project change the node address to 1 or higher file name other than Node00 and save the project again Select FinsGateway and open the project e When a project has been created with FinsGateway selected as the com munications driver and that project is later opened with CX Server se lected as the communications driver the network address will be set to O automatically After opening the project reset the network address setting in each node s function block file Initial Settings for Online Connections Section 4 2 4 2 2 Using FinsGateway Serial Connections Initial Settings 1 2 3 Initial Settings in CX Process Tool 1 Set the unit numbers of the Loop Control Units with the rotary switches on the front panels Loop Control Units only Set the I O tables Note The creation of the I O tables with the version 6 1 or higher of the CX Programmer is restricted as follows e The Loop Control Unit will not be recognized Instead a message say ing that the type of the Unit is unknown will appear after mounting the Unit Board creating the I O table online and reading the registered I O table on the I O table window using From PLC e The Loop Control Unit cannot be set in the I O table by editing the I
454. the value or select Tag Name Field Terminal Sequence Control and se lect from the Function Block Group Block ITEM and ITEM pull down lists BLKOO1 ITEMO18 x Data Name PY error source designation Data Range Multiple Data 000000 999255 for contact Data Description BBB Block address 111 ITEM No Connection data C Block ITEM Number Data Tag Name Field Terminal Sequence Control Function Block Group 000 All ud Block ITEM 000 Not set SystemCommon ITEM 007 FAIL CPU Uinit fatal eror C User Link Table Entry Back Next Cancel Note The pull down list can be used only for If the destination is an ITEM a field terminal cannot be selected from the Block ITEM pull down list To use a field terminal register a user link table and then select from the list 127 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 3 1 10 Saving the Project Workspace Save the created Project Workspace as a project file mul in a folder of the proj ect name When saving the project file all the following files will be saved in the same proj ect folder These files cover all the function block data in the Loop Controllers under one CPU Unit except the monitor tag data File type File name extension Function block files Mnemonics Ladder diagram mtld information files Comment CSV tag setting fe mojecnamecw CX Server configuration f
455. ther application The baud rate setting in the Set the correct baud rate FinsGateway CLK UNIT are wrong ERROR The PLC is OFF Turn ON the PLC CODE 0A1B communications 319 Error Codes Section 5 2 Error code Fins CX Gateway Server ERROR ERROR An attempt has been made to CODE CODE register more than 4 000 step 110C OAOD ladder sequence instructions for one Loop Controller Probable cause Possible remedy A maximum of 4 000 step ladder sequence instructions can be registered for each Loop Controller Even though ITEM 059 in the Correct the setting of ITEM 050 EM Area bank to allocate LCBI 5 System Common to HMI in the LCBI J System Common block block block block model 000 is setto model 000 0 to enable using the HMI the EM Area bank specified in ITEM 050 EM Area bank to allocate to HMI cannot be used because the specified bank does not exist in the CPU Unit or the specified bank has been converted to file memory An attempt has been made to write an ITEM that cannot be written while the operation of the CX Process Tool is suspended A cold start or hot start was Execute the cold start after the backup has been attempted during backup completed processing ERROR ERROR A destination address is not set Correct the routing tables CODE CODE in the FinsGateway routing 0501 0501 tables There are no backup files in the There are no backup files in the Me
456. to F Hex set on the front of the Loop Control Unit If the unit address setting is not correct 16 the unit number setting it will not be possible to connect the Loop Control Unit online Note The unit address is input in decimal 16 to 31 with the CX Process Tool 3 After inputting the unit address click the OK Button Note The node address must be set whether a Host Link SYSMAC WAY or Peripheral Bus Toolbus connection is being used If the node ad dress setting is incorrect an error will occur in downloading opera tions and the following error message will be displayed in the dialog box Error occurred during Clear All ERROR CODE 0401 or 0202 Note When CX Server has been selected Host Link or Peripheral Bus connection the PLC model and CPU that were set in the Change PLC Dialog Box will be displayed next to the title in the Project Workspace Also the unit address setting of the Loop Controller will be displayed next to the LCU LCB element name as shown in the following diagram 28 Equipment i uin ee eee PLC and CPU model displayed next to Node01 01 Lena 16 Unit address 16 displayed next to LC001 01 4 2 4 Peripheral Bus Toolbus Connections Initial Settings The initial Unit settings are the same as the settings for FinsGateway although the Peripheral Bus connection can be used to connect to the CPU Unit only Set the CPU Unit s serial communications mode to Peripheral Bus mode e Tur
457. troller PC is used however in some Program ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc Copyrights and Trademarks Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Other system and product names that appear in this manual are the trademarks or registered trade marks of the respective company OMRON 2000 rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa tion contained in this publication About Loop Controllers
458. troller Memory Maps Section 3 10 3 10 2 Operation Procedure Use the following procedure to display a list showing the status of which words in the CPU Unit s I O memory are being used by the Loop Controller 1 2 3 1 Select Show Memory Map from the Execute Menu 2 The Memory Map of LCB Window will be displayed 3 10 3 Screens Memory Map Display 1 2 3 1 Select the memory area type to be displayed as a list from the pull down list at the top left of the screen CIO W H DM EM bank Nos 0 to 12 2 Enter the first word of the memory area in the Channel field 3 The corresponding address cells will be displayed using the following col ors The colors differentiate how each area is being used by the Loop Con troller Bie HMiFSeniArea LoopConmoler CPU Field Terminal Red Overlap including overlap in data written to the CPU Unit Overlap Recv Area overlap in data read from CPU Unit Other memory links Example 1 Displaying Areas Used for User Link Table Find Overlapping Searches for addresses with overlaps Find Overlapping Whole Area Displays a list of the overlapping addresses in the Search Result Window Bin Hex Switches between binary and hexadecimal Checking for Overlapping of Reading attribute Treats Overlap Hecv Area as Overlap The function returns to Overlap Recv Area when clicked again Reload Refreshes the list Enter the first word of the selected area to be di
459. ts b If the text is not being displayed even if the font size is changed it may be necessary to enlarge the annotation Select the annota tion again select the symbol on the right side of the annotation arrows will be displayed on both sides of the symbol and en large the annotation c When the annotation is displayed over a function block or con necting line and covers up a symbol select Selected Annota tion Send Behind Symbols and Lines d If two annotations overlap either one can be moved to the front or back by selecting Selected Annotation Bring to Front or Se lected Annotation Send to Back Converting Ladder Take the following steps to convert the step ladder programs created in the lad Diagrams to Mnemonics der diagram into mnemonic code and display the program in mnemonic code This procedure is possible only when ITEM200 the Mnemonic Flag of the step ladder program block model 301 is set to 0 The step ladder program cannot be converted to mnemonic code if ITEM20O is set to 1 185 Creating Step Ladder Program Instructions Section 3 7 12 9 186 1 Select Mnemonics from the Manipulate Ladder Menu or click the icon The following screen will appear 701 Mnemonics Command Operand Mame 001 STEP 00 gt Insert Row Delete Row Refresh OF Cancel 2 Click the Refresh Button The step ladder program in the ladder diagram will be converted into mnemonics and displayed
460. ts nodes lists are displayed List monitor tag list is Units only etc displayed CSV Tag List CSV tag list i e open CSV tag When LCU LCB Print CSV Tag List Print when the lists LCU LCB elements or nodes element or node CSV tag list is function block file displayed is selected All of the above data by LCU LCB Print All None element or node i e function blocks block diagrams ladder diagrams cross references and monitor tag lists ITEM list Open ITEM lists When ITEM lists Print ITEM List Print when the are displayed ITEM list is displayed Sequence Table Sequence table When LCU LCB Print Sequence Print Sequence The entire table will be printed if element is Table Table General is selected If Separated is selected selected expanded portions will be printed on separate pages User Link Table When LCU LCB Print User Link Print User Link element is Table Table selected Connection Map When LCU LCB Print Connection Print Connection element or block is Map Map selected 216 3 11 2 Printing Function Blocks 12 82 box will appear Section 3 11 1 Select Print and Function Block from the File Menu The following dialog Print Function Block List E3 1 Print Range Specify LCB LCU AILCUs Print Selection ontents 00 LCBO1 endiFunction Black Groups Specity Range of Details and kuncian Block Group 11 99 Block Diagr
461. ts will be LnkTable csv LCBL Only reflected in the user link table when the project is opened or when the active node is switched Data Files of Sequence The data file of sequence table consists of sequence table data Tables stbl 1 1 4 Relationships between Tag Files The relationships between the tag files created by the CX Process Tool and the HMI applications that use these files are shown below The HMI applications that use the tag files include NS series PTs SCADA software the CX Process Moni tor and the CX Process Monitor Plus CX Process Tool Imported NS Face Plate Auto Builder NS project file ipp binary NS series PT for SCADA software Taglist csv Outputs CSV tag file Outputs RS View tag file Outputs CX Process Outputs CX Process Execute Create Tag Execute Create Tag File RS Monitor tag file Monitor Plus tag file File CSV Tag View Tag Execute Create Tag Execute Create Tag File Monitor Tag FileMonitor PlusTag CSV tag file CSV tag file CX Process CX Process CX Process Cx Process Monitor Plus Tool version Monitor tag tag file 3 2 or higher monitor csv j for SCADA Tool version software 3 2 or higher Taglist csv file mtagmst mtagsubmst CX Process l Monitor Plus tag Automatically file automatically generated generated when Start Button is clicked Imported Automatically generated
462. ttings Menu The following dialog box will ap pear 2 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will appear Setup network address Metwork address Mode address Unit address 16 31 Cancel 3 Set the network address to any value between 000 and 127 in the Network Address Field and set node address 01 in the Node Address Field Do not set the node address to a different value if the serial connection is used otherwise no communications will be possible 4 Click the OK Button Note The COM1 and COM2 ports of the personal computer must have dif ferent network addresses The COM1 and COM2 ports will be speci fied during serial initialization explained later If there is any duplica tion of network addresses serial communications will not be pos sible Setting Unit Addresses Loop Control Units only 1 2 3 1 After the above settings select the LCU element 1 1 to LC001 3 and select Network Settings from the Settings Menu The following dialog box will appear with the network address and node address already set Note a Ifthe network address or node address has not been set a differ ent dialog box will appear and prompt the user to input them After the addresses are input the dialog box for unit address setting will appear b The unit address can be set with the LCU element selected but not with the Project Workspace selected Setup network address LOU 01
463. ture 0001 to temperature 0016 Count B Range Conversion tf ON OFF 0 0 100 10000 DP position 2 Also select the option to output CSV tag information if it is to be output to the tag file are registered with the same attributes and addresses from DM 00100 to DM 00115 are allocated to them Note Once registered the tag names and attributes can be changed indi vidually using the same method as in Method 1 4 Method 4 Automatic Registration when Pasting Field Terminal Block and Creating Software Connections 1 2 Select Settings Option On the User Link Table Tab Page of the Configure Project Information Setting Window select the Register Tag Name automatically when connected to Field Terminal option Paste the function block on the block diagram When software connections are made the ITEMs that are connected to the field terminal block will be automatically registered in the user link table User Link Tables Section 3 5 3 5 3 Importing CX Programmer Symbols into a User Link Table If CX Programmer is running on the same computer information on all of the symbols in the local symbol table in the current CXP Project can be imported into a user link table Note The CX Programmer must be version 2 0 or higher CX Programmer CX Process Tool Local symbol User link table Project PLC Program 1 D 2 Local
464. unction Block File Settings Note Ifthe current function block file has been changed it must be saved before executing this command Network Settings Sets the network address node address and unit When a function address block file or LCU LCB element is selected Change PLC Makes initial settings for online connections such as the When a function PLC model and network type settings when connecting block file is selected online with CX Server Tag Monitor Sets tags for CX Process Monitor with the tag names tag When a Block Send Setting Tag Loop comments scaling and units Terminal to Control Computer or Area to Unit only Send to All Nodes Function Block is selected Sets CSV tags for each function block for output to When a function SCADA software Tags include the tag name tag block file is selected comment scaling unit etc Note The tag names are representative tags The ITEM tags under the tags are predetermined and fixed for each function block These can be saved in CSV for mat as CSV tag files Monitor Sets tags for CX Process Monitor Plus with the tag When a Send All Plus Tag names tag comments scaling and unit Blocks Receive All Blocks Contact Distributor Internal Switch Input Selector or Constant Generator block is selected 74 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Submenu Description Conditions for Command selection Settings Insert Creates and inserts
465. unction block function block that has been pasted Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Edit User Link Table Mode Menus Pop up Menu Displayed by Right clicking Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Adds a tag to the user link table The User Link Table Edit Dialog Box will be displayed Block Set Adds multiple tags to the user link table adding serial numbers to the file name Increases the entry numbers for the When a line of tag data is selected specified entry and all entries lower than it by an increment of 1 Arrange Number Reassigns all entry numbers in ascending When line of tag data is selected order This is not a reordering function The reference for the related function blocks is also automatically changed by this operation Selected Edits the basic data in the user link table When line of tag data is selected Edits the extension data in the user link When line of tag data is selected table Delete Selected Entries Edits the selected user link table tag When line of tag data is selected Deletes all tags from the user link table Delete Registered Entry Deletes the CX Process Tool entry and the When line of tag data is selected entry stored in the LCB at the same time Update Selected Entries Sets the refresh cycle for the tags selected When a line of tag data is selected Refresh in the user link table Cycle All Entries Sets the refresh cycle for all tags in the user link
466. urned ON and operation will start when the backup has been completed If the power supply is turned OFF for more than 24 hours however RAM data will be lost and operation will be started with the data that was previously saved to flash memory If this happens the Cold Start Auto execution Flag A35807 will turn ON to show that the previous data has been used Use this bit in programming to take whatever steps are necessary such as downloading the most recent func tion block data For LCBL 1L only Loop Control Unit data is monitored and operated using CX Process Monitor or CX Process Monitor Plus based on the monitor tag files created using CX Pro cess Tool When creating monitor tag files using CX Process Tool CX Process Monitor must be installed on the same computer Before using function block data in actual operation confirm operation by moni toring run status to check the load rate select Execute Operation Monitor Run Status and validating actions select Validate Action Start with CX Pro cess Tool In particular be sure to confirm that the load rate will be less than 60 For details on the load rate refer to the Operation Manual for the Loop Control ler Application Precautions 4 N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution A N Caution When uploading the Loop Controller s function block data observe the following precautions When performing Upload New for
467. us H L status See note 1 bar color change if alarm occurs Settings Setting values for P D and MV limit High Low High High Alarm High Alarm Low Example Alarm Low Low Alarm and Deviation Alarm Basic or Advanced PID SP MV manual mode only A M switching See note 1 R L switching See note 1 Note Refer to 4 7 3 Screen Configuration below for details on the screen configura tions and setting procedures 4 To close the Tuning Screen click the X Button in the upper right corner of the window If data logging is being performed at the time the logging file will be saved when the Tuning Screen is closed Note With CX Process Tool version 3 2 or higher up to four Tuning Screens can be opened at the same time Opening more Tuning Screens however will increase the communications load and can cause large errors in the data monitoring log ging refresh cycle 4 7 2 Data Logging on Tuning Screens Starting Logging Data logging is started when the Tuning Screen is opened Logged Data The following ITEM data is logged for each function block in the Tuning Screen Tuning Screen 1 Basic PID Block address and function block name TIC001 4 name In 6 4 ITEM name ITEM name etc chronological Record 2003 09 01 22 00 05 55 01 60 00 63 00 dor Record 2003 09 01 22 00 06 55 15 60 00 69 00 Record 2003 09 01 22 00 07 56 25 60 00 70 00
468. us as follows e Function block data Set CSV tags e Individual contact signals Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the con tacts in the Internal Switch block Block Model 209 e Individual analog signals from LCU element to computer Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Input Selection block Block Model 162 e Individual analog signals from computer to LCU element Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the analog signals in the Constant Generator block Block Model 166 10 Generate the CX Process Monitor Plus tag file Execute Create Tag File Monitor Plus Tag 11 Start the CX Process Monitor Plus and click the Start Button S 8 Register and connect the function blocks to exchange data with the CX Pro cess Monitor Plus Items to Registrations and 15 monitor connections Function Only register the HMI settings in the System Common block block data function blocks Block Mode 000 Contact Register and connect Contact Distributor Block Model 201 signals the function blocks Internal Switch a Model 209 Analog Register and connect Input Selector block Block Model 162 and signals the function blocks Constant Generator block Block Model 166 9 Set CSV tags and tags for the CX Process Monitor Plus as follows e Function block data Set CSV tags e Individual contact signals Set CX Process Monitor Plus tags for the con tacts in the Internal Switch block Bloc
469. user link table with automatic tag naming when software connections are made for field terminals When selected sets the refresh On period for tags in user link tables to the same value as the block to which a software connection is made Scale Sets the display zoom for the 100 connection map n When selected refreshes connection map displays continuously 225 Setting Options Section 3 12 3 12 2 General Tab Page Configure Project Information x General Communication CS Tag Setting Function Block Diagram Step Li 4 Project Workspace Display by Tag name Enable OPC server Direct Access Tag Project Workspace Display by Tag name When this option is selected CSV tag names will be displayed for function blocks on the project tree whenever CSV tag names have been set When this option is not selected the default function block names will be dis played for function blocks on the project tree as normal Make the tag name registration default When this option is selected the default ITEMs can be specified from pull down lists of tag names and tag ITEM names for the following e For the source designation connection data designation for a function block e When Edit Edit Connection is selected after right clicking an ITEM dis played in blue e When editing signals in sequence tables e When editing symbols in step ladder diagrams 226 Setting Options Section 3 12
470. ut value Y1 output value s 022 X8 input value 036 Applicability for each rule PV source 029 Current SP setting designation Indication and Setting 031 lt PV ABN 018 PV error contact source designation HSP Remote set point source designation 326 Function Function block ITEM Notation in Block Diagrams Appendix B block diagram Block Abbreviation ITEM Abbreviation ITEM for analog number for analog number input ITEMs output Model ITEMs Indication 012 PV PV source MV C 087 MV output and mE designation Operation Indication and 032 2 PV_ABN PV error contact source designation X1 Auto p source p MV ABN MV error contact source designation Ratio Reference input Current SP output Setting source designation 033 PV ABN PV error contact MV Output source designation External ratio setting source designation MV ABN MV error contact source designation Indicator PV source 034 designation PV error contact source designation ES100X External ratio setting Controller source designation Terminal 045 LLL IL un Manipulated variable 029 Current SP setting 327 Appendix C Setting Segment Programs A special input interface is provided for setting program patterns and bank data for Segment Program 2 Block Model 157 and Segment Program 3 Block Model 158 blocks This section describes
471. ution Menu to transfer data Memory Card to the Memory Card Note If Memory Card backup is not required when the Memory Card is installed dis able the option to transfer data from the Memory Card 310 Transferring Tag and Comment Data Section 4 9 4 9 2 Recovering Data from the Memory Card Inner Flash Memory Memory Card Hecovery of data from inner flash memory can be performed only when perform ing a new upload 1 2 3 1 Select the element in the Project Workspace Area 2 Perform a new upload 3 Click the Start Button and data will automatically be transferred to the inner flash memory after the function block data is transferred Hecovery of data from a Memory Card can be performed only when a new upload is performed Use the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the LCU LCB element in the Project Workspace Area 2 Perform a new upload 3 The following dialog box will be displayed Transfer from LC New x Start transfering Initial setting data 0 iiam data EXIIT Receiving Status LCB gt PC Start Cancel v Transfer data from Memory Card 4 Click the Option Button and check that the Transfer data from Memory Card option is selected This option is normally selected by default when the Memory Card is installed 5 Click the Start Button Function block data will be automatically transferred from the Memory Card after being downloaded Note 1 If Me
472. very Form cycle Start by S1 Sets the sequence table to be started by S1 Start Only First Sets the sequence table to be executed on the Cycle first cycle Not Execute Set the sequence table so that it s not started Undoes the previous operation Check Errors Checks for errors in the sequence table that has been entered Print Prints the sequence table normally Separated Prints the sequence table in sections Vertical Line Displays vertical lines 8 Overview of User Interface Section 2 2 Mem Commana eschplion Stas validation cf ihe sequence table Stop Stops validation of the sequence table When a table is being validated Online Edit Start Starts editing the sequence table When operation is being validated Stops editing the sequence table During editing Transfer to LC Downloads the edited sequence table When operation is being validated Pop up Menu Displayed by Right clicking Pop up menu command Conditions for selection Edit Mode Enables editing a sequence table Disables editing a sequence table View Displays a sequence table Mode Displays an element to enable editing it Cut All Displays all elements for each page Elements Cuts one or more signal rows When one or more rows signal value are selected in Edit Mode Copy Copies one or more signal rows When one or more rows signal value are selected in Edit Mode Paste Pastes one or more signal
473. wPLC1 inl x File Edit View Options Help fl CS1G CPU42 44 Inne y DI 1900 Loop Control Boardig Hm 9 00 i PR 0000 Rack 01 is i Units Select Start Special Application nit Commen 5 4 0000 Rack 02 SYSMAC BUS Master Unit Setup Select Start with Settings Inherited Save Parameters Load Parameters SSS em Start Special Application Start with Settings Inherited Delete CsiG CPU42 Offline nit infarmatian 2 CX Process Tool will start and at the same time the Function Block File for the node will be inserted Settings Insert Insert Node At this time the following dialog box will be displayed The Number Model setting e g 00 LCBO5 will be automatically selected based on the Loop Control Board Unit model in the original Table Win dow 101 Creating Function Block Section 3 1 Node is inserted automatically The Insert LCB LC001 Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool CXPrc050128115931 File View Settings Execute Help amp Re Si CXPrca5c z i Node unregistered The Number Model e g 00 LCBO5 is set automatically based on the Unit Board model in the I O Table Window inset LCB LCU x LC Type LCB LCU EPU Unit Process CPU Unit Information Number Model 00 LCBO5 Unit Ver Tile ceu
474. will be displayed if an attempt is made 1 Main Screen Including Pop up Menus e Settings Program Protection Edit LCB Password e Execute Delete Registration Function Block Delete e Execute Transfer to LC FBD Information e Reset the load rate under Execute Operation Monitor Run Status Set the ITEM displayed as Reset to 0 e Execute Operation RUN Stop Command HOT START or COLD STAHT Here an error code of 110C will be generated 2 User Link Table Pop up Menu e Transfer to LC Selected Entries e Transfer to LC All Entries 3 Edit Block Diagram Mode Menus Including Pop up Menus e Manipulate FBD Setting Block Operation Cycle Transfer to LC 4 Downloading the System Common Block when transferring individual ITEM data settings 5 Transferring LCU LCB folder or function block groups 6 Executing the Clear All operation 7 Executing the Hecovery operation Note If the power supply is interrupted while backup is being performed during opera tion backup processing will be automatically re attempted after the power sup ply is restored In this case backup will be performed with the Loop Controller operation in the stopped state With the CS1D CPUI CPU Unit operation will also stop 4 8 2 Recovery Procedure 1 2 3 1 Select LCU LCB element 2 Select Backup Data Operation Recovery from the Execute Menu Note For a Loop Control Unit the contents of flash memory
475. wing dialog box will be displayed Print Mode Print area ET Select area Start End All pages Show Start page Hide Cancel 2 To print all the block diagrams within the LCU LCB element select the All check box To select specific block diagrams for printing select the Select Area check box and specify the start block diagram and the end block dia gram Start End correspond to the start and end block diagram numbers registered in ascending order One block diagram will be printed per page You can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The block diagrams in active function block files will start printing Printing for a Node Maximum LCU Elements and 1 Element 1 2 3 1 Select the active function block file in the Project Workspace and then se lect Print and Block Diagram in the File Menu 2 One block diagram will be printed per page You can also specify the start page Select the Show and Hide Buttons on each page to show and hide specific pages 3 Click the OK Button The block diagrams in active function block files will start printing 219 Printing Section 3 11 3 11 4 Printing Ladder Diagrams Printing an Active i e Currently Open Ladder Diagram 1 2 3 1 Select Edit Step Ladder Mode Select the step ladder block and then select Setting a
476. without backing up the setting data the previous setting data will all be lost 1 Execute the Backup Restore FinsGateway Setting Data program on the CD CD ROM drive gt Fgwv3 FgwUtils SettingSalvage exe Backup Restore Configuration Registry C Restore from File Allow Access Rig C Allow Access Rights other users File Name E Program Files QMRON FinsServerNTMoc ni Execute Q Services After press Execute button Access Rights of Services be allowed to All users Access Rights cannot be restricted once press Execute Execute Information EE SS xFinsServerz E Program FilesNOMRON FinsServerNT Close 2 Select the Backup to File option and click OK Remove the previous version of FinsGateway by referring to that manual for de tails If the FinsGateway reinstallation process fails execute the following program from the CD ROM to remove all the files and registry data used by FinsGateway CD ROM drive gt Fgwv3 FgqwUtils FgqwRemover3 exe After removing FinsGateway restart the computer If the following steps are per formed without restarting the computer the installation will not be completed properly If Internet Explorer is not already installed or if the version is old the FinsGate way installation will display a warning to update it Update Internet Explorer Microsoft Internet Explorer is not included on the CD ROM Refer to the Microsoft website fo
477. wnload ing or uploading data The CSV setting file contains the CSV tag settings required to output a CSV tag file for SCADA software This data is automatically generated in advance by the system It can be edited by the user using Excel or another editor CX Process Tool Section 1 1 Note CSV Tag Files for SCADA Software csv Default File Name TagList csv Tag Files for RS View Note csv User set File Name Comment Files cmt CX Server Settings File cdm Note The file contains the tag names tag comments scaling upper limits scaling low er limits scaling decimal point units and other settings for each function block The data is comma delimited This file does not contain the tags for individual ITEMs in function block or ad dress allocations for CPU Unit I O memory These are stored in the CSV tag files for SCADA software after the CSV tags have been compiled This file is automatically generated after CSV tag settings have been made after selecting Settings Tag Setting CSV Tag or for CX Process Tool software version 3 1 or higher when function blocks are saved in function block files after selecting the automatic CSV tag registration option when registering function blocks This file is saved in the data project folder under the CS Process installation folder as project name csv The CSV automatic tag registration function can be used with version 3 1 or higher to automatical
478. y L Low Alarm 0 00 ad LL Low Low Alarm PV Bar Display This bar shows the PV range lower limit to upper limit Green Status normal Red PV Alarm either HH H L LL occurred Blue Alarm OFF Light blue Function block calculations stopped Tuning Section 4 7 Batch Flowrate Capture 014 Blended PID 013 Tag name Tag name Batch BlendPiD Batch Flowrate Blended PID AUT f NR nstantaneous value NR PV numerical value displa Yl 320 00 flowrate display Yi 62 50 dad uc 52 50 Batch accumulated lll SP numerical value display value display Switch to Re TOTAL mote Button 0 Accumulation Counter Preset value BM display 100 00 Reset Button S3 Batch accumulated value SP 1 Batch BM SM display SM 950 0 SP ical value displa SP position displa Change Button SP numerical value display Batch Run MAINBATCH Main batch display PV bar display Button 51 PRESATCH Pre batch display Batch Stop 2 asse Control Restart Button Switch to AUTO Button Button 51 OFF S2 OFF TR MAN Control Interrupt Button HEN to MAN Button S2 ON Switch to AUTO Button r 00 x Switch to MAN Button ers Fuzzy Logic 016 Tag name Fuzzy Tuning Fuzzy Logic Daum 2465 z E 1138 B
479. you register as an user of the Software by the enclosed user registration card Please promptly fill in the card and send it to OMRON Corporation LU med mte mt InstallShield H accept the terms of the license agreement Print Head the license agreement completely and if you accept all of the terms select the accept the terms of the license agreement Option and click the Next Button 4 The User Information Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard User information Please enter user information Please enter your name company name and license number and then click Next User process Company o MRON License InstallShield Cancel The default names registered in the computer will be entered for the user name and company name Enter the license number and click the Next But ton The license number is given on the Software License Registration Card provided with the product 5 The Choose Destination Location Dialog Box will be displayed CX Process Tool InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install CX Process Tool in the following folder To install to this falder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Files OMRON CX One C Process Tools Browse Insta
480. ystem 28 02 Field Terminal 59 03 Send Terminal to all nodes 28 04 Receive Terminal from all n 1 05 Send Terminal to Computer 59 06 GPU Unit Terminal 23 07 Sequence Control 08 SCADA I F 897 Receive All Blocks 898 Send All Blocks 4 3 10 Temporary Memory 11 Block Diagram 1 103 Blocks to monitor function Internal Switch block ITEM tags from the CX Process Monitor Plus late Action Window Help 5 e ANAN x GINE 0 0 gt 4 l oep 1 UNES g Blocks to manipulate or display contacts from the CX Process Monitor Plus 138 Using the CX Process Monitor Plus Section 3 3 Set CSV Tags and Always set the CSV tags and tags for the CX Process Monitor Plus The CX Pro n E Monitor Plus cess Monitor Plus recognizes CSV tags and tags for the CX Process Monitor ags Plus using tag names Example for Internal Switch Block Block Model 209 Edit Monitor Plus Tag x LCU LOB ico 1 ej Group 11 Block Diagram 1 Function Block i08 Internal Switth o Tag Name Comment 0 at t Unit Alarm Setting C Display Register Delete 017 517 OK Cancel Wem No of character Prohibited characters Note Set the range upper limit RH and range lower limit RL for scaling on th
481. ystem name Plant name User Customer Mate Company Manager e user comment can be input for a function block folder Double click the func tion block folder The following Register Job Information Dialog Box will ap pear Input the comment and click the OK Button Register Job Information Revision date 2002 21 Device Cancel Registering Multiple Nodes Displaying Active Nodes Switching to Active Node The CX Process Tool makes it possible to register a maximum of 32 nodes to a single project Project data can be edited for only one node The node that can be edited is called the active node editing and online operations are pos sible at the active node Inactive nodes are only displayed in the tree and they cannot be edited or controlled online The active node is displayed as a red folder in the project tree Inactive nodes are displayed as white folders Active node Red folder Inactive Node White folder To switch an inactive node to active select Settings Set Active Node or select the applicable node from the project tree and then right click and select Set Ac tive Node from the pop up menu Note A maximum of 32 nodes can be handled by the CX Process Tool If the Commu nications Unit is set for more than 32 it will not be possible to go online from the CX Process Tool Therefore set 32 or less for the Communications Unit node numbers Changing Commu

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series WS02-LCTC1-EV5 CX

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents